Pontiac 2008 Grand Prix Owners Manual Owner's

: Pontiac Pontiac-2008-Pontiac-Grand-Prix-Owners-Manual-818959 pontiac-2008-pontiac-grand-prix-owners-manual-818959 pontiac pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 450

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

2008 Pontiac Grand Prix Owner Manual
Seats and Restraint Systems ........................... 1-1
Front Seats ............................................... 1-2
Rear Seats
............................................... 1-9
Safety Belts ............................................. 1-10
Child Restraints
....................................... 1-29
Airbag System
......................................... 1-52
Restraint System Check
............................ 1-66
Features and Controls ..................................... 2-1
Keys
........................................................ 2-2
Doors and Locks ...................................... 2-10
Windows ................................................. 2-16
Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................ 2-18
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle
........... 2-23
Mirrors .................................................... 2-38
OnStar® System
...................................... 2-40
Storage Areas
......................................... 2-43
Sunroof
.................................................. 2-44
Instrument Panel ............................................. 3-1
Instrument Panel Overview .......................... 3-4
Climate Controls
...................................... 3-28
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators
........ 3-38
Driver Information Center (DIC)
.................. 3-55
Audio System(s) ....................................... 3-94

M

Driving Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-1
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle
..... 4-2
Towing
................................................... 4-27
Service and Appearance Care .......................... 5-1
Service ..................................................... 5-3
Fuel ......................................................... 5-5
Checking Things Under the Hood
............... 5-10
Headlamp Aiming ..................................... 5-51
Bulb Replacement
.................................... 5-54
Windshield Replacement
........................... 5-61
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
......... 5-61
Tires
...................................................... 5-62
Appearance Care
................................... 5-109
Vehicle Identification
............................... 5-119
Electrical System
.................................... 5-120
Capacities and Specifications
................... 5-128
Maintenance Schedule ..................................... 6-1
Maintenance Schedule ................................ 6-2
Customer Assistance Information .................... 7-1
Customer Assistance and Information
........... 7-2
Reporting Safety Defects ........................... 7-14
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy
........... 7-16
Index ................................................................ 1

Canadian Owners
A French language copy of this manual can be obtained
from your dealer/retailer or from:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem, PONTIAC,
the PONTIAC Emblem, and the names GRAND PRIX,
and GXP are registered trademarks of General Motors
Corporation.
This manual includes the latest information at the time it
was printed. We reserve the right to make changes after
that time without notice. For vehicles first sold in Canada,
substitute the name “General Motors of Canada Limited”
for Pontiac Division whenever it appears in this manual.
This manual describes features that may be available in
this model, but your vehicle may not have all of them. For
example, more than one entertainment system may be
offered or your vehicle may have been ordered without a
front passenger or rear seats.
Keep this manual in the vehicle for quick reference.

Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 15863021 B Second Printing
ii

1-800-551-4123
www.helminc.com

Propriétaires Canadiens
On peut obtenir un exemplaire de ce guide en français
auprès de concessionnaire ou à l’adresse suivante:
Helm Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
1-800-551-4123
www.helminc.com

©

2007 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.

Using this Manual
You should read this owner manual from beginning to
end when you first receive the new vehicle to learn
about the vehicle’s features and controls. Pictures and
words work together to explain things.

Index
A good place to quickly locate information about the
vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual. It is
an alphabetical list of what is in the manual and
the page number where it can be found.

Safety Warnings and Symbols
There are a number of safety cautions in this book.
A box with the word CAUTION is used to tell about
things that could hurt you or others if you were to
ignore the warning.

{CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
We tell you what the hazard is and what to do to help
avoid or reduce the hazard. Please read these cautions.
If you do not, you or others could be hurt.
A circle with a slash
through it is a safety
symbol which means
“Do Not,” “Do Not do
this” or “Do Not let
this happen.”

iii

Vehicle Damage Warnings

Vehicle Symbols

You will also find notices in this manual.

The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along
with the text describing the operation or information
relating to a specific component, control, message,
gage, or indicator.

Notice: These mean there is something that
could damage your vehicle.
A notice tells about something that can damage the
vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be covered
by your vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly.
The notice tells what to do to help avoid the damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors
or in different words.
There are also warning labels on the vehicle which
use the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.

iv

Section 1

Seats and Restraint Systems

Front Seats ......................................................1-2
Manual Seats ................................................1-2
Power Seat ...................................................1-3
Power Lumbar ...............................................1-4
Heated Seats .................................................1-4
Reclining Seatbacks ........................................1-5
Head Restraints .............................................1-7
Passenger Folding Seatback ............................1-8
Rear Seats .......................................................1-9
Split Folding Rear Seat ...................................1-9
Safety Belts ...................................................1-10
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ................1-10
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly .................1-15
Lap-Shoulder Belt .........................................1-22
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ..................1-28
Safety Belt Extender .....................................1-28
Child Restraints .............................................1-29
Older Children ..............................................1-29
Infants and Young Children ............................1-32
Child Restraint Systems .................................1-35

Where to Put the Restraint .............................1-38
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) ..................................................1-39
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Seat Position ....................................1-46
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position ............................................1-49
Airbag System ...............................................1-52
Where Are the Airbags? ................................1-55
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .....................1-57
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .......................1-58
How Does an Airbag Restrain? .......................1-58
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? .....1-58
Passenger Sensing System ............................1-60
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...........1-64
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle ....................................................1-65
Restraint System Check ..................................1-66
Checking the Restraint Systems ......................1-66
Replacing Restraint System Parts After
a Crash ...................................................1-67

1-1

Front Seats
Manual Seats

{CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle
is moving. The sudden movement could startle
and confuse you, or make you push a pedal
when you do not want to. Adjust the driver’s
seat only when the vehicle is not moving.
Lift the bar located under the front of the seat to unlock
it. Slide the seat to where you want it and release
the bar. Try to move the seat with your body to be sure
the seat is locked in place.

1-2

Power Seat

The driver’s seat power control is located on the
outboard side of the seat.
To adjust the seat, do any of the following:

• Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding the
control forward or rearward.

• Raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion by
moving the front of the control up or down.

• Raise or lower the rear part of the seat cushion by
moving the rear of the control up or down.

• Raise or lower the entire seat by moving the entire
control up or down.

Driver’s Seat Power Seat Control, Power Lumbar,
and Manual Recline shown

1-3

Power Lumbar

Heated Seats
If the vehicle has this
feature, the buttons are
located on the climate
control panel. See Climate
Control System on
page 3-28 for more
information.

Press the button once to activate the high heat setting.
Both indicator lights next to the button will come on.
Driver’s Seat with Power Seat, Power Lumbar, and
Manual Recline shown
Your driver’s seat may have power lumbar. The control
is located on the outboard side of the seat cushion.
Press the control forward to increase lumbar support.
Press the control rearward to decrease lumbar support.
Keep in mind that as your seating position changes,
as it may during long trips, so should the position of your
lumbar support. Adjust the seat as needed.

1-4

Press the button again to select the lower temperature
setting. Only the bottom indicator light will come on.
Press the button a third time to turn the heat off.
This feature only works when the ignition is on.

Reclining Seatbacks

{CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle
is moving. The sudden movement could startle
and confuse you, or make you push a pedal
when you do not want to. Adjust the driver’s
seat only when the vehicle is not moving.

{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.

Driver’s Seat with Power Seat, Power Lumbar, and
Manual Recline shown
To recline the seatback, do the following:
1. Lift the recline lever.
2. Move the seatback to the desired position, then
release the lever to lock the seatback in place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.

The seats have manual reclining seatbacks. The lever
used to operate them is located on the outboard side of
the seats.
1-5

To return the seatback to an upright position, do the
following:
1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to the
seatback and the seatback will return to the upright
position.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.

{CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle
is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you
buckle up, your safety belts cannot do their
job when you are reclined like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job because it
will not be against your body. Instead, it will be
in front of you. In a crash, you could go into it,
receiving neck or other injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a
crash, the belt could go up over your
abdomen. The belt forces would be there, not
at your pelvic bones. This could cause serious
internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well back in the seat and wear your safety belt
properly.
Do not have a seatback reclined if the vehicle is
moving.

1-6

Head Restraints

Pull the head restraint up
to raise it.

To lower the head restraint, press the button, located
on the top of the seatback, and push the head
restraint down.

Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint
is at the same height as the top of the occupant’s
head. This position reduces the chance of a neck injury
in a crash.

1-7

Passenger Folding Seatback

If the vehicle has this feature, the front passenger seat
can be folded flat for more cargo space.

{CAUTION:
If you fold the seatback forward to carry longer
objects, such as skis, be sure any such cargo
is not near an airbag. In a crash, an inflating
airbag might force that object toward a person.
This could cause severe injury or even death.
Secure objects away from the area in which
an airbag would inflate. For more information,
see Where Are the Airbags? on page 1-55 and
Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-22.

{CAUTION:
Things you put on this seatback can strike and
injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or in a
crash. Remove or secure all items before
driving.

1-8

To fold the front passenger seatback flat, pull up on the
lever located on back of the seat. Push the seatback
forward until it locks in place.
To return the seatback to the upright position, pull up on
the lever on the back of the seat. Push the seatback
up until it locks in place.

To lower the rear seatback,
pull the tab located on the
outboard side of the
seatback and fold the
seatback forward.

{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked.

Rear Seats
Split Folding Rear Seat
Both sides of the rear seatback can be folded down.
This gives direct access to the trunk. Make sure the front
seats are not reclined. If they are, the rear seatback(s)
may not fold down all the way.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts
still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts
and return them to their normal stowed position
before folding a rear seat.

{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
To raise the rear seatback, lift the seatback up until it
latches. Push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is
locked in position.
The seatbacks should be kept in the upright, locked
position when they are not being used to extend the
cargo area.
1-9

Safety Belts
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety
belts properly. It also tells you some things you should
not do with safety belts.

{CAUTION:
Do not let anyone ride where he or she cannot
wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a
crash and you are not wearing a safety belt,
your injuries can be much worse. You can hit
things inside the vehicle harder or be ejected
from it and be seriously injured or killed. In the
same crash, you might not be, if you are
buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt,
and check that your passenger(s) are
restrained properly too.

1-10

{CAUTION:
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely to
be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow
people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is
not equipped with seats and safety belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a safety belt properly.
Your vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle your
safety belts. See Safety Belt Reminders on page 3-41.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
requires wearing safety belts. Here is why:
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you do not know if it will be a serious one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person would not survive.
But most crashes are in between. In many of them,
people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk
away. Without belts they could have been badly hurt or
killed.
After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles, the
facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter... a lot!

Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.

Put someone on it.

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat on
wheels.

1-11

Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
does not stop.

1-12

The person keeps going until stopped by something.
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...

or the instrument panel...

or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why
safety belts make such good sense.

1-13

Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if
I am wearing a safety belt?

A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety
belt or not. But your chance of being conscious
during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle
and get out, is much greater if you are belted.
And you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you are
upside down.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?

A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so they
work with safety belts — not instead of them.
Whether or not an airbag is provided, all occupants
still have to buckle up to get the most protection.
That is true not only in frontal collisions, but
especially in side and other collisions.

1-14

Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?

A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in a
crash — even one that is not your fault — you and
your passenger(s) can be hurt. Being a good
driver does not protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)
of home. And the greatest number of serious
injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than
40 mph (65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.

How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This section is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different rules for
smaller children and babies. If a child will be riding in your
vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-29 or Infants and
Young Children on page 1-32. Follow those rules for
everyone’s protection.
It is very important for all occupants to buckle up.
Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more often
in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.
Occupants who are not buckled up can be thrown out of
the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others in
the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
First, before you or your passenger(s) wear a safety
belt, there is important information you should know.

Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor in
front of you. The lap part of the belt should be worn low
and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash,
this applies force to the strong pelvic bones and you
would be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid
under it, the belt would apply force on your abdomen.
This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The
shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the
chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt
restraining forces.
The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash.
1-15

Q: What is wrong with this?

{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit snugly against
your body.

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give as
much protection this way.

1-16

Q: What is wrong with this?

{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is
too loose. In a crash, you could slide under the
lap belt and apply force on your abdomen.
This could cause serious or even fatal injuries.
The lap belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs.

A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly as
much protection this way.

1-17

Q: What is wrong with this?

{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen.
The belt forces would be there, not on the
pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.

A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.

1-18

Q: What is wrong with this?

{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt goes
over an armrest like this. The belt would be
much too high. In a crash, you can slide under
the belt. The belt force would then be applied
on the abdomen, not on the pelvic bones, and
that could cause serious or fatal injuries.
Be sure the belt goes under the armrests.

A: The belt is over an armrest.

1-19

Q: What is wrong with this?

{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to
the ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver or spleen. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder and across
the chest.

A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.

1-20

Q: What is wrong with this?

{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by not wearing
the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash, you
would not be restrained by the shoulder belt.
Your body could move too far forward
increasing the chance of head and neck injury.
You might also slide under the lap belt.
The belt force would then be applied right on
the abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest.

A: The belt is behind the body.

1-21

Q: What is wrong with this?

{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.
In a crash, you would not have the full width of
the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is
twisted, make it straight so it can work
properly, or ask your dealer/retailer to fix it.

Lap-Shoulder Belt
All seating positions in your vehicle have a
lap-shoulder belt.
Here is how to wear a lap-shoulder belt properly.
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is adjustable, so you can
sit up straight. To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.

A: The belt is twisted across the body.

1-22

2. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
If you ever pull the shoulder portion of a passenger
belt out all the way, you may engage the child
restraint locking feature. If this happens, just let the
belt go back all the way and start again.

3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 1-28.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if necessary.

5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
It may be necessary to pull stitching on the safety
belt through the latch plate to fully tighten the
lap belt on smaller occupants.

4. If equipped with a shoulder belt height adjuster,
move it to the height that is right for you. Improper
shoulder belt height adjustment could reduce
the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
See “Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment” later in
this section.
1-23

Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
Your vehicle has a shoulder belt height adjuster for the
driver and right front passenger position.
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt
is centered on your shoulder. The belt should be
away from your face and neck, but not falling off your
shoulder. Improper shoulder belt height adjustment
could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt
in a crash.

To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close a door, be sure the belt is out of the
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage
both the belt and your vehicle.

To move it down, pull the
release button (A) out and
move the height adjuster
to the desired position.
You can move the
height adjuster up just
by pushing up on the
shoulder belt guide.

After you move the height adjuster to where you want it,
try to move it down without pressing the release
button to make sure it has locked into position.

1-24

Safety Belt Pretensioners
Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for front
outboard occupants. Although you cannot see them,
they are part of the safety belt assembly. They can help
tighten the safety belts during the early stages of a
moderate to severe frontal or near frontal crash if the
threshold conditions for pretensioner activation are met.

There is one guide for each outboard passenger position
in the rear seat. Here is how to install a comfort guide to
the safety belt:

Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in a
crash, you will need to get new ones, and probably other
new parts for your safety belt system. See Replacing
Restraint System Parts After a Crash on page 1-67.

Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide added
safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown
booster seats and for some adults. When installed on
a shoulder belt, the comfort guide positions the belt
away from the neck and head.

1. Pull the elastic cord out from between the edge of
the seatback and the interior body to remove the
guide from its storage clip.

1-25

2. Place the guide over the belt and insert the
two edges of the belt into the slots of the guide.

1-26

3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the
guide on top.

{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is not properly worn may not
provide the protection needed in a crash.
The person wearing the belt could be seriously
injured. The shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest. These parts of
the body are best able to take belt restraining
forces.

4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt as
described previously in this section. Make sure
that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guide, squeeze the
belt edges together so that you can take them out of the
guide. Pull the guide upward to expose its storage
clip, and then slide the guide onto the clip. Turn the
guide and clip inward and slide them in between the
seatback and the interior body, leaving only the loop of
the elastic cord exposed.

1-27

Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy

Safety Belt Extender

Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.

If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you
should use it.

A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother.
When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more likely that
the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For pregnant women,
as for anyone, the key to making safety belts effective is
wearing them properly.
1-28

But if a safety belt is not long enough, your
dealer/retailer will order you an extender. When you go
in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear,
so the extender will be long enough for you. To help
avoid personal injury, do not let someone else use
it, and use it only for the seat it is made to fit. The
extender has been designed for adults. Never use it for
securing child seats. To wear it, attach it to the
regular safety belt. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that comes with the extender.

Child Restraints
Older Children

The manufacturer’s instructions that come with the
booster seat state the weight and height limitations for
that booster. Use a booster seat with a lap-shoulder belt
until the child passes the below fit test:

• Sit all the way back on the seat. Do the knees bend
at the seat edge? If yes, continue. If no, return to
the booster seat.

• Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Does the shoulder belt
rest on the shoulder? If yes, continue. If no, try
using the rear safety belt comfort guide. See “Rear
Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under Lap-Shoulder
Belt on page 1-22 for more information. If the
shoulder belt still does not rest on the shoulder,
then return to the booster seat.

• Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips,
touching the thighs? If yes, continue. If no, return to
the booster seat.

• Can proper safety belt fit be maintained for the
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.

length of the trip? If yes, continue. If no, return
to the booster seat.

1-29

Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt and
get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can
provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face
or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the
hips, just touching the top of the thighs. This applies
belt force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.
It should never be worn over the abdomen, which
could cause severe or even fatal internal injuries in
a crash.
Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under
Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 1-22.
According to accident statistics, children and infants are
safer when properly restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seating positions.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.

1-30

{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt.
The belt cannot properly spread the impact
forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A belt
must be used by only one person at a time.

{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. In a crash, the child would
not be restrained by the shoulder belt. The
child might slide under the lap belt. The belt
force would then be applied right on the
abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The child could also move too far
forward increasing the chance of head and
neck injury. The shoulder belt should go over
the shoulder and across the chest.

1-31

Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says children up to some age
must be restrained while in a vehicle.

Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,
they should have the protection provided by appropriate
restraints. Children who are not restrained properly
can strike other people, or can be thrown out of
the vehicle. In addition, young children should not use
the vehicle’s adult safety belts alone; they need to use a
child restraint.

{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Children can be seriously injured or strangled
if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck
and the safety belt continues to tighten.
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle
and never allow children to play with the
safety belts.

1-32

People should never hold an infant in their arms
while riding in a vehicle. An infant does not
weigh much — until a crash. During a crash an
infant will become so heavy it is not possible to
hold it. For example, in a crash at only 25 mph
(40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) infant will suddenly
become a 240 lb (110 kg) force on a person’s
arms. An infant should be secured in an
appropriate restraint.

{CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer protection for adults and older
children, but not for young children and
infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system
nor its airbag system is designed for them.
Young children and infants need the protection
that a child restraint system can provide.
1-33

Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?

{CAUTION:

A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take
into consideration not only the child’s weight, height,
and age but also whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will
be used.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing a
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used
in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a
label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.

1-34

Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck.
This is necessary because a newborn infant’s
neck is weak and its head weighs so much
compared with the rest of its body. In a crash,
an infant in a rear-facing seat settles into
the restraint, so the crash forces can be
distributed across the strongest part of an
infant’s body, the back and shoulders. Infants
should always be secured in appropriate infant
restraints.

Child Restraint Systems

{CAUTION:
The body structure of a young child is quite
unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom
the safety belts are designed. A young child’s
hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s
regular safety belt may not remain low on the
hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle
up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the
belt would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal injuries. Young
children should always be secured in
appropriate child restraints.

A rear-facing infant
seat (A) provides restraint
with the seating surface
against the back of
the infant.

The harness system holds the infant in place and, in a
crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.
A forward-facing child
seat (B) provides restraint
for the child’s body
with the harness.

1-35

Securing an Add-On Child Restraint in
the Vehicle

{CAUTION:

A booster seat (C-D) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system.
A booster seat can also help a child to see out the
window.

1-36

A child can be seriously injured or killed in a
crash if the child restraint is not properly
secured in the vehicle. Make sure the child
restraint is properly installed in the vehicle
using the vehicle’s safety belt or LATCH
system, following the instructions that came
with that restraint, and also the instructions in
this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint
must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems
must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the
lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH
system. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 1-39 for more information. A child can
be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is not
properly secured in the vehicle.
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the
instructions that come with the restraint which may be on
the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this
manual. The child restraint instructions are important, so
if they are not available, obtain a replacement copy
from the manufacturer.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move
around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in
the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child restraint
in your vehicle — even when no child is in it.

Securing the Child Within the Child
Restraint

{CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a
crash if the child is not properly secured in
the child restraint. Because there are different
systems, it is important to refer to the
instructions that come with the restraint.
Make sure the child is properly secured,
following the instructions that came with that
restraint.

1-37

Where to Put the Restraint
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
We recommend that children and child restraints
be secured in a rear seat, including: an infant or a child
riding in a rear-facing child restraint; a child riding in
a forward-facing child seat; an older child riding in
a booster seat; and children, who are large enough,
using safety belts.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.

{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag if the system detects a
rear-facing child restraint, no system is
fail-safe, and no one can guarantee that an
airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off. We
recommend that rear-facing child restraints be
secured in a rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
If you secure a forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move the front
passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is
better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-60
for additional information.

1-38

When securing a child restraint in a rear seating
position, study the instructions that came with your child
restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure to
secure the child restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move
around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in
the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child restraint
in your vehicle — even when no child is in it.

Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH)
The LATCH system holds a child restraint during driving
or in a crash. This system is designed to make
installation of a child restraint easier. The LATCH
system uses anchors in the vehicle and attachments
on the child restraint that are made for use with the
LATCH system.

Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint is
properly installed using the anchors, or use the vehicle’s
safety belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint, and also the
instructions in this manual. When installing a child
restraint with a top tether, you must also use either the
lower anchors or the safety belts to properly secure
the child restraint. A child restraint must never be
installed using only the top tether and anchor.
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, you
need a child restraint that has LATCH attachments.
The child restraint manufacturer will provide you
with instructions on how to use the child restraint and its
attachments. The following explains how to attach a
child restraint with these attachments in your vehicle.
Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have
lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors
and attachments.

1-39

Lower Anchors

Top Tether Anchor

Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the vehicle.
There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating
position that will accommodate a child restraint with
lower attachments (B).

A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraint
to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the
vehicle. The top tether attachment (B) on the child
restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle
in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation
of the child restraint during driving or in a crash.

1-40

Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or a
dual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B)
to secure the top tether to the anchor.

Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor
Locations

i (Top Tether Anchor):

Some child restraints that have a top tether are designed
for use with or without the top tether being attached.
Others require the top tether always to be attached. In
Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for
your child restraint.
If the child restraint does not have a top tether, one can
be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints. Ask
the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit
is available.

Seating positions with
top tether anchors.

j (Lower Anchor):
Seating positions with
two lower anchors.

Rear Seat
To assist you in locating
the lower anchors, each
seating position with lower
anchors has two labels,
near the crease between
the seatback and the seat
cushion.

1-41

To assist you in locating
the top tether anchors, the
top tether anchor symbol
is located on the cover.

The top tether anchors are located on the rear seatback
filler panel. Open the cover to access the anchors.
Be sure to use an anchor located on the same side of
the vehicle as the seating position where the child
restraint will be placed.
Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a
top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be attached, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top tether must
be attached.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
See Where to Put the Restraint on page 1-38 for
additional information.

1-42

Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System

{CAUTION:
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached
to anchors, the restraint will not be able to
protect the child correctly. In a crash, the child
could be seriously injured or killed. Make sure
that a LATCH-type child restraint is properly
installed using the anchors, or use the
vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint,
following the instructions that came with that
restraint, and also the instructions in this
manual.

{CAUTION:
Each top tether anchor and lower anchor in the
vehicle is designed to hold only one child
restraint. Attaching more than one child
restraint to a single anchor could cause the
anchor or attachment to come loose or even
break during a crash. A child or others could
be injured if this happens. To help prevent
injury to people and damage to your vehicle,
attach only one child restraint per anchor.

1-43

{CAUTION:
Children can be seriously injured or strangled
if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck
and the safety belt continues to tighten.
Secure any unused safety belts behind the
child restraint so children cannot reach them.
Pull the shoulder belt all the way out of the
retractor to set the lock, if your vehicle has
one, after the child restraint has been installed.
Be sure to follow the instructions of the child
restraint manufacturer.
Notice: Contact between the child restraint LATCH
attachment parts and the vehicle’s safety belt
assembly may cause damage to these parts.
Make sure when securing unused safety belts
behind the child restraint that there is no contact
between the child restraint LATCH attachment parts
and the vehicle’s safety belt assembly.

1-44

Folding an empty rear seat with the safety belts
secured may cause damage to the safety belt or the
seat. When removing the child restraint, always
remember to return the safety belts to their normal,
stowed position before folding the rear seat.
1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the
lower anchors. If the child restraint does not have
lower attachments or the desired seating position
does not have lower anchors, secure the child
restraint with the top tether and the safety belts.
Refer to your child restraint manufacturer
instructions and the instructions in this manual.
1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired
seating position.
1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower attachments on
the child restraint to the lower anchors.
2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that
the top tether be attached, attach and tighten the
top tether to the top tether anchor, if equipped.
Refer to the child restraint instructions and
the following steps:
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
2.2. Pull open the top tether anchor cover to
expose the anchor.

2.3. Route, attach, and tighten the top tether
according to your child restraint instructions
and the following instructions:
If the position you are
using does not have a
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
single tether, route the
tether over the seatback.

If the position you are
using does not have a
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
dual tether, route the tether
over the seatback.

If the position you are
using has a fixed headrest
or head restraint and
you are using a single
tether, route the tether over
the headrest or head
restraint.

If the position you are
using has a fixed headrest
or head restraint and
you are using a dual tether,
route the tether around
the headrest or head
restraint.

3. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.

1-45

Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Seat Position

In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.

When securing a child restraint in a rear seating
position, study the instructions that came with your child
restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.

If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the safety belt to secure the child
restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint.
Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the
instructions say.

If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on
page 1-39 for how to install your child restraint using
LATCH. If you secure a child restraint using a safety belt
and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-39 for top
tether anchor locations.
Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a
top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top strap must
be anchored.

1-46

If you need to install more than one child restraint in the
rear seat, be sure to read Where to Put the Restraint
on page 1-38.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.

3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Make sure the release button is positioned so you
would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly
if necessary.

4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.

1-47

6. If your child restraint has a top tether, follow the
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions regarding
the use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors
and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-39 for
more information.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. If the top tether
is attached to a top tether anchor, disconnect it.

5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt, and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. If you are using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful
to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.

1-48

Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
Your vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer place to
secure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where to
Put the Restraint on page 1-38.
In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensing
system which is designed to turn off the right front
passenger’s frontal airbag under certain conditions.
See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-60
and Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-43 for
more information on this, including important safety
information.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.

{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag if the system detects a rear-facing
child restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no
one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in a rear
seat, even if the airbag is off.
If you secure a forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move the front
passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is
better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-60
for additional information.

1-49

If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on
page 1-39 for how to install your child restraint using
LATCH. If you secure a child restraint using a safety belt
and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-39 for top
tether anchor locations.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.

Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the
top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top strap must
be anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Follow the instructions that
came with the child restraint.
1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before
securing the forward-facing child restraint.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag, the off
indicator on the passenger airbag status indicator
should light and stay lit when you start the
vehicle. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on
page 3-43.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
1-50

4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Make sure the release button is positioned so you
would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly
if necessary.

5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.

6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap
portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. If you are using a forward-facing
child restraint, you may find it helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child restraint as you
tighten the belt.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
If the airbag is off, the off indicator in the passenger
airbag status indicator will come on and stay on when
the vehicle is started.

1-51

If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint.
If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make
sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child
restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly
recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat
cushion if possible. Also make sure the child restraint is
not trapped under the vehicle head restraint. If this
happens, adjust the head restraint.
Remove any additional material from the seat such as
blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters or seat
massagers before reinstalling or securing the child
restraint.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the child
restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle and
check with your dealer/retailer.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way.

1-52

Airbag System
Your vehicle has the following airbags:

• A frontal airbag for the driver.
• A frontal airbag for the right front passenger
Your vehicle may also have the following airbags:

• A roof-rail airbag for the driver and the passenger
seated directly behind the driver.

• A roof-rail airbag for the right front passenger and
the passenger seated directly behind the right
front passenger.
All of the airbags in your vehicle will have the word
AIRBAG embossed in the trim or on an attached label
near the deployment opening.
For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear on the
middle part of the steering wheel for the driver and
on the instrument panel for the right front passenger.
With roof-rail airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear
along the headliner or trim.

Airbags are designed to supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Even though today’s airbags
are also designed to help reduce the risk of injury
from the force of an inflating bag, all airbags must inflate
very quickly to do their job.
Here are the most important things to know about the
airbag system:

{CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash
if you are not wearing your safety belt — even
if you have airbags. Wearing your safety belt
during a crash helps reduce your chance of
hitting things inside the vehicle or being
ejected from it. Airbags are “supplemental
restraints” to the safety belts. All airbags are
designed to work with safety belts, but do not
replace them.

{CAUTION:
Frontal airbags are designed to deploy in
moderate to severe frontal and near frontal
crashes. They are not designed to inflate in
rollover, rear crashes, or in many side crashes.
Roof-rail airbags are designed to inflate in
moderate to severe crashes where something
hits the side of your vehicle. They are not
designed to inflate in frontal, in rollover, or in
rear crashes.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety
belt properly — whether or not there is an
airbag for that person.

1-53

{CAUTION:

{CAUTION:

Airbags inflate with great force, faster than the
blink of an eye. Anyone who is up against, or
very close to, any airbag when it inflates can
be seriously injured or killed. Do not sit
unnecessarily close to the airbag, as you would
be if you were sitting on the edge of your seat or
leaning forward. Safety belts help keep you in
position before and during a crash. Always wear
your safety belt, even with airbags. The driver
should sit as far back as possible while still
maintaining control of the vehicle.

Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer the best
protection for adults, but not for young children
and infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt
system nor its airbag system is designed for
them. Young children and infants need the
protection that a child restraint system can
provide. Always secure children properly in
your vehicle. To read how, see Older Children
on page 1-29 or Infants and Young Children on
page 1-32.

Occupants should not lean on or sleep against
the door or side windows in seating positions
with roof-rail airbags.

There is an airbag
readiness light on the
instrument panel, which
shows the airbag symbol.

The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-42
for more information.
1-54

Where Are the Airbags?

The right front passenger’s airbag is in the instrument
panel on the passenger’s side.
The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of the
steering wheel.

1-55

{CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an
airbag, the airbag might not inflate properly or
it might force the object into that person
causing severe injury or even death. The path
of an inflating airbag must be kept clear.
Do not put anything between an occupant and
an airbag, and do not attach or put anything
on the steering wheel hub or on or near any
other airbag covering.

Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar
If your vehicle has roof-rail airbags for the driver, right
front passenger, and second row outboard passengers,
they are in the ceiling above the side windows.

1-56

If your vehicle has roof-rail airbags, never
secure anything to the roof of your vehicle by
routing the rope or tie down through any door
or window opening. If you do, the path of an
inflating roof-rail airbag will be blocked.

When Should an Airbag Inflate?
Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to
severe frontal or near-frontal crashes to help reduce the
potential for severe injuries mainly to the driver’s or right
front passenger’s head and chest. However, they are only
designed to inflate if the impact exceeds a predetermined
deployment threshold. Deployment thresholds are used
to predict how severe a crash is likely to be in time for the
airbags to inflate and help restrain the occupants.
Whether your frontal airbags will or should deploy is not
based on how fast your vehicle is traveling. It depends
largely on what you hit, the direction of the impact, and
how quickly your vehicle slows down.
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.
For example:

• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbags
could inflate at a different crash speed than if the
vehicle hits a moving object.

• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the airbags
•

could inflate at a different crash speed than if the
vehicle hits an object that does not deform.
If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole), the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if
the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).

• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if
the vehicle goes straight into the object.

Thresholds can also vary with specific vehicle design.
Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during vehicle
rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.
In addition, your vehicle has dual-stage frontal airbags.
Dual-stage airbags adjust the restraint according to crash
severity. Your vehicle has electronic frontal sensors,
which help the sensing system distinguish between a
moderate frontal impact and a more severe frontal
impact. For moderate frontal impacts, dual-stage airbags
inflate at a level less than full deployment. For more
severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.
Your vehicle may or may not have roof-rail airbags.
See Airbag System on page 1-52. Roof-rail airbags are
intended to inflate in moderate to severe side crashes.
Roof-rail airbags will inflate if the crash severity is above
the system’s designed threshold level. The threshold
level can vary with specific vehicle design.
Roof-rail airbags are not intended to inflate in frontal
impacts, near-frontal impacts, rollovers, or rear impacts.
A roof-rail airbag is intended to deploy on the side of the
vehicle that is struck.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an airbag
should have inflated simply because of the damage to a
vehicle or because of what the repair costs were.
For frontal airbags, inflation is determined by what the
vehicle hits, the angle of the impact, and how quickly the
vehicle slows down. For roof-rail airbags, deployment is
determined by the location and severity of the side impact.
1-57

What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
In a deployment event, the sensing system sends an
electrical signal triggering a release of gas from
the inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the airbag
causing the bag to break out of the cover and deploy.
The inflator, the airbag, and related hardware are all part
of the airbag module.
Frontal airbag modules are located inside the steering
wheel and instrument panel. For vehicles with
roof-rail airbags, there are airbag modules in the ceiling
of the vehicle, near the side windows that have
occupant seating positions.

How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel
or the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle.
Airbags supplement the protection provided by safety
belts. Frontal airbags distribute the force of the
impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body,
stopping the occupant more gradually. Roof-rail airbags
distribute the force of the impact more evenly over
the occupant’s upper body.

1-58

But airbags would not help in many types of collisions,
primarily because the occupant’s motion is not
toward those airbags. See When Should an Airbag
Inflate? on page 1-57 for more information.
Airbags should never be regarded as anything more
than a supplement to safety belts.

What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates?
After the frontal airbags inflate, they quickly deflate, so
quickly that some people may not even realize an
airbag inflated. Roof-rail airbags may still be at least
partially inflated for some time after they deploy.
Some components of the airbag module may be hot for
several minutes. For location of the airbag modules,
see What Makes an Airbag Inflate? on page 1-58.
The parts of the airbag that come into contact with you
may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There may
be some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the
deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent
the driver from seeing out of the windshield or being
able to steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent people from
leaving the vehicle.

{CAUTION:
When an airbag inflates, there may be dust in
the air. This dust could cause breathing
problems for people with a history of asthma or
other breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone
in the vehicle should get out as soon as it is
safe to do so. If you have breathing problems
but cannot get out of the vehicle after an airbag
inflates, then get fresh air by opening a window
or a door. If you experience breathing problems
following an airbag deployment, you should
seek medical attention.
Your vehicle has a feature that may automatically
unlock the doors, turn the interior lamps on, and turn
the hazard warning flashers on when the airbags inflate.
You can lock the doors, turn the interior lamps off,
and turn the hazard warning flashers off by using the
controls for those features.

In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the
right front passenger airbag.

• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an
airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for
the airbag system. If you do not get them, the airbag
system will not be there to help protect you in
another crash. A new system will include airbag
modules and possibly other parts. The service
manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace
other parts.

• Your vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnostic
module which records information after a crash.
See Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy on
page 7-16 and Event Data Recorders on page 7-16.

• Let only qualified technicians work on the airbag
systems. Improper service can mean that an
airbag system will not work properly. See your
dealer/retailer for service.

1-59

Passenger Sensing System
Your vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the
right front passenger’s position. The passenger
airbag status indicator will be visible on the instrument
panel when you start your vehicle.

The passenger sensing system will turn off the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag under certain conditions.
The driver’s airbags are not part of the passenger
sensing system.
The passenger sensing system works with sensors that
are part of the right front passenger’s seat. The sensors
are designed to detect the presence of a properly-seated
occupant and determine if the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag should be enabled (may inflate) or not.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.

United States

Canada

The words ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off,
will be visible during the system check. If you are
using remote start to start your vehicle from a distance,
if equipped, you may not see the system check.
When the system check is complete, either the word
ON or the word OFF, or the symbol for on or the symbol
for off, will be visible. See Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator on page 3-43.

1-60

We recommend that children be secured in a rear seat,
including: an infant or a child riding in a rear-facing
child restraint; a child riding in a forward-facing child
seat; an older child riding in a booster seat; and children,
who are large enough, using safety belts.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.

{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag if the system detects a
rear-facing child restraint, no system is
fail-safe, and no one can guarantee that an
airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off. We
recommend that rear-facing child restraints be
secured in a rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
If you secure a forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move the front
passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is
better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.

The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag if:

• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.
• The system determines that an infant is present in
a rear-facing infant seat.

• The system determines that a small child is present
in a child restraint.

• The system determines that a small child is present
in a booster seat.

• A right front passenger takes his/her weight off of
the seat for a period of time.

• The right front passenger seat is occupied by a
smaller person, such as a child who has outgrown
child restraints.

• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag, the off indicator will
light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is off. See
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-43.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on indicator
is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child restraint from
the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint following the
child restraint manufacturer’s directions and refer to
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat
Position on page 1-49.
1-61

If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the
vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make
sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child
restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly
recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat
cushion if possible. Also make sure the child restraint is
not trapped under the vehicle head restraint. If this
happens, adjust the head restraint. See Head Restraints
on page 1-7.
Remove any additional material from the seat such as
blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or
seat massagers before reinstalling or securing the
child restraint.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the child
restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle, and
check with your dealer/retailer.
The passenger sensing system is designed to enable
(may inflate) the right front passenger’s frontal airbag
anytime the system senses that a person of adult size is
sitting properly in the right front passenger’s seat.
When the passenger sensing system has allowed the
airbag to be enabled, the on indicator will light and stay lit
to remind you that the airbag is active.

1-62

For some children who have outgrown child restraints
and for very small adults, the passenger sensing system
may or may not turn off the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag, depending upon the person’s seating posture
and body build. Everyone in your vehicle who has
outgrown child restraints should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is an airbag for that
person.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting properly in the seat.
If this happens, turn the vehicle off, remove any
additional material from the seat, such as blankets,
cushions, seat covers, seat heaters or seat massagers
and ask the person to place the seatback in the fully
upright position, then sit upright in the seat, centered on
the seat cushion, with the person’s legs comfortably
extended. Restart the vehicle and have the person
remain in this position for two to three minutes.
This will allow the system to detect that person and
then enable the right front passenger’s frontal airbag.

{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light in the instrument
panel cluster ever comes on and stays on, it
means that something may be wrong with the
airbag system. If this ever happens, have the
vehicle serviced promptly, because an
adult-size person sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat may not have the protection
of the airbag(s). See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-42 for more on this, including
important safety information.

Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on the
seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking, which
helps the passenger sensing system maintain the
passenger airbag status. See “Safety Belts” and “Child
Restraints” in the Index for additional information
about the importance of proper restraint use.

A thick layer of additional material, such as a blanket or
cushion, or aftermarket equipment such as seat
covers, seat heaters, and seat massagers can affect
how well the passenger sensing system operates.
We recommend that you not use seat covers or other
aftermarket equipment other than any that GM has
approved for your specific vehicle. See Adding
Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 1-65 for more information about modifications that
can affect how the system operates.

1-63

The passenger sensing system may suppress the
airbag deployment when liquid soaks into the seat.
If this happens, the off indicator in the passenger airbag
status indicator and the airbag readiness light on the
instrument panel will be lit. The system should resume
normal operation after the seat is allowed to dry. If
the system operates incorrectly after the seat has dried,
have your dealer/retailer check the system.

Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
Airbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the airbag system in several places
around your vehicle. Your dealer/retailer and the service
manual have information about servicing your vehicle and
the airbag system. To purchase a service manual, see
Service Publications Ordering Information on page 7-15.

{CAUTION:
Stowing of articles under the passenger’s seat
or between the passenger’s seat cushion and
seatback may interfere with the proper
operation of the passenger sensing system.

1-64

{CAUTION:
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition is turned
off and the battery is disconnected, an airbag
can still inflate during improper service. You
can be injured if you are close to an airbag when
it inflates. Avoid yellow connectors. They are
probably part of the airbag system. Be sure to
follow proper service procedures, and make
sure the person performing work for you is
qualified to do so.

Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle

Q: Is there anything I might add to or change
about the vehicle that could keep the airbags
from working properly?

A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s
frame, bumper system, height, front end or side
sheet metal, they may keep the airbag system from
working properly. Changing or moving any parts
of the front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing
and diagnostic module, steering wheel, instrument
panel, roof-rail airbag modules, ceiling headliner
or pillar garnish trim, front sensors, or airbag wiring
can affect the operation of the airbag system.
In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensing
system for the right front passenger’s position, which
includes sensors that are part of the passenger’s
seat. The passenger sensing system may not
operate properly if the original seat trim is replaced
with non-GM covers, upholstery or trim, or with GM
covers, upholstery or trim designed for a different
vehicle. Any object, such as an aftermarket seat
heater or a comfort enhancing pad or device,

installed under or on top of the seat fabric, could also
interfere with the operation of the passenger sensing
system. This could either prevent proper deployment
of the passenger airbag(s) or prevent the passenger
sensing system from properly turning off the
passenger airbag(s). See Passenger Sensing
System on page 1-60.
If you have any questions about this, you should
contact Customer Assistance before you modify
your vehicle. The phone numbers and addresses for
Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the
Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual.
See Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 7-2.

Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get
my vehicle modified. How can I find out whether
this will affect my airbag system?

A: If you have questions, call Customer Assistance.
The phone numbers and addresses for Customer
Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. See
Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 7-2.
In addition, your dealer/retailer and the service manual
have information about the location of the airbag sensors,
sensing and diagnostic module and airbag wiring.

1-65

Restraint System Check

Airbags

Checking the Restraint Systems

The airbag system does not need regularly scheduled
maintenance or replacement. Make sure the airbag
readiness light is working. See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-42 for more information.

Safety Belts
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors
and anchorages are working properly.
Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system
parts. If you see anything that might keep a safety
belt system from doing its job, have it repaired. Torn or
frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash.
They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn
or frayed, get a new one right away.
Make sure the safety belt reminder light is working.
See Safety Belt Reminders on page 3-41 for more
information.
Keep safety belts clean and dry. See Care of Safety
Belts on page 5-114.

1-66

Notice: If an airbag covering is damaged, opened,
or broken, the airbag may not work properly.
Do not open or break the airbag coverings. If there
are any opened or broken airbag covers, have
the airbag covering and/or airbag module replaced.
For the location of the airbag modules, see What
Makes an Airbag Inflate? on page 1-58. See
your dealer/retailer for service.

Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash

{CAUTION:
A crash can damage the restraint systems in
your vehicle. A damaged restraint system may
not properly protect the person using it,
resulting in serious injury or even death in a
crash. To help make sure your restraint
systems are working properly after a crash,
have them inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as possible.

If you have had a crash, do you need new belts or
LATCH system (if equipped) parts?
After a very minor crash, nothing may be necessary.
But the belt assemblies that were used during any crash
may have been stressed or damaged. See your
dealer/retailer to have your safety belt assemblies
inspected or replaced.
If your vehicle has the LATCH system and it was being
used during a crash, you may need new LATCH
system parts.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the
belt or LATCH system (if equipped), was not being used
at the time of the crash.
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier
in this section.
Have your safety belt pretensioners checked if your
vehicle has been in a crash, if your airbag readiness
light stays on after you start your vehicle, or while you
are driving. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-42.

1-67

✍ NOTES

1-68

Section 2

Features and Controls

Keys ...............................................................2-2
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System ................2-3
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation ...................................................2-4
Remote Vehicle Start ......................................2-7
Doors and Locks ............................................2-10
Door Locks ..................................................2-10
Power Door Locks ........................................2-11
Delayed Locking ...........................................2-11
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ................2-12
Rear Door Security Locks ..............................2-12
Lockout Protection ........................................2-13
Trunk ..........................................................2-14
Windows ........................................................2-16
Power Windows ............................................2-17
Sun Visors ...................................................2-18
Theft-Deterrent Systems ..................................2-18
Content Theft-Deterrent .................................2-18
PASS-Key® III Electronic Immobilizer ...............2-20
PASS-Key® III Electronic Immobilizer
Operation .................................................2-21
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................2-23
New Vehicle Break-In ....................................2-23
Ignition Positions ..........................................2-23

Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................2-24
Starting the Engine .......................................2-25
Engine Coolant Heater ..................................2-26
Active Fuel Management™ .............................2-28
Automatic Transmission Operation ...................2-28
Parking Brake ..............................................2-33
Shifting Into PARK (P) ...................................2-34
Shifting Out of PARK (P) ...............................2-35
Parking Over Things That Burn .......................2-36
Engine Exhaust ............................................2-36
Running the Vehicle While Parked ..................2-37
Mirrors ...........................................................2-38
Manual Rearview Mirror .................................2-38
Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ..............2-38
Outside Power Mirrors ...................................2-39
Outside Convex Mirror ...................................2-39
OnStar® System .............................................2-40
Storage Areas ................................................2-43
Glove Box ...................................................2-43
Cupholder(s) ................................................2-43
Sunglasses Storage Compartment ...................2-44
Center Console Storage .................................2-44
Convenience Net ..........................................2-44
Sunroof .........................................................2-44

2-1

Keys

{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons, children
or others could be badly injured or even killed.
They could operate the power windows or
other controls or even make the vehicle move.
The windows will function with the keys in the
ignition and they could be seriously injured
or killed if caught in the path of a closing
window. Do not leave the keys in a vehicle
with children.
The key can be used for the ignition, as well as the
driver’s door lock and storage compartments.
The key comes with a bar coded tag attached to the
key ring. Keep this bar coded tag and give it to
your dealer/retailer if a new key needs to be made.
The vehicle has the PASS-Key® III vehicle theft system.
The key has a transponder in the key head that
matches a decoder in the vehicle’s instrument panel.

2-2

The key will have PK3 stamped on it. If a replacement
key or an additional key is needed, it must be
purchased from your dealer/retailer.
Any new PASS-Key® III key must be programmed
before it will start the vehicle. See PASS-Key® III
Electronic Immobilizer on page 2-20 for more
information on programming a new key.
In an emergency, contact Roadside Assistance.
See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-6 for
more information.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your vehicle,
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have spare keys.

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System
Your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system operates on
a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.

This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
At times you may notice a decrease in operating range.
This is normal for any RKE system. If the transmitter
does not work or if you have to stand closer to
your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:

• Check the distance. You may be too far from your
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during
rainy or snowy weather.

• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the
left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and
try again.

• Check to determine if battery replacement is
necessary. See “Battery Replacement” later in
this section.

• If you are still having trouble, see your dealer/retailer
or a qualified technician for service.

2-3

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter functions
will work up to 195 feet (60 m) away, however, the
operating range may be less while the vehicle is running.
There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter. See Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System on page 2-3.
The following functions
may be available with your
vehicle’s RKE system:

/ (Remote Vehicle Start): If your vehicle has this
feature, press / to start the engine from outside the
vehicle using the RKE transmitter. See Remote
Vehicle Start on page 2-7 for additional information.
Q (Lock): Press Q to lock all the doors. If enabled
through the Driver Information Center (DIC), the parking
lamps may flash once and the horn may chirp once
to indicate locking has occurred. See “REMOTE LOCKS
FEEDBACK” under DIC Operation and Displays
(Uplevel DIC with Trip Computer) on page 3-55 or DIC
Operation and Displays (Base Level DIC) on page 3-62
for programming information.
Pressing Q will arm the content theft-deterrent system.
See Content Theft-Deterrent on page 2-18 for more
information.

With Remote Start
Shown, Without Remote
Start Similar

2-4

" (Unlock): Press " one time to unlock the driver’s
door. Press " again within five seconds to unlock
the other doors. The interior lamps will come on and
stay on for 20 seconds or until the ignition is turned on.
If enabled through the DIC, the parking lamps may
flash once and the horn may chirp once to indicate
unlocking has occurred. See “REMOTE LOCKS
FEEDBACK” under DIC Operation and Displays (Uplevel
DIC with Trip Computer) on page 3-55 or DIC Operation
and Displays (Base Level DIC) on page 3-62.

Matching Transmitter(s) to
Your Vehicle
Each RKE transmitter is coded to prevent another
transmitter from unlocking your vehicle. If a transmitter
is lost or stolen, a replacement can be purchased
through your dealer/retailer. All transmitters need
to be re-coded to match the new transmitter. The lost
transmitter will no longer work after the new transmitters
are re-coded. The vehicle can have a maximum of
four transmitters matched to it.

Pressing " on the RKE transmitter will disarm the
content theft-deterrent system. See Content
Theft-Deterrent on page 2-18 for more details.

V (Trunk Release): Press and hold Vfor about
one second to release the trunk lid. The transaxle
must be in PARK (P) for this feature to operate.
L (Panic Alarm): Press Lto activate the alarm.
The ignition must be in LOCK/OFF for the remote alarm
to work. When Lis pressed, the headlamps will
flash and the horn will sound repeatedly for two minutes.
The alarm will turn off when the ignition is moved to
ON/RUN or the Lis pressed again.

2-5

Battery Replacement
Replace the battery if the KEY FOB BATTERY LOW
message displays in the DIC. See “KEY FOB BATTERY
LOW” under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-67
for additional information.
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not
to touch any of the circuitry. Static from your
body transferred to these surfaces may damage
the transmitter.

To replace the battery in the RKE transmitter:
1. Separate the halves of the transmitter with a flat,
thin object inserted into the notch on the side.
2. Remove the old battery. Do not use a metal object.
3. Insert the new battery, positive side facing up.
Replace with a CR2032 or equivalent battery.
4. Put the transmitter back together tightly.

2-6

Remote Vehicle Start
Your vehicle may have a remote starting feature that
allows you to start the engine from outside the vehicle.
It may also start the vehicle’s heating or air conditioning
systems and rear window defogger. When the remote
start system is active and the vehicle has an automatic
climate control system, it will automatically regulate
the inside temperature. Normal operation of these
systems will return after the ignition key is turned to
ON/RUN.
Laws in some communities may restrict the use of
remote starters. For example, some laws may require
a person using remote start to have the vehicle in
view when doing so. Check local regulations for
any requirements on remote starting of vehicles.
Do not use the remote start feature if your vehicle is
low on fuel. Your vehicle may run out of fuel.
If your vehicle has the remote start feature, the RKE
transmitter functions will have an increased range
of operation. However, the range may be less while
the vehicle is running.

There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter, see Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System on page 2-3 for additional
information.

/ (Remote Start):

This button will be on the RKE
transmitter if you have remote start.
To start the vehicle using the remote start feature:
1. Aim the transmitter at the vehicle.
2. Press and release the transmitter’s lock button, then
immediately press and hold the transmitter’s remote
start button for about four seconds or until the
vehicle’s turn signal lamps flash. The doors will lock.
When the vehicle starts, the parking lamps turn on
and remain on while the engine is running, and
the DIC will display REMOTE START ACTIVE
PRESS HAZARD SWITCH TO CANCEL.
The remote start feature provides two separate starts
per ignition cycle, each with 10 minutes of engine running
time, or one start with a time extension. The first start
must expire or be canceled to get two separate
10 minute starts.

2-7

If it is the first remote start since the vehicle has been
driven, repeat the previous steps, while the engine is still
running, to extend the engine running time by 10 minutes
from the time you repeat the steps for remote starting.
The remote start running time can be extended one time
and only after the first remote start.

After the engine has been started two times, or one
time with a time extension, the vehicle’s ignition must
be turned to ON/RUN using the key before the remote
start procedure can be used again. See Ignition
Positions on page 2-23 for information regarding the
ignition positions on your vehicle.

After entering the vehicle during a remote start, insert
and turn the key to ON/RUN to drive the vehicle.

The remote vehicle start feature will not operate if any
of the follow occur:

The engine will shut off automatically after 10 minutes,
unless a time extension has been done or the
vehicle’s key is inserted into the ignition switch and
turned to ON/RUN.
To manually shut off a remote start, do any of the
following.

• Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle and press
and release the remote start button.

• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
• Turn the ignition switch out of LOCK/OFF position
and then back to LOCK/OFF.
The parking lamps turn off to indicate the engine is off.

2-8

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

The remote start system is disabled through the DIC.
The vehicle’s key is in the ignition.
A door on the vehicle is open.
The vehicle’s hood is open.
The hazard warning flashers are on.
There is an emission control system malfunction.
The engine coolant temperature is too high.
The oil pressure is low.
Two remote vehicle starts, or one start with a time
extension, have already been provided for that
ignition cycle.

If a remote start is attempted and is unsuccessful,
the Driver Information Center (DIC) will display
REMOTE START DISABLED.
Vehicles that have the remote start feature are shipped
from the factory with the remote vehicle start system
enabled. The system may be enabled or disabled
through the DIC. See “REMOTE START” under
DIC Operation and Displays (Uplevel DIC with Trip
Computer) on page 3-55 or DIC Operation and
Displays (Base Level DIC) on page 3-62 for additional
information. If your vehicle does not have the DIC
feature, and remote vehicle start was installed at the
dealer/retailer, you will need to have the dealer/retailer
enable or disable the system.

Remote Start Ready
If your vehicle does not have the remote vehicle start
feature, it may have the remote start ready feature.
This feature allows your dealer/retailer to add the
manufacturer’s remote vehicle start feature.
See your dealer/retailer if you would like to add
the manufacturer’s remote vehicle start feature
to your vehicle.

2-9

Doors and Locks
Door Locks

{CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers, especially children, can easily
open the doors and fall out of a moving
vehicle. When a door is locked, the handle
will not open it. You increase the chance
of being thrown out of the vehicle in a
crash if the doors are not locked. So, wear
safety belts properly and lock the doors
whenever you drive.
• Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child
can be overcome by extreme heat and can
suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
whenever you leave it.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or
stop your vehicle. Locking your doors
can help prevent this from happening.

2-10

There are several ways to lock and unlock the vehicle.
From the outside, use the key or remote keyless
entry transmitter.
From the inside, use the manual or power door locks.
To manually lock or
unlock the doors from
inside the vehicle,
push down or pull up
on the door lock pin
located on the top of
each door panel.

Power Door Locks

Delayed Locking
To lock or unlock all
doors from inside the
vehicle, use the power
door lock switch located
on either front door.

This feature delays the locking of the vehicle’s doors for
five seconds after the last door is closed. Two chimes
will sound when the power door lock switch or the
LOCK button on the remote keyless entry transmitter
is pressed when a door is open. The chimes indicate
that the delayed locking feature is on.
The doors can be locked immediately by pressing the
power door lock switch or the LOCK button on the
transmitter a second time.
The delayed locking feature will not activate when the
ignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY.

Driver’s Side
Move the switch on the driver’s door to the right to lock
or to the left to unlock the doors. Move the switch on
the passenger’s door to the left to lock or to the right
to unlock the doors.

You can program this feature on or off through the
Driver Information Center (DIC) See “Personal
Programming Mode Screens” under DIC Vehicle
Customization on page 3-89.

If the vehicle has the content theft-deterrent system,
the vehicle may be programmed to arm the system with
the power door lock switch. See “Lock Switch Arm”
under DIC Vehicle Customization on page 3-89 for
more information on programming the system.

2-11

Programmable Automatic
Door Locks
The vehicle’s doors are programmed from the factory
to lock when the shift lever is moved into a forward
gear, and to unlock when the shift lever is moved
into PARK (P).
If someone needs to get in or out of the vehicle after
the doors have been locked, place the shift lever
into PARK (P). You may also unlock all doors using
the power door lock switch or unlock one door using
the inside manual door lock.

Rear Door Security Locks
Your vehicle has rear door security locks, that prevent
passengers from opening the rear doors from the inside.
The rear door security locks are located on the inside
edge of each rear door. You must open the rear doors
to access them.
To assist you in finding the lock, your vehicle will have
one of the following:

To program the door unlocking feature, see “Personal
Programming Mode Screens” under DIC Vehicle
Customization on page 3-89. The locking feature
cannot be disabled or programmed.

To use these locks, do the following:
1. Insert the key into the security lock slot and
turn it so the slot is in the horizontal position.
2. Close the door.
3. Do the same for the other rear door.
2-12

When you want to open a rear door when the security
lock is on, do the following:
1. Unlock the door using the remote keyless entry
transmitter, if the vehicle has one, the power door
lock switch, or by lifting the rear door manual lock.
2. Open the door from the outside.
To cancel the rear door security lock, do the following:
1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.
2. Insert the key into the security lock slot and
turn it so the slot is in the vertical position.

Lockout Protection
The lockout protection feature makes it more difficult
to lock the key in the vehicle. If the driver’s door is
open while the key is in the ignition, the door cannot
be locked with the power door lock switch.
This feature cannot guarantee that you will never
be locked out of the vehicle. If the key is not left in
the ignition, or, if the manual door lock pin is used,
the key could still be locked inside the vehicle.
Always remember to take the key with you.

3. Do the same for the other rear door.

2-13

Trunk

{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to drive with the trunk
lid open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas
can come into your vehicle. You cannot see or
smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness and
even death. If you must drive with the trunk
lid open or if electrical wiring or other cable
connections must pass through the seal
between the body and the trunk lid:
• Make sure all other windows are shut.
• Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed and select
the control setting that will force outside
air into your vehicle. See Climate Control
System.
• If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
See Engine Exhaust on page 2-36.

2-14

To unlock and open the trunk from the outside,
press the trunk button on the remote keyless entry
transmitter. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation on page 2-4.
To open the trunk from the inside, use the power door
lock switch located on the driver’s or front passenger’s
door. See “Remote Trunk Release” following.
The vehicle must be in PARK (P) in order for the
trunk to open.

Remote Trunk Release
This feature is used to unlock the trunk from inside
the vehicle using the power door lock switch.
Press and hold the
driver’s side power
door lock switch to
unlock the trunk.

Driver’s Side

Emergency Trunk Release Handle
Notice: Do not use the emergency trunk release
handle as a tie-down or anchor point when securing
items in the trunk as it could damage the handle.
The emergency trunk release handle is only
intended to aid a person trapped in a latched trunk,
enabling them to open the trunk from the inside.

There is a glow-in-the-dark emergency trunk release
handle located on the trunk latch of the trunk lid.
This handle will glow following exposure to light.
If ever needed, pull the emergency trunk release
handle to open the trunk from the inside.

2-15

Windows

{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets
in a vehicle with the windows closed is
dangerous. They can be overcome by the
extreme heat and suffer permanent injuries
or even death from heat stroke. Never leave
a child, a helpless adult, or a pet alone in a
vehicle, especially with the windows closed
in warm or hot weather.

2-16

Power Windows

{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the keys is
dangerous for many reasons, children or
others could be badly injured or even killed.
They could operate the power windows or
other controls or even make the vehicle move.
The windows will function and they could be
seriously injured or killed if caught in the path
of a closing window. Do not leave keys in a
vehicle with children.
When there are children in the rear seat
use the window lockout button to prevent
unintentional operation of the windows.

Use the switches
on the driver’s door
to operate each of
the windows.

Push the switch down or up to open or close the
window. The top switches operate the front windows,
and the bottom switches operate the rear windows.
Each passenger door also has a switch, located on the
armrest, that operates that window. Push the switch
rearward or forward to open or close the window.
The power window switches only work if the ignition
is on or in ACC/ACCESSORY, or while Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) is active. See Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) on page 2-24 for more
information.

2-17

Express-Down Window

Sun Visors

The driver’s window switch has an express-down
feature. This allows the window to open fully without
having to continuously hold the switch. Tap the switch
down, and the driver’s window will open a small
amount. Press the switch fully down and release
and the window will go all the way down.

To help block out glare, pull the sun visors down.
Pull on the inside edges of the sun visors to swing
them from the front windshield to the side window.

To stop the window while it is lowering, press the
bottom of the switch. To raise the window, press
and hold the bottom of the switch.

Visor Vanity Mirror
Raise the cover on the top of the sun visor to expose
the vanity mirror. If the vehicle has lighted vanity mirrors,
the lamps come on when the cover is opened.

Window Lockout

Theft-Deterrent Systems

o (Window Lockout): The driver’s window switch
includes a lockout feature located above the power
window switches on the driver’s door. Move the switch
to the right to prevent the passengers sitting in the
rear from using their window switches. The driver can
still control all the windows with the lockout on. Move
the switch to the left to disengage the lockout feature.

Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make
it impossible to steal.

2-18

Content Theft-Deterrent
The vehicle has a content theft-deterrent alarm system.

Your vehicle may have
a red light located on top
of the instrument panel,
toward the center of
the vehicle and near
the windshield, that will
flash slowly when the
system is armed.

The theft-deterrent alarm system needs to be
activated through the Driver’s Information Center (DIC).
See “Theft Deterrent” under the Personal Programming
Mode Screens in DIC Vehicle Customization on
page 3-89. While armed, the doors will not unlock with
the power door lock switch. The remote alarm will
sound if someone tampers with the trunk or enters
the vehicle without using the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter or key to unlock the doors.
The horn will sound and the headlamps will flash for
up to two minutes. The system will also cut off the fuel
supply, preventing the vehicle from being driven.

Arming with the Power Lock Switch
The vehicle’s content theft-deterrent alarm system
can be activated when the key is removed from
the ignition and the power door lock switch of either
the driver’s or front passenger’s door is used to lock
the vehicle. The door needs to be in the open
position when pressing the power door lock switch.
The alarm system will not activate if the door is
closed and the power door lock switch is pressed.
This system can be activated through the Driver’s
Information Center (DIC). See “Lock Switch Arm”
under the Personal Programming Mode Screens in
DIC Vehicle Customization on page 3-89.
When the doors are locked using the power door
lock switch of either front door, the red light, if your
vehicle has one, will start flashing indicating that
the system is arming. After all the doors are closed
there will be a time delay and then the red light,
if your vehicle has one, will begin to flash at a very
slow rate indicating the system is armed.

2-19

Arming with the RKE Transmitter

Disarming with Your Key

The alarm system will arm when the RKE transmitter
is used to lock the doors after the key is removed
from the ignition. The red light, if your vehicle has
one, will come on to indicate that the system is
arming. After all doors are closed and locked,
and after a time delay, the red light, if your vehicle
has one, will begin flashing at a very slow rate
to show the system is armed.

The alarm system will disarm when the key is used
to unlock the doors. The red light, if your vehicle has
one, will stop flashing when the system is disarmed.
If you would like the key to disarm the alarm system,
see “Personal Programming Mode Screens” under
DIC Vehicle Customization on page 3-89 for more
information.

Arming Confirmation
Your vehicle may have a red light located on top
of the instrument panel, towards the center of the
vehicle and near the windshield, that will flash
slowly to confirm when the system is armed.

Disarming with the RKE Transmitter
The alarm system will disarm when the RKE transmitter
is used to unlock the doors. The red light, if your
vehicle has one, will go out to show that the system
is disarmed.

2-20

PASS-Key® III Electronic
Immobilizer
Your PASS-Key III system operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.

This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization
to use this equipment.
PASS-Key III uses a radio frequency transponder in
the key that matches a decoder in your vehicle.

PASS-Key® III Electronic
Immobilizer Operation
The vehicle is equipped with PASS-Key® III
(Personalized Automotive Security System)
theft-deterrent system. PASS-Key® III is a passive
theft-deterrent system.
The system is automatically armed when the
key is removed from the ignition.

You do not have to manually arm or disarm the system.
The security light will come on if there is a problem
with arming or disarming the theft-deterrent system.
PASS-Key® III uses a transponder in the ignition
key that matches a decoder in the vehicle.
When the PASS-Key® III system senses that the wrong
key has been inserted into the ignition, it shuts down the
vehicle’s starter and fuel systems. The starter will not
work and fuel will stop flowing to the engine. If someone
tries to start the vehicle again with the wrong key, the
vehicle will not start. Anyone using a trial-and-error
method to start the vehicle will be discouraged to do so
because of the high number of electrical key codes.
When trying to start the vehicle, if the engine does not
start and the STARTING DISABLED DUE TO THEFT
SYSTEM warning message on the Driver Information
Center (DIC) comes on, there may be a problem
with your theft-deterrent system. Turn the ignition off
and try again.
If the engine still does not start, and the key appears to
be undamaged, try another ignition key. At this time,
you may also want to check the fuse. See Fuses and
Circuit Breakers on page 5-121. If the engine still does
not start with the other key, the vehicle needs service.

2-21

If the vehicle does start, the first key may be faulty. See
your dealer/retailer who can service the PASS-Key® III
to have a new key made. In an emergency, contact
Roadside Assistance. See Roadside Assistance Program
on page 7-6 for more information.
It is possible for the PASS-Key® III decoder to accept
the transponder value of a new or replacement key.
Up to 10 keys may be programmed for the vehicle.
If all the programmed keys are lost or do not operate,
see your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III to have keys made and programmed
to the system.
Canadian Owners: If all the keys are lost or damaged,
only a dealer/retailer can service PASS-Key® III to
have new keys made and programmed to the system.
The following procedure is for programming a new
or replacement key when you have at least one
already programmed key. To program the new key
do the following:
1. Verify that the new key has PK3 stamped on it.
2. Insert the master key in the ignition and start
the engine. If the engine will not start, see your
dealer/retailer for service.
3. After the engine has started, turn the key to
LOCK/OFF, and remove the key.

2-22

4. Insert the key to be programmed and turn it to
ON/RUN within five seconds of removing the
original key.
5. The STARTING DISABLED DUE TO THEFT
SYSTEM warning message on the DIC will turn off,
once the key has been programmed. It may not
be apparent that the SERVICE THEFT SYSTEM
warning message went on due to how quickly
the key is programmed.
6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 if additional keys are to
be programmed.
If the STARTING DISABLED DUE TO THEFT SYSTEM
warning message appears and stays on the DIC while
the vehicle is being driven, the engine will be able to be
restarted if it is turned off. Your PASS-Key® III system,
however, is not working properly and must be serviced
by your dealer/retailer. The vehicle is not protected by
the PASS-Key® III system at this time.
If the PASS-Key® III key is lost or stolen, see your
dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III to have a new key made.
Do not leave the key or device that disarms or
deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle.

Starting and Operating
Your Vehicle
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an elaborate
break-in. But it will perform better in the long run
if you follow these guidelines:

Ignition Positions
The ignition switch is located on the instrument panel,
to the right of the steering column.
There are four different
positions. Insert the
key in the ignition and
turn it to the right for
each position.

• Do not drive at any one constant speed,
fast or slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km).
Do not make full-throttle starts. Avoid
downshifting to brake or slow the vehicle.

• Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles
(322 km) or so. During this time the new brake
linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops
with new linings can mean premature wear and
earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-in
guideline every time you get new brake linings.

• Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See
Towing a Trailer on page 4-29 for the trailer
towing capabilities of your vehicle and more
information.
Following break-in, engine speed and load can
be gradually increased.

In order to shift out of PARK (P), ignition must be in the
ON/RUN and the regular brake pedal must be applied.
Notice: Using a tool to force the key from the
ignition switch could cause damage or break the key.
Use the correct key and turn the key only with your
hand. Make sure the key is all the way in. If none of
this works, then your vehicle needs service.

9 (LOCK/OFF): This position locks the ignition,
steering wheel and transmission. It is a theft-deterrent
feature. This is the only position from which the key
can be removed.
2-23

If the steering wheel is locked, move it from right to
left and turn the key to ACC/ACCESSORY. If none
of this works, then your vehicle needs service.
ACC (ACC/ACCESSORY): This position allows things
like the radio and windshield wipers to operate while
the engine is off.

R (ON/RUN): This position is where the key returns
to after the vehicle is started. With the engine off,
the ON/RUN position displays some of the warning
and indicator lights.
The battery could be drained if you leave the key in the
ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN position with the engine
off. You may not be able to start your vehicle if the battery
is allowed to drain for an extended period of time.

/ (START): This position starts the engine. Let go
of the key when the engine starts. The key will return
to the ON/RUN for normal driving.
A continuous warning chime will sound and a KEY IN
IGNITION message will display on the Driver Information
Center (DIC) if the key is turned to LOCK/OFF or
ACC/ACCESSORY and the driver’s door is opened.

2-24

Key In the Ignition
Never leave your vehicle with the keys inside, as it
is an easy target for joy riders or thieves. If you
leave the key in the ignition and park your vehicle,
a chime will sound, when you open the driver’s door.
Always remember to remove your key from the ignition
and take it with you. This will lock your ignition and
transmission. Also, always remember to lock the doors.
The battery could be drained if you leave the key in
the ignition while your vehicle is parked. You may not
be able to start your vehicle after it has been parked
for an extended period of time.

Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
These vehicle accessories can be used for up to
10 minutes after the engine is turned off:

• Audio System
• Power Windows
• Sunroof (if equipped)
Power to these features will continue to operate for
up to 10 minutes after the key is turned to LOCK/OFF
until a door is opened.

Starting the Engine
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Your engine will not start in any other position – this is a
safety feature. To restart when you are already moving,
use NEUTRAL (N) only.
Notice: Do not try to shift to PARK (P) if your
vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift to PARK (P) only when your
vehicle is stopped.

Starting Procedure
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START. When the engine starts,
let go of the key. The idle speed will go down as
your engine gets warm. Do not race the engine
immediately after starting it. Operate the engine
and transmission gently to allow the oil to warm up
and lubricate all moving parts.

Your vehicle has a Computer-Controlled Cranking
System. This feature assists in starting the engine
and protects components. If the ignition key is turned
to the START position, and then released when the
engine begins cranking, the engine will continue
cranking for a few seconds or until the vehicle
starts. If the engine does not start and the key is
held in START for many seconds, cranking will be
stopped after 15 seconds to prevent cranking motor
damage. To prevent gear damage, this system also
prevents cranking if the engine is already running.
Engine cranking can be stopped by turning the
ignition switch to the ACC/ACCESSORY or
LOCK/OFF position.
Notice: Cranking the engine for long periods of
time, by returning the key to the START position
immediately after cranking has ended, can overheat
and damage the cranking motor, and drain the
battery. Wait at least 15 seconds between each try,
to let the cranking motor cool down.

2-25

2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,
especially in very cold weather (below 0°F or −18°C),
it could be flooded with too much gasoline. Try
pushing the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor
and holding it there as you hold the key in START
for up to a maximum of 15 seconds. Wait at least
15 seconds between each try, to allow the cranking
motor to cool down. When the engine starts, let go
of the key and accelerator. If the vehicle starts
briefly but then stops again, do the same thing.
This clears the extra gasoline from the engine.
Do not race the engine immediately after starting it.
Operate the engine and transmission gently until
the oil warms up and lubricates all moving parts.
Notice: The engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical parts
or accessories, you could change the way the engine
operates. Before adding electrical equipment, check
with your dealer/retailer. If you do not, your engine
might not perform properly. Any resulting damage
would not be covered by your vehicle’s warranty.

2-26

Engine Coolant Heater
The engine coolant heater, if available, can help in
cold weather conditions at or below 0°F (−18°C)
for easier starting and better fuel economy during
engine warm-up. Plug in the coolant heater at least
four hours before starting your vehicle. An internal
thermostat in the plug-end of the cord may exist
which will prevent engine coolant heater operation
at temperatures above 0°F (−18°C).

To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
The cord is located above the engine air
cleaner/filter. See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for more information
on location.
3. Plug the cord into a normal, grounded
110-volt AC outlet.

4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before, making sure to
keep it away from moving engine parts. If this is
not done, the cord could be damaged.
How long should the coolant heater be kept plugged in?
The answer depends on the outside temperature, the
kind of oil that is in the vehicle, and some other things.
Instead of trying to list everything here, we ask that
you contact your dealer/retailer in the area where the
vehicle will be parked. The dealer/retailer can give
you the best advice for that particular area.

{CAUTION:
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the
wrong kind of extension cord could overheat
and cause a fire. You could be seriously
injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord
will not reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.

2-27

Active Fuel Management™

Automatic Transmission Operation

Your vehicle’s engine may be equipped with Active
Fuel Management™. This system allows the engine
to operate on either all or half of its cylinders,
depending on your driving conditions.

The shift lever for the automatic transmission is
located on the console between the seats.

When less power is required, such as cruising at a
constant vehicle speed, the system will operate in
the half cylinder mode, allowing your vehicle to
achieve better fuel economy. When greater power
demands are required, such as accelerating from
a stop, passing, or merging onto a freeway, the
system will maintain full-cylinder operation.

Maximum engine speed is limited when the vehicle
is in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) to protect driveline
components from improper operation.
There are several
different positions
for the shift lever.

3800 V6 Engine
PARK (P): This position locks the front wheels.
It is the best position to use when the engine is
started because the vehicle cannot move easily.

2-28

{CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine
is running unless you have to. If you have
left the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle will not move, even
when you are on fairly level ground, always
set your parking brake and move the shift
lever to PARK (P). See Shifting Into PARK (P)
on page 2-34. If you are pulling a trailer,
see Towing a Trailer on page 4-29.

Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before
starting the engine. The vehicle has an automatic
transmission shift lock control system. You must fully
apply your regular brakes first and then press the
shift lever button, located on the front of the shift lever,
before you can shift from PARK (P) when the ignition
key is in RUN. If the vehicle cannot be shifted out
of PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift lever by pushing
it all the way into PARK (P) as you maintain brake
application. Then press the shift lever button and move
the shift lever into another gear. See Shifting Out of
PARK (P) on page 2-35.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped.
To rock the vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice or sand without damaging the transmission, see
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow
on page 4-21.

2-29

NEUTRAL (N): In this position, the engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart when the vehicle
is already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also,
use NEUTRAL (N) when the vehicle is being towed.

DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving.
It provides the best fuel economy for your vehicle.
If the vehicle needs more power for passing, and it is:

• Going less than 35 mph (55 km/h),
push the accelerator pedal about halfway down.

{CAUTION:
Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, your
vehicle could move very rapidly. You could
lose control and hit people or objects. Do not
shift into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed.
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)
with the engine running at high speed may
damage the transmission. The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Be sure the
engine is not running at high speed when
shifting your vehicle.

2-30

• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more,
push the accelerator pedal all the way down.
The vehicle will shift down to the next gear
and have more power.
Downshifting the transmission in slippery road conditions
could result in skidding, see Skidding under Loss of
Control on page 4-12.
Notice: If your vehicle seems to start up rather
slowly or not shift gears when you go faster, and
you continue to drive your vehicle that way, you
could damage the transmission. Have your vehicle
serviced right away. You can drive in SECOND (2)
when you are driving less than 35 mph (55 km/h)
and DRIVE (D) for higher speeds until then.
THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal driving.
However, it reduces vehicle speed more than DRIVE (D)
without using your brakes. You might choose THIRD (3)
instead of DRIVE (D) when driving on hilly, winding
roads, when towing a trailer, so there is less shifting
between gears, when going down a steep hill and when
driving on non-highway scenarios (i.e. city streets etc.).

SECOND (2): This position reduces vehicle speed
even more than THIRD (3) without using your brakes.
You can use SECOND (2) on hills. It can help control
the vehicle’s speed as it goes down steep mountain
roads, but then you would also want to use the brakes
off and on.
Notice: Driving in SECOND (2) for more than
25 miles (40 km) or at speeds over 55 mph (90 km/h),
can cause damage to your engine and/or
transmission. Also, shifting into SECOND (2) at
speeds above 65 mph (105 km/h) can cause damage.
Drive in DRIVE (D) instead of SECOND (2).
FIRST (1): This position reduces vehicle speed even
more than SECOND (2) without using your brakes.
It can be used on very steep hills, or in deep snow
or mud. If the shift lever is moved to FIRST (1),
while the vehicle is moving forward, the transmission
will not shift into first gear until the vehicle is going
slowly enough.

Performance Shifting with TAP-Shift®
If the vehicle is equipped with a 5.3L V8 engine,
it may have this feature. It allows you to change
gears similar to a manual transmission.
To fully use this feature, do the following:
1. The MANUAL (M) position can be selected while
the vehicle is moving. The current transmission
position will continue to be displayed on the
Driver Information Center (DIC) and Head-Up
Display (HUD), if equipped.
2. Move the shift lever
to the MANUAL (M).

Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle
in one place on a hill using only the accelerator
pedal may damage the transmission. The repair will
not be covered by your warranty. If you are stuck,
do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill,
use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.

2-31

3. The paddles are
located on the steering
wheel. They are used to
up-shift or down-shift
the transmission.

For more information, see Up-Shift Light on page 3-45
The up-shift light will only appear in the instrument
panel cluster if the HUD is off or if the vehicle does
not have HUD.
This prompt to up-shift, as needed, will be given
throughout acceleration. If up-shifting does not occur
when prompted, the vehicle speed will be limited
to protect the engine.
The gear position will display on the DIC and HUD,
if equipped, when in manual mode.

4. Push either paddle once to up-shift to the next
gear. Pull either paddle once to down-shift to
the next gear.
The vehicle will begin moving in first gear upon
acceleration. For better control in icy or slippery
conditions, the vehicle may start out in SECOND (2),
rather than FIRST (1). This will only occur if you
have “tapped up” to second gear.
The up-shift light on the
instrument panel cluster,
or the up-shift symbol on
the HUD, if equipped, is
given as a prompt to use
the TAP-Shift® paddle.

2-32

Pressing the accelerator while driving in the highest
gear (FOURTH (4)) between 20 mph (32 km/h)
and 50 mph (80 km/h), will make the transmission
automatically downshift. As your speed gets closer to
50 mph (80 km/h), you will need to increase accelerator
pedal travel to get the vehicle to downshift. At 50 mph
(80 km/h), even with the accelerator fully depressed,
the transmission will always remain in FOURTH (4).
The transmission will also automatically downshift as
the vehicle decelerates and comes to a stop.
If a paddle is pushed or pulled and the vehicle cannot
respond to a transmission gear change, a chime will
sound. The system will not allow either an up-shift or a
down-shift if the vehicle speed is too fast or too slow,
nor will it allow a start from THIRD (3) or higher gear.

Parking Brake
The parking brake is
located to the left of the
brake pedal near the
driver’s door. To set the
parking brake, hold
the regular brake pedal
down with the right
foot. Push down on the
parking brake pedal,
with the left foot.
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down with the right foot and push the parking
brake pedal with the left foot. When the left foot is lifted,
the parking brake pedal will lift to the released position.

The brake light will also appear on the instrument panel
cluster when the parking brake is set. It will stay on if
the parking brake does not release fully.
The PARKING BRAKE ON message will also appear in
the Driver Information Center (DIC) when the parking
brake is set. See DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 3-67 for more information.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Make sure
that the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
If the vehicle is towing a trailer and parked on a hill,
see Towing a Trailer on page 4-29. That section shows
what to do first to keep the trailer from moving.

A warning chime will sound if the parking brake is
set, the ignition is on, and the shift lever is not in
PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).

2-33

Shifting Into PARK (P)

{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
If you have left the engine running, the vehicle
can move suddenly. You or others could be
injured. To be sure your vehicle will not move,
even when you are on fairly level ground, use
the steps that follow. If you are pulling a trailer,
see Towing a Trailer on page 4-29.
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot
and set the parking brake. See Parking Brake
on page 2-33 for more information.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by holding in
the button on the shift lever and pushing the shift
lever all the way toward the front of the vehicle.
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your
hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).
2-34

Leaving Your Vehicle With the
Engine Running

{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with
the engine running. Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set. And,
if you leave the vehicle with the engine running,
it could overheat and even catch fire. You or
others could be injured. Do not leave your
vehicle with the engine running.
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and your
parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After
you have moved the shift lever into PARK (P), hold
the regular brake pedal down. Then, see if you
can move the shift lever away from PARK (P) without
first pushing the button.
If you can, it means that the shift lever was not fully
locked in PARK (P).

Torque Lock

Shifting Out of PARK (P)

If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift your
transmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the
vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl
in the transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the
shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called torque lock.
To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and
then shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave the
driver’s seat. To find out how, see Shifting Into PARK (P)
on page 2-34.

This vehicle has an electronic shift lock release system.
The shift lock release is designed to:

When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out
of PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.

The shift lock release is always functional except in the
case of an uncharged or low voltage (less than 9 volt)
battery.

If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push your vehicle a little uphill to take some of
the pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission,
so you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).

• Prevent ignition key removal unless the shift lever is
in PARK (P) with the shift lever button fully released,
and

• Prevent movement of the shift lever out of PARK (P),
unless the ignition is in ON/RUN and the regular
brake pedal is applied.

If your vehicle has an uncharged battery or a battery
with low voltage, try charging or jump starting the
battery. See Jump Starting on page 5-46 for more
information.
To shift out of PARK (P) use the following:
1. Apply the brake pedal.
2. Press the shift lever button.
3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.

2-35

If you still are unable to shift out of PARK (P):

Engine Exhaust

1. Fully release the shift lever button.
2. Hold the brake pedal down and press the
shift lever button again.
3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
If you still cannot move the shift lever from PARK (P),
consult your dealer/retailer or a professional towing
service.

Parking Over Things That Burn

{CAUTION:
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Do not
park over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other
things that can burn.

{CAUTION:
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you cannot see or
smell. It can cause unconsciousness and death.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
• The exhaust system sounds strange
or different.
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
• Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
• Your vehicle was damaged when driving
over high points on the road or over
road debris.
• Repairs were not done correctly.
• Your vehicle or the exhaust system has
been modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
your vehicle:
• Drive it only with all the windows down
to blow out any CO; and
• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.

2-36

Running the Vehicle While Parked
It is better not to park with the engine running.
But if you ever have to, here are some things to know.

{CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust
into your vehicle. See the earlier caution
under Engine Exhaust on page 2-36.
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle
even if the climate control fan is at the highest
setting. One place this can happen is a garage.
Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily.
NEVER park in a garage with the engine
running.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.
See Winter Driving on page 4-17.

{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. Do not leave your vehicle when the engine
is running unless you have to. If you have
left the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle will not move, even
when you are on fairly level ground, always
set the parking brake and move the shift lever
to PARK (P).
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will not
move. See Shifting Into PARK (P) on page 2-34.
If you are parking on a hill and if you are pulling a trailer,
also see Towing a Trailer on page 4-29.

2-37

Mirrors
Manual Rearview Mirror
When you are sitting in a comfortable driving position,
adjust the mirror so you can see clearly behind your
vehicle. Grip the mirror in the center to move it up
or down and side to side. The day/night adjustment
allows you to adjust the mirror to avoid glare from
the lamps behind you. Push the tab forward for daytime
use and pull it for nighttime use.
The mirror may have lights located on the bottom of
the mirror. Press the button next to each light to turn
it on or off.

2-38

Manual Rearview Mirror with
OnStar®
If your vehicle has this feature, this mirror has a knob
located at the bottom of the mirror. It is used to change
the mirror from day to night position. To reduce glare
from headlamps behind you while driving at night,
turn the knob counterclockwise. For daytime driving,
turn the knob clockwise.
There are also three OnStar® buttons located at the
bottom of the mirror face. See your dealer/retailer
for more information on the system and how to
subscribe to OnStar®. See OnStar® System on
page 2-40 for more information about the services
OnStar® provides.

Outside Power Mirrors
The power mirror controls
are located near the
driver’s window, on the
driver’s door armrest.

Outside Convex Mirror

{CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really
are. If you cut too sharply into the right
lane, you could hit a vehicle on your right.
Check your inside mirror or glance over your
shoulder before changing lanes.

Move the top control to the left to adjust the driver’s
side outside mirror. Move the control to the right
to adjust the passenger’s side mirror. The center
position turns the power control off and will not allow
the mirrors to move if the control pad is touched.

The passenger side mirror is convex shaped. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so more can be seen from
the driver seat. It also makes things, like other vehicles,
look farther away than they really are.

The round control pad adjusts the angle of the selected
outside mirror. Press the arrows on the control pad
to adjust the angle of the mirror. Adjust each mirror
so that the sides and the area behind the vehicle
can be seen.

2-39

OnStar® System

OnStar uses several innovative technologies and live
advisors to provide you with a wide range of safety,
security, information, and convenience services. If your
airbags deploy, the system is designed to make an
automatic call to OnStar Emergency advisors who can
request emergency services be sent to your location.
If you lock your keys in the vehicle, call OnStar at
1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can send a signal to
unlock your doors. If you need roadside assistance,
press the OnStar button and they can contact
Roadside Service for you.
OnStar service is provided to you subject to the
OnStar Terms and Conditions. You may cancel your
OnStar service at any time by contacting OnStar.

2-40

A complete OnStar Owner’s Guide and the OnStar
Terms and Conditions are included in the vehicle’s
OnStar Subscriber glove box literature. For more
information, visit onstar.com or onstar.ca, contact
OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827) or
TTY 1-877-248-2080, or press the OnStar button
to speak with an OnStar advisor 24 hours a day,
7 days a week.
Not all OnStar features are available on all vehicles.
To check if your vehicle is equipped to provide the
services described below, or for a full description of
OnStar services and system limitations, see the OnStar
Owner’s Guide in your glove box or visit onstar.com.

OnStar Services
For new vehicles with OnStar, the Safe & Sound Plan,
or the Directions & Connections Plan is included for
one year from the date of purchase. You can extend
this plan beyond the first year, or upgrade to the
Directions & Connections Plan. For more information,
press the OnStar button to speak with an advisor.
Some OnStar services (such as Remote Door Unlock
or Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance) may not be
available until you register with OnStar.

Available Services with Safe & Sound Plan
• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment
• Advanced Automatic Crash Notification (AACN)

OnStar Vehicle Diagnostics

OnStar Hands-Free Calling allows eligible OnStar
subscribers to make and receive calls using voice
commands. Hands-Free Calling is fully integrated
into the vehicle, and can be used with OnStar
Pre-Paid Minute Packages. Hands-Free Calling may
also be linked to a Verizon Wireless service plan
in the U.S. or a Bell Mobility service plan in Canada,
depending on eligibility. To find out more, refer to
the OnStar Owner’s Guide in the vehicle’s glove box,
visit www.onstar.com or www.onstar.ca, or speak
with an OnStar advisor by pressing the OnStar button
or calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).

GM Goodwrench On Demand Diagnostics

OnStar Virtual Advisor

OnStar Hands-Free Calling with
30 complimentary minutes

OnStar Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar
Hands-Free Calling that uses your minutes to
access location-based weather, local traffic reports,
and stock quotes. By pressing the phone button
and giving a few simple voice commands, you can
browse through the various topics. See the OnStar
Owner’s Guide for more information (Only available
in the continental U.S.).

(If equipped)

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

OnStar Hands-Free Calling

Link to Emergency Services
Roadside Assistance
Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance
AccidentAssist
Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert

• OnStar Virtual Advisor (U.S. Only)
Available Services included with
Directions & Connections Plan
• All Safe and Sound Plan Services
• Driving Directions - Advisor delivered or
OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped)

• RideAssist
• Information and Convenience Services
2-41

OnStar Steering Wheel Controls
Your vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button that can
be used to interact with OnStar Hands-Free Calling.
See Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 3-115
for more information.
On some vehicles, you may have to hold the button
for a few seconds and give the command “ONSTAR”
to activate the OnStar Hands-Free Calling.
On some vehicles, the mute button can be used to
dial numbers into voicemail systems, or to dial phone
extensions. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for
more information.

How OnStar Service Works
Your vehicle’s OnStar system has the capability
of recording and transmitting vehicle information.
This information is automatically sent to an OnStar
Call Center at the time of an OnStar button press,
Emergency button press or if your airbags or AACN
system deploys. The vehicle information usually
includes your GPS location and, in the event of a
crash, additional information regarding the accident
that your vehicle has been involved in (e.g. the
direction from which your vehicle was hit).

2-42

When you use the Virtual Advisor feature of OnStar
Hands-Free Calling, your vehicle also sends OnStar
your GPS location so that we can provide you with
location-based services.
OnStar service cannot work unless your vehicle is in a
place where OnStar has an agreement with a wireless
service provider for service in that area. OnStar service
also cannot work unless you are in a place where the
wireless service provider OnStar has hired for that area
has coverage, network capacity and reception when
the service is needed, and technology that is compatible
with the OnStar service. Not all services are available
everywhere, particularly in remote or enclosed areas,
or at all times.
Location information about your vehicle is only available if
the GPS satellite signals are unobstructed and available.
Your vehicle must have a working electrical system
(including adequate battery power) for the OnStar
equipment to operate. There are other problems OnStar
cannot control that may prevent OnStar from providing
OnStar service to you at any particular time or place.
Some examples are damage to important parts of your
vehicle in an accident, hills, tall buildings, tunnels,
weather or wireless phone network congestion.

Your Responsibility

Cupholder Installation and Removal

Increase the radio volume if you cannot hear the
OnStar advisor. If the light next to the OnStar buttons
is red, this means that your system is not functioning
properly and should be checked by your dealer/retailer.
If the light appears clear (no light is appearing),
your OnStar subscription has expired. You can
always press the OnStar button to confirm that
your OnStar equipment is active.

Storage Areas
Glove Box
To open the glove box, lift up on the lever.

Cupholder(s)
There are two cupholders in the front of the
center console.

Your vehicle may also have a rear cupholder that can
be installed by aligning it to the console and snapping
it into place. To remove, pull it up from the console.

2-43

Sunglasses Storage Compartment
Your vehicle may have a storage compartment located
to the rear on the overhead console. To open the
sunglasses storage compartment, press the release
latch forward and pull the compartment down.

The switch to control
the sunroof is located
in the headliner.

Center Console Storage
To open the armrest storage area, pull up on the latch
located on the front drivers side of the storage area.
The storage area may have a cassette/compact
disc holder. A storage pocket is located on the
passenger side of the console.

Convenience Net
Your vehicle may have a convenience net in the rear of
the vehicle. Store small loads as far forward as possible.
The net should not be used to store heavy loads.

Sunroof
If the vehicle has a sunroof, it includes a sliding glass
panel and a sunshade.

The switch works only while the ignition is in ON/RUN,
or in ACC/ACCESSORY, or Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) is on. See Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) on page 2-24.
Vent: Open the sunshade by hand. Push the switch
toward the rear of the vehicle once and the sunroof
will open to the vent position. Push the switch forward
to close.
Open/Express-Open: Push the switch toward the
rear of the vehicle a second time and the sunroof will
open the remainder of the way. The sunshade will open
with the sunroof. To stop the sunroof from opening,
push the switch toward the front of the vehicle.
Close: Push and hold the front of the switch until the
sunroof motor stops. The sunshade must be closed
by hand.

2-44

Section 3

Instrument Panel

Instrument Panel Overview ...............................3-4
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................3-6
Other Warning Devices ...................................3-6
Horn .............................................................3-6
Tilt Wheel .....................................................3-7
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .........................3-7
Turn and Lane-Change Signals ........................3-8
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer ..................3-9
Flash-to-Pass .................................................3-9
Windshield Wiper Lever .................................3-10
Cruise Control ..............................................3-12
Exterior Lamps .............................................3-16
Headlamps on Reminder ................................3-17
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) .......................3-17
Fog Lamps ..................................................3-18
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver ........................3-19
Interior Lamps ..............................................3-19
Instrument Panel Brightness ...........................3-19
Courtesy Lamps ...........................................3-19
Dome Lamp .................................................3-20
Entry Lighting ...............................................3-20
Delayed Entry Lighting ...................................3-20
Delayed Exit Lighting .....................................3-21
Front Reading Lamps ....................................3-21
Overhead Console Reading Lamps .................3-21
Rear Assist Handle Reading Lamps ................3-21
Electric Power Management ...........................3-22

Battery Run-Down Protection ..........................3-22
Head-Up Display (HUD) .................................3-23
Accessory Power Outlet(s) .............................3-26
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter ......................3-27
Climate Controls ............................................3-28
Climate Control System .................................3-28
Dual Automatic Climate Control System ...........3-32
Outlet Adjustment .........................................3-36
Passenger Compartment Air Filter ...................3-36
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............3-38
Instrument Panel Cluster ................................3-39
Speedometer and Odometer ...........................3-40
Tachometer .................................................3-40
Safety Belt Reminders ...................................3-41
Airbag Readiness Light ..................................3-42
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ...................3-43
Up-Shift Light ...............................................3-45
Brake System Warning Light ..........................3-45
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light ....3-47
Traction Control System (TCS) Warning Light ...3-47
Enhanced Traction System Warning Light .........3-48
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light ......3-48
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ..................3-49
Tire Pressure Light .......................................3-49
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............................3-50
Oil Pressure Light .........................................3-52
3-1

Section 3

Instrument Panel

Fog Lamp Light ............................................3-53
Cruise Control Light ......................................3-53
Highbeam On Light .......................................3-54
Fuel Gage ...................................................3-54
Driver Information Center (DIC) .......................3-55
DIC Operation and Displays
(Uplevel DIC with Trip Computer) ................3-55
DIC Operation and Displays
(Base Level DIC) .......................................3-62
DIC Compass (Uplevel DIC) ...........................3-65
DIC Warnings and Messages .........................3-67
DIC Vehicle Customization .............................3-89

3-2

Audio System(s) .............................................3-94
Setting the Clock ..........................................3-95
Radio(s) ......................................................3-95
Using an MP3 ............................................3-109
XM Radio Messages ...................................3-114
Theft-Deterrent Feature ................................3-115
Audio Steering Wheel Controls ......................3-115
Radio Reception .........................................3-116
Backglass Antenna ......................................3-117
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ............3-118
Chime Level Adjustment ...............................3-118

✍ NOTES

3-3

Instrument Panel Overview

3-4

The main components of the instrument panel are the following:
A. Side Window Defogger Outlets. See Outlet
Adjustment on page 3-36.
B. Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment on page 3-36.
C. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever and Cruise Controls.
See Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-7
and Cruise Control on page 3-12.
D. TAP-Shift® Control (If Equipped). See Automatic
Transmission Operation on page 2-28.
E. Hazard Warning Flashers Button. See Hazard
Warning Flashers on page 3-6.
F. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument Panel
Cluster on page 3-39.
G. Windshield Wiper Lever. See Windshield Wiper
Lever on page 3-10.
H. Ignition. See Ignition Positions on page 2-23.
I. Driver Information Center (DIC) (If Equipped). See
Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-55.
J. Audio System. See Audio System(s) on page 3-94.
K. Audio Steering Wheel Controls (If Equipped).
See Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 3-115.

L. Hood Release. See Hood Release on page 5-11.
M. Tilt Steering Wheel Lever, on Steering Column.
See Tilt Wheel on page 3-7.
N. Interior Lamps Brightness Control. See Interior
Lamps on page 3-19.
O. Passenger Air Bag Status Indicator. See Passenger
Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-43.
P. Climate Controls. See Climate Control System
on page 3-28.
Q. Shift Lever. See Automatic Transmission Operation
on page 2-28.
R. Traction Control Button (If Equipped). See Traction
Control System (TCS) on page 4-6.
S. Head Up Display (HUD) Control (If Equipped).
See Head-Up Display (HUD) on page 3-23.
T. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 2-43.
U. Instrument Panel Fuse Block. See Instrument Panel
Fuse Block on page 5-122.

3-5

Hazard Warning Flashers
The hazard warning flashers warn others. They also let
the police and other emergency vehicles know you
have a problem.
The hazard warning flasher
button is located on top of
the steering column.

The hazard warning flashers work no matter what
ignition position the key is in, and even if the key is not
in the ignition.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your vehicle’s
turn signals will not work.

Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set them up at
the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind
your vehicle.

Horn
Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal
lamps flash on and off. Press the button again to
turn the flashers off.

3-6

Press on or near the horn symbols on the steering
wheel pad to sound the horn.

Tilt Wheel

Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever

A tilt wheel enables the position of the steering wheel to
be adjusted. The lever that lets the steering wheel tilt
is located on the outboard side of the steering column.

The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:

• G Turn and Lane-Change Signals. See Turn and
Lane-Change Signals on page 3-8.

• 3 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer. See
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-9.
To tilt the steering wheel, hold it and pull the lever.
Move the steering wheel to a comfortable driving
position and release the lever to lock it into place.
Tilt the steering wheel to the highest position to give
more room when exiting and entering the vehicle.

• - Fog Lamps. See Fog Lamps on page 3-18.
• Flash-to-Pass Feature. See Flash-to-Pass on
page 3-9.

• I Cruise Control. See Cruise Control on
page 3-12.

• P Exterior Lamps Control. See Exterior Lamps
on page 3-16.
3-7

Turn and Lane-Change Signals
To signal a turn, move the turn signal lever located on
the left side of the steering column all the way up
or down. The lever returns automatically when the turn
is complete.
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster will flash in
the direction of the
turn or lane change.

Arrows that flash rapidly when signaling for a turn or
lane change may be caused by a burned-out signal bulb.
Other drivers will not see the signal.
Replace burned-out bulbs to help avoid possible
accidents. See Replacement Bulbs on page 5-60,
Front Turn Signal, Parking and Fog Lamps on
page 5-57, and Taillamps, Turn Signal, and Stoplamps
on page 5-58. Also, check the fuse for burned-out
bulbs if a turn signal arrow fails to work when signaling
a turn. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-121
for location information.

Turn Signal On Chime
If the vehicle is equipped with the Head-Up-Display
(HUD), a right or left turn signal will appear in the
HUD area when making turns or lane changes.
See Head-Up Display (HUD) on page 3-23 for more
information.
Raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash
to signal a lane change. Hold it there until the lane
change is complete. The lever returns to its original
position when it is released.

3-8

If the turn signal is left on for more than 0.75 of a mile
(1.21 km), a warning chime will sound and the TURN
SIGNAL ON warning message will appear on the
Driver Information Center (DIC) display. See “Turn
Signal On” under DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-67.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer

Flash-to-Pass

Push forward on the exterior lamps control lever to
change the headlamps from low to high-beam. Pull the
lever back and then release it to change from high
to low-beam.

This feature allows the use of the high-beam headlamps
to signal the driver in front of you that you want to pass.

This symbol appears on
the instrument panel
cluster when the
high-beam headlamps
are on.

Pull and hold the exterior lamps control lever to use this
feature. When this is done, the following will occur:

• The high-beam headlamps will turn on, while
the headlamps are off, in low-beam, or in Daytime
Running Lamps (DRL) mode. They will stay on
as long as the lever is held in this position. Release
the lever to turn them off.

• The headlamps will switch to low beam if the
headlamps had been in the high-beam mode.
To return to high-beam, push the lever.
When the high-beam headlamps are on, the fog lamps
will not be on. If the vehicle is equipped with the
Head-Up-Display (HUD) an arrow will appear in the
HUD area indicating that the high-beams are on.
See Head-Up Display (HUD) on page 3-23 for more
information.

If the vehicle is equipped with the Head-Up Display
(HUD), an arrow will appear on the display to indicate
that the high beams are on.

3-9

Windshield Wiper Lever
Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades
before using them. If they are frozen to the windshield,
gently loosen or thaw them. Damaged wiper blades
may not clear the windshield well, making it harder
to see and drive safely. If the blades do become
damaged, install new blades or blade inserts. For more
information, see Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
on page 5-61.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor.
A circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools down.
Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload.

N (Windshield Wipers):

The lever with this symbol,
located on the right side of the steering column,
operates the windshield wipers.

9 (Off):

Lower the lever to its original position to turn
the wipers off.

& (Delay):

Push the lever up once to this position
to set a delay between wiping cycles. Turn the
delay adjustment band to set the length of the delay.

3-10

x (Delay Adjustment): Turn the band, located on
the left of the windshield wiper lever, to set the length of
the delay between wiper cycles when using the delay
feature. There are five delay adjustment settings.
Turn the band up to make the delays shorter in between
wiper cycles. Turn the band down to make the delays
longer between wiper cycles. The windshield wiper lever
must be in delay for this feature to work.
6 (Low Speed): Push the lever up to the
second position for steady wiping cycles at a slow
speed.
1 (High Speed):

Push the lever up to the
third position for steady wiping cycles at a high speed.

Windshield Washer

{CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use your washer
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
blocking your vision.
The windshield washer button is located at the end of
the windshield wiper lever.

K (Washer Fluid):
7 (Mist):

For a single wiping cycle, push the
lever down once and let go. The wipers will stop after
one cycle. For additional cycles, hold the lever down.
About 30 seconds after the wipers are on, the
headlamps, taillamps, and instrument panel lighting
will come on, and the Driver Information Center (DIC)
back lighting will decrease to the night time mode.
About ten seconds after the wipers are turned off, all
the lamps will go back to the AUTO (Automatic) mode.
See Exterior Lamps on page 3-16.

Press this button to activate the
washer fluid to spray onto the windshield. The wipers
will run for a few cycles to clear the windshield. For more
wash cycles, press and hold the button.
If the vehicle is low on washer fluid, the LOW WASHER
FLUID message will appear on the Driver Information
Center (DIC) display. See “LOW WASHER FLUID”
under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-67 for
more information.

3-11

Cruise Control

9 (Off): This position
turns the system off.

{CAUTION:
Cruise control can be dangerous where
you cannot drive safely at a steady speed.
So, do not use your cruise control on winding
roads or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery
roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire
traction can cause excessive wheel slip, and
you could lose control. Do not use cruise
control on slippery roads.

R

(On): This position activates the system.

+ (Resume/Accelerate): This position to makes the
vehicle accelerate or resume to a previously set speed.

T (Set):

Press this button to set the speed.

With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of
about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your
foot on the accelerator. This can really help on long trips.
Cruise control does not work at speeds below about
25 mph (40 km/h).

3-12

Cruise control will not work if your parking brake is set,
or if the master cylinder brake fluid level is low.

{CAUTION:
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do
not use your cruise control on winding roads
or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery
roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire
traction can cause excessive wheel slip, and
you could lose control. Do not use cruise
control on slippery roads.
If cruise control is on when the Traction Control System
(TCS), if your vehicle has one, begins to limit wheel
spin, the cruise control will automatically disengage.
See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-6. When
road conditions allow you to safely use it again, you
may turn cruise control back on.

Setting Cruise Control

{CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise control on when you
are not using cruise, you might hit a button
and go into cruise when you do not want to.
You could be startled and even lose control.
Keep the cruise control switch off until you
want to use cruise control.

1. Move the cruise control switch to on.
2. Get up to the speed desired.
3. Press in the set button at the end of the lever
and release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
This symbol, along with
the CRUISE SET
message, will briefly
appear in the Driver
Information Center (DIC)
when the cruise control
is set.

3-13

The CRUISE SET message will also appear briefly on
the Head-Up Display (HUD), if your vehicle has one,
when the cruise control lever is pushed to the minus
(set) or the plus (resume/accelerate) positions.
A cruise control light will also appear on the instrument
panel cluster when the cruise control is on. This light
will disappear when the brakes are applied or the
cruise control is cancelled. It will reappear when the set
cruise speed is resumed. The light will go out when
the cruise control is turned off. See Cruise Control Light
on page 3-53.

Resuming a Set Speed
Once you are going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more,
you can move the cruise control switch briefly from on
to resume/accelerate.
Your vehicle will go back up to your previously chosen
speed and stay there.
If you hold the switch at resume/accelerate the vehicle
will keep going faster until you release the switch or
apply the brake. Do not hold the switch at resume/
accelerate, unless you want the vehicle to go faster.

3-14

Increasing Speed While Using
Cruise Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed:

• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher
speed. Press the set button at the end of the
lever, then release the button and the accelerator
pedal. You will now cruise at the higher speed. If the
accelerator pedal is held longer than 60 seconds,
cruise control will turn off.

• Move the cruise switch from on to
resume/accelerate. Hold it there until you get up
to the speed desired, and then release the
switch. To increase the vehicle speed in
very small amounts, move the switch briefly to
resume/accelerate. Each time this is done,
the vehicle will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
The acceleration feature will only work after the
cruise control speed has been set by pushing the
cruise control set button.

Reducing Speed While Using
Cruise Control
There are two ways to reduce the vehicle’s speed while
using cruise control:

• Press and hold the set button until you reach the
lower speed desired, then release it.

• To slow down in very small amounts, briefly press
the set button. Each time this is done, the vehicle
will slow down about one mph (1.6 km/h).

Passing Another Vehicle While
Using Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase the vehicle’s
speed. When you take your foot off the pedal, the
vehicle will slow down to the cruise control speed
set earlier.

Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well the cruise control will work on hills depends
upon the vehicle’s speed, its load, and the steepness of
the hills. When going up steep hills, the accelerator
pedal might have to be used in order to maintain
the vehicle’s speed. When going downhill, the brakes
might have to be applied, or the transmission might have
to be shifted to a lower gear to keep the vehicle’s
speed down. Doing either of these things will take the
vehicle out of cruise. It may be better not to use
the cruise control if the brakes constantly have to be
applied, or the vehicle continuously needs to be shifted
to a lower gear.

Ending Cruise Control
There are two ways to turn off the cruise control:

• Step lightly on the brake pedal.
• Move the cruise control switch to off.
Erasing Speed Memory
The cruise control set speed memory is erased when
the cruise control or the ignition is turned off.

3-15

Exterior Lamps

O (Exterior Lamp Control):

Turn the band with
this symbol on it to operate the exterior lamps.
The exterior lamp band has four positions:

O (Off):

Turn the band to this position to turn off

all lamps.
AUTO (Automatic): Turn the control to this position
to automatically turn on the headlamps at normal
brightness, together with the following:

The exterior lamp control is located to the left of the
steering wheel on the multifunction lever.
It controls the following systems:

•
•
•
•
•

Headlamps
Taillamps
Parking Lamps
License Plate Lamps
Instrument Panel Lights

3-16

•
•
•
•

Parking Lamps
Taillamps
License Plate Lamps
Instrument Panel Lights

To override AUTO mode, turn the control to off.
To reset to AUTO mode turn the control to exterior
lamps and then back to AUTO. Automatic mode will also
reset when the vehicle is turned off and then back on
again while the control is left in the AUTO position.

; (Parking Lamp): Turn the band to this position to
turn on the parking lamps together with the following:
• Taillamps
• License Plate Lamps
• Instrument Panel Lights
The parking brake indicator light comes on and stays
on when the parking lamps are on with the engine
in LOCK/OFF and the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY.

5 (Headlamps):

Turn the control to this position
to turn on the headlamps together with the following
lamps listed below. A warning chime sounds if the
driver’s door is opened while the ignition switch is off
and the headlamps are on.

•
•
•
•

Parking Lamps
Taillamps
License Plate Lamps
Instrument Panel Lights

Headlamps on Reminder

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier
for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day.
DRL can be helpful in many different driving conditions,
but they can be especially helpful in the short periods
after dawn and before sunset. Daytime running
lamps are required to function at all times on all
vehicles first sold in Canada.
A light sensor on top of the instrument panel makes
the DRL work, so be sure it is not covered.
The DRL system will make the low-beam headlamps
come on at reduced brightness when the following
conditions are met:

• The ignition is on.
• The exterior lamps control is off.
• The parking brake is released.
While the DRL are on, only the vehicle’s low-beam
headlamps will be on at reduced brightness. The turn
signal, taillamps, sidemarker and other lamps will not be
on. The instrument panel cluster will not be lit up either.

A warning chime will sound if the vehicle’s ignition is
off and the driver’s door is opened when the exterior
lamp control is left on in either the headlamp or
parking lamp position.
3-17

When it is dark enough outside, the DRL will turn off
and the vehicle’s headlamps and parking lamps will turn
on. The other lamps that come on with the headlamps
will also come on.

Fog Lamps

When it is bright enough outside, the headlamps will go
off and the DRL will come on.

- (Fog Lamps): Turn the second band on the exterior

To idle the vehicle with the DRL off, turn the exterior
lamp control off and then do one of the following:

• Turn the exterior lamp control to the parking
lamp position.

• Turn the exterior lamp control to the headlamp

If equipped, fog lamps provide brighter roadway lighting
for better vision in foggy or misty conditions.
lamps control lever to this position to turn the fog
lamps on. The band will return to its original position.
This symbol appears on
the instrument panel
cluster when the fog
lamps are on.

position.

• Turn the exterior lamp control from AUTO to off
and back to AUTO.
This feature is not available for vehicles first sold in
Canada.
To turn off the automatic headlamp feature when it is
dark outside, move the exterior lamp control to the
parking lamp position. The parking lamps will remain
illuminated and the headlamps will turn off. The
fog lamps will also go on if they were on previously.
As with any vehicle, the regular headlamp system
should be turned on when needed.

3-18

To turn the fog lamps off, turn the band up to the fog
lamp symbol and release it. The band will return
to its original position. If the high-beam headlamps are
on, the fog lamps will turn off. The fog lamps will go
on again when the low-beam headlamps are turned
back on.
The parking lamps must be on for the fog lamps
to work.
Some localities have laws that require the headlamps
to be on along with the fog lamps.

Exterior Lighting Battery Saver

Instrument Panel Brightness

If the parking lamps or headlamps have been left on
after the ignition has been turned to off, the exterior
lamps will turn off after about 10 minutes. This protects
the battery from being drained.

This feature controls the brightness of the instrument
panel lights.
The interior lamps
control is located on
the instrument panel,
to the left of the
steering column.

Use the exterior lamp control to turn the lamps back on,
if they are still needed.

Interior Lamps
The interior lamps can be controlled, or automatically
turn on or off under certain conditions. They are
explained in the following text.

Turn the control to adjust the brightness of the
instrument panel lights.

Courtesy Lamps
When a door is opened, the courtesy lamps will
automatically come on. These lamps will also come on
when the interior lamps control is fully turned clockwise.

3-19

Dome Lamp

Delayed Entry Lighting

If the vehicle does not have an overhead console, it will
have a dome light located in the front of the headliner.
The switch on this lamp has three positions. The
on position will turn on the lamp anytime. The door
position will turn on the lamp whenever a door is
opened. The off position will shut off the lamp
completely, even while a door is opened.

The delayed lighting feature will continue to light the
interior of the vehicle for 25 seconds after all the doors
have been closed. Delayed lighting will not occur while
the ignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY. After
25 seconds have elapsed, the interior lamps will slowly
fade out. The lamps will fade out before the 25 seconds
have elapsed if one of the following is done:

• The ignition is turned to ON/RUN or

Entry Lighting
The entry lighting feature turns the interior lights on
before anyone enters the vehicle. The interior lamps will
come on for 40 seconds when the doors are unlocked
using the remote keyless entry transmitter and the
ignition is in LOCK/OFF. After 40 seconds have elapsed,
the interior lamps will slowly fade out. The lamps will
fade out before 40 seconds have elapsed if one of the
following is done:
• Lock all doors using the remote keyless entry
transmitter.
• Lock the doors using the power door lock switch.
When any door is opened, entry lighting is cancelled.
The interior lamps will stay on while any door is opened
and slowly fade out when all doors are closed. The
interior lamps may stay on for up to 25 seconds after all
doors have been closed if they have not been locked.
3-20

ACC/ACCESSORY.

• The doors are locked using the remote keyless
entry transmitter.

• The doors are locked using the power door
lock switch.
To turn the delayed lighting feature off or on, see
“Personal Programming Modes” under DIC Vehicle
Customization on page 3-89.

Delayed Exit Lighting

Front Reading Lamps

For exiting the vehicle at night, the vehicle is equipped
with the delayed exit lighting feature. After the key
is removed from the ignition, the interior lamps will
light for up the amount of seconds set in the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See “Personal Programming
Mode Screens” under DIC Vehicle Customization
on page 3-89. After the set time has elapsed, the interior
lamps will slowly fade. The lamps will fade before the
set time has elapsed if one of the following is done:

If the vehicle has a sunroof, there are reading lamps in
front of the sunroof switch located on the headliner.
These lamps will come on when the doors are opened.
Press the side of each reading lamp to turn them on
and off when the doors are closed.

• The ignition is turned to ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY.

• The doors are locked using the remote keyless
entry transmitter.

• The doors are locked using the power door
lock switch.
When any door is opened, delayed exit lighting is
cancelled. The interior lamps will stay on while any
door is opened and will slowly fade out when all
the doors are closed. The interior lamps will stay on
for the set time after all the doors have been closed
if they have not been locked.

Overhead Console Reading Lamps
The vehicle may have reading lamps on the overhead
console. These lamps will turn on when the doors
are opened. When the doors are closed, press the
side of each lamp to turn them on and off.

Rear Assist Handle Reading Lamps
If the vehicle has a reading lamp on each rear assist
handle, press the side of each lamp to turn it on or off.

To turn the delayed exit lighting feature off or on,
see “Personal Programming Mode Screens” under
DIC Vehicle Customization on page 3-89.

3-21

Electric Power Management
The vehicle has Electric Power Management (EPM) that
estimates the battery’s temperature and state of charge.
It then adjusts the voltage for best performance and
extended life of the battery.
When the battery’s state of charge is low, the voltage is
raised slightly to quickly put the charge back in. When the
state of charge is high, the voltage is lowered slightly to
prevent overcharging. If the vehicle has a voltmeter gage
or voltage display on the Driver Information Center (DIC),
you may see the voltage move up or down. This is
normal. If there is a problem, an alert will be displayed.
The battery can be discharged at idle if the electrical
loads are very high. This is true for all vehicles.
This is because the generator (alternator) may not be
spinning fast enough at idle to produce all the power
that is needed for very high electrical loads.
A high electrical load occurs when several of the
following loads are on: headlamps, high beams, fog
lamps, rear window defogger, climate control fan at
high speed, heated seats, engine cooling fans, trailer
loads, and loads plugged into accessory power outlets.
EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of the
battery. It does this by balancing the generator’s output
and the vehicle’s electrical needs. It can increase
engine idle speed to generate more power, whenever
needed. It can temporarily reduce the power demands
of some accessories.
3-22

Normally, these actions occur in steps or levels, without
being noticeable. In rare cases at the highest levels
of corrective action, this action may be noticeable to
the driver. If so, a Driver Information Center (DIC)
message might be displayed, such as Battery Saver
Active. If this message is displayed, it is recommended
that the driver reduce the electrical loads as much
as possible. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-67.

Battery Run-Down Protection
The vehicle has a feature to help prevent the battery
from draining in case the interior, trunk, or underhood
lamps are accidentally left on. If any of these lamps are
left on while the ignition is in LOCK/OFF, they will
automatically turn off after 10 minutes. The lamps will not
come back on again until any of the following are done:

• The ignition is turned to ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY.

• The interior lamps control is turned completely to
the right, then back slightly to the left.

• Open, or close and reopen, a door that is closed.
If the vehicle has less than 15 miles (25 km) on the
odometer, the battery saver will turn off the lamps
after only three minutes.

Head-Up Display (HUD)

{CAUTION:
If the HUD image is too bright or too high in
your field of view, it may take you more time
to see things you need to see when it is dark
outside. Be sure to keep the HUD image dim
and placed low in your field of view.

The HUD information can be displayed in one of
three languages, English, French, or Spanish. The
speedometer reading and other numerical values can
be displayed in either English or metric units.
The language selection and the units of measurement
are changed through the trip computer in the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See “Options” under
DIC Operation and Displays (Uplevel DIC with
Trip Computer) on page 3-55 or DIC Operation and
Displays (Base Level DIC) on page 3-62.

If the vehicle has the Head-Up Display (HUD), some
information concerning the operation of the vehicle
is projected onto the windshield. This includes
the speedometer reading, transmission positions,
compass direction, outside air temperature, the tap
shift gear and the upshift symbol if active, and a brief
display of the current radio station, including XM
information or CD track. It will also display turn-by-turn
guidance information if the vehicle has a navigation
radio. The images are projected by the HUD lens
located on the driver’s side of the instrument panel.
The tap shift gear and the upshift symbol will also
appear on the HUD if the vehicle has tap shift and
it is active.

The HUD information appears as an image focused
out toward the front of the vehicle.

3-23

When the ignition key is turned to ON/RUN, the HUD
will display an introductory message for a short
time, until the HUD has warmed up.
The following indicator lights come on the instrument
panel when activated and will also appear on the HUD:

• Turn Signal Indicators
• High-Beam Indicator Symbol

When the HUD is on, the speedometer reading will
continually be displayed. The current radio station or
CD track number will display for a short period of time
after the radio or CD track status changes. This will
happen whenever one of the radio controls is pressed.
The speedometer size will be reduced when radio,
CD information, warnings, or turn-by-turn guidance
information are displayed on the HUD.

The HUD will temporarily display CHECK TRIP
COMPUTER when there are messages on the
DIC trip computer.

The HUD control is
located on the console.

The HUD will also display the following messages when
these systems, if the vehicle has them, are active:

• TRACTION CONTROL ACTIVE
• STABILITY CONTROL ACTIVE
The HUD will temporarily display the TRACTION
CONTROL OFF message when the traction control
system is turned off.
The HUD will temporarily display the CRUISE SET
message when cruise control is activated or cruise
speed is increased.
Notice: If you try to use the HUD image as a
parking aid, you may misjudge the distance and
damage your vehicle. Do not use the HUD image
as a parking aid.

3-24

To adjust the HUD image so that items are properly
displayed, do the following:
1. Adjust the driver’s seat to a comfortable position.
2. Start the engine.
3. Adjust the HUD controls.

Use the following settings to adjust the HUD.

9 (Off): Turn the outer ring on the HUD control to
this position to turn the HUD off.
I II III IIII (Brightness): Turn the outer ring on the
HUD control clockwise to dim the display and
counterclockwise to brighten it.

w

(Up): Press this portion of the switch on the
HUD control to move the image up.

x (Down): Press this portion of the switch on the HUD
control to move the image down. Move the image as
low as possible on the windshield, keeping it in full view.
?

(Page): Press this button to select the display
formats. Release the page button when the format
number with the desired display is shown on the HUD.

• Format One: This display gives the speedometer
reading (in English or metric units), transmission
positions, compass direction, and the outside
air temperature.

• Format Two: This display includes the information
in Format One without the compass direction and
the outside air temperature.

• Format Three: This display includes all the
information in Format One, but turns the instrument
cluster lighting off. Format three is only available
at night.

All formats will show the turn-by-turn guidance
information. It will display the next turn, direction,
street name, and distance to the selected destination.
When you near your destination, the HUD will display a
distance bar that will fill in the closer you get to your
destination. All navigation information is provided to the
HUD by the navigation radio, if the vehicle has one.
The warning indicators still appear on the instrument
panel when required. The HUD will display Stealth
Mode On.
The HUD will store the last display format selected.
If the last format displayed was Format One or
Format Three, then Format One will be displayed
when the vehicle is started.
If the last format was Format Two, then Format Two
will be displayed.
The HUD image displayed on the windshield will
automatically dim and brighten to compensate for
outside lighting.
The HUD image can temporarily light up depending
on the angle and position of the sunlight on the
HUD display. This is normal and will change when the
angle of the sunlight on the HUD display changes.
Polarized sunglasses could make the HUD image
harder to see.

3-25

Care of the HUD
Clean the inside of the windshield as needed to remove
any dirt or film that could reduce the sharpness or
clarity of the HUD image.
To clean the HUD lens, use a soft, clean cloth that
has household glass cleaner sprayed on it. Wipe the
HUD lens gently, then dry it. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the lens because the cleaner could leak
into the unit.

If You Cannot See the HUD Image
When the Ignition Is On
•
•
•
•
•

Is anything covering the HUD lens?
Is the HUD dimmer setting bright enough?
Is the HUD image adjusted to the proper height?

If the HUD Image Is Not Clear
• Is the HUD image too bright?
• Are the windshield and HUD lens clean?
If the HUD image is not correct, contact your
dealer/retailer.
Keep in mind that the windshield is part of the HUD
system. See Windshield Replacement on page 5-61.

Accessory Power Outlet(s)
The vehicle has
two 12-volt outlets
which can be used
to plug in electrical
equipment.

Are you wearing polarized sunglasses?
Still no HUD image? Check the fuse in the
instrument panel fuse block. See Instrument
Panel Fuse Block on page 5-122.

One accessory power outlet is located on the center
console, below the front edge of the storage console.
The other is located inside the console.
Remove the tethered cap to use the outlet. When
not using the outlet, be sure to cover it with the
protective cap.

3-26

Notice: Leaving electrical equipment plugged in for
an extended period of time while the vehicle is off
will drain the battery. Power is always supplied
to the outlets. Always unplug electrical equipment
when not in use and do not plug in equipment
that exceeds the maximum 20 ampere rating.
Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible
with the accessory power outlet and could result
in blown vehicle or adapter fuses. See your dealer/
retailer for additional information on accessory
power outlets.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to your
vehicle may damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not use equipment
exceeding maximum amperage rating of 20 amperes.
Check with your dealer/retailer before adding
electrical equipment.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow
the proper installation instructions included with it.

Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter
Your vehicle may have a removable muffin tin ashtray
and cigarette lighter. The muffin tin ashtray can be
placed into the front center console cupholder. To use
the lighter, located on the center console, push it in
all the way and let go. When it is ready, it will pop back
out by itself.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is
heating does not let the lighter back away from
the heating element when it is hot. Damage from
overheating can occur to the lighter or heating
element, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold
a cigarette lighter in while it is heating.
Notice: If you put papers, pins, or other flammable
items in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other
smoking materials could ignite them and possibly
damage your vehicle. Never put flammable items
in the ashtray.

Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can
cause damage not covered by your warranty.
Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory
bracket from the plug because the power outlets
are designed for accessory power plugs only.

3-27

Climate Controls
Climate Control System
The climate control system allows manual control of the
heating, cooling, and ventilation in the vehicle.

9 (Off):

Turn the knob to this position to turn the
climate control system off. Only the heated seat and/or
rear defrost can be operated when the fan is off.

Mode
Turn the middle knob to select the following modes:

H (Vent) (Outside Air): This mode directs outside air
to the instrument panel outlets. If driving in city traffic,
and the vehicle is stopped and idling, or the weather is
hot, press the recirculation button. To prevent the air
inside the vehicle from becoming stale, be sure to turn
off recirculation periodically.
) (Bi-Level):

This mode directs half of the air to the
instrument panel outlets, and the remaining air to the floor
outlets. Some air may be directed toward the windshield.
Slightly cooler air is directed to the instrument panel
outlets and warmer air is directed to the floor outlets.

Fan
9 (Fan):

Turn the knob by this symbol, located on
the left side of the climate control panel, clockwise
or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan
speed. The fan speed will be temporarily reduced
between the transition to a new mode. The fan will
resume the original speed when the transition to the
new mode is complete.

3-28

6 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air to the
floor outlets with some air directed toward the side
window outlets and a little air directed to the windshield.
In this mode, the system will automatically use outside
air. The air conditioning compressor will be engaged
unless the outside temperature is 40°F (4°C) or below.

Recirculation cannot be selected when in this mode
even though the indicator light comes on when
the recirculation button is pressed.
The middle knob on the climate control panel can also
be used to select the defog or defrost mode.

Defogging and Defrosting
Fog on the inside of the vehicle is a result of high
humidity causing moisture to condense on the cool
window glass. This can be minimized if the climate
control system is used properly. There are two modes
to clear frost or fog from the windshield. Use the
defog mode to clear the windows of condensation and
to warm the vehicle’s occupants. Use the defrost
mode to remove frost or condensation from the
windshield quickly.
See “Rear Window Defogger” later in this section for
information on clearing the rear window of fog or ice.

This mode will automatically use outside air. The
air conditioning compressor will be engaged unless
the outside temperature is 40°F (4°C) or below.
Recirculation cannot be selected when in this mode
even though the indicator light comes on when
the recirculation button is pressed.

1 (Defrost): Use the defrost mode to remove fog or
frost from the windshield more quickly. This mode
directs most of the air to the windshield and the side
window outlets, with some air directed to the floor
outlets. This mode has a timer and will shut off after
five minutes.
This mode will automatically use outside air. The air
conditioning compressor will be engaged unless
the outside temperature is 40°F (4°C) or below.
Recirculation cannot be selected when in this mode
even though the indicator light comes on when
the recirculation button is pressed.

. (Floor/Defog):

Use the floor/defog mode to
clear the windows of fog or moisture and to warm the
passengers. This mode directs the air equally between
the windshield and the floor outlets, along with some
directed to the side window outlets.

3-29

Temperature
The knob on the right of the climate control panel is the
temperature adjustment that can be used with any of
the climate control modes.
Turn the knob clockwise for warmer settings and
counterclockwise for colder settings.

Air Conditioning
# (Air Conditioner):

Press this button to turn the
air conditioning compressor on or off. An indicator light
to the right of the button will come on. This button
has no control over the air conditioning compressor
when in Floor/Defog and Defrost modes. The instrument
panel brightness control may have to be adjusted to
the highest setting in order to see the indicator.
See Instrument Panel Brightness on page 3-19 for
additional information.
On hot days during the vehicle’s initial start-up, open
the windows to let hot inside air escape; then close
them. This helps to reduce the time it takes for
the vehicle to cool down. It also helps the system to
operate more efficiently.

3-30

For quicker cool down on hot days, do the following:
1. Select any mode setting between vent and the
setting before defrost.
2. Select the air conditioner.
3. Select the coolest temperature.
4. Select the highest climate control fan speed.
Using these settings will set recirculation for quicker
cool down (the light indicator will not turn on). If outside
air is desired, press the recirculation button twice.
Using these settings together for long periods of time
may cause the air inside the vehicle to become too dry.
To prevent this from happening, after five minutes
the recirculation door will open slightly to allow some
outside air into the vehicle.
The air conditioning system removes moisture from the
air, so sometimes there may be a small amount of
water dripping underneath the vehicle while it is idling
or after the engine is turned off. This is normal.

Recirculation
h (Recirculation): Press this button to activate the
recirculation mode. With this selection, inside air is
recirculated into the vehicle. This mode reduces outside
air and odors from entering the vehicle. It may also help
to heat or cool the air inside the vehicle more quickly.
An indicator light to the right of the button will come on
to show that the recirculation button has been pressed.
The instrument panel brightness control may have to be
adjusted to the highest setting to see the indicator.
The recirculation mode has a timer. After five minutes,
the system’s air inlet door will move slightly to allow
for ten percent fresh outside air to maintain interior
air quality. The only way to reset the system to full
recirculation is to restart the five minute timer by
selecting vent/outside air and recirculation again.

Notice: Do not use a razor blade or sharp object
to clear the inside rear window. Do not adhere
anything to the defogger grid lines in the rear glass.
These actions may damage the rear defogger.
Repairs would not be covered by your warranty.

= (Rear Window Defogger): Press this button to
turn the rear window defogger on or off.
An indicator light to the right of the button will come
on to show that the rear window defogger is on.
The instrument panel brightness control may have
to be adjusted to the highest setting during the daytime
in order to see the indicator light.
The rear window defogger will turn off about 20 minutes
after the button is pressed. If the button is pressed
again, it will run another 20 minutes. The defogger
can be turned off by pressing the button again or by
turning off the engine.

Rear Window Defogger

Do not drive the vehicle until all windows are clear.

The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog or frost from the rear window. Be sure to
clear as much snow from the rear window as possible.

z

(Heated Seats): Press this button to turn the heated
seats on and off. The button on the left controls the
driver’s seat and the button on the right controls
the passenger’s seat. See Heated Seats on page 1-4
for additional information.

3-31

Dual Automatic Climate Control
System
With this system you can control the heating, cooling,
and ventilation for your vehicle.

Automatic Operation
AUTO (Automatic): Turn both the fan and mode knob to
AUTO for automatic control of the inside temperature, the
air delivery mode and the fan speed. You may notice a
delay of two to three minutes before the fan comes on
when the automatic operation is used in cold weather.

3-32

For the automatic system to function, the temperature
must be set between 60°F (15°C) and 90°F (32°C).
1. Adjust the temperature to a comfortable setting.
2. Press the PASS button to turn the passenger
climate control system on and off. When the
passenger system is off, the driver’s temperature
setting is also used for the passenger and the
passenger display is off.
In cold weather, the system will start at reduced fan
speeds to avoid blowing cold air into your vehicle
until warmer air is available. The system will
start out blowing air at the floor but may change
modes automatically as the vehicle warms up
to maintain the chosen temperature setting. The
length of time needed for the air to warm up
will depend on the outside temperature and the
length of time that has elapsed since your vehicle
was last driven.
3. Wait for the system to regulate. This may take from
10 to 30 minutes. Then adjust the temperature,
if necessary.
Do not cover the solar sensor located in the center
of the instrument panel, near the windshield. For more
information on the solar sensor, see “Sensors” later
in this section.

Manual Operation
x w (Temperature): To manually adjust the
temperature inside the vehicle, press the up arrow on
the temperature control to raise the temperature
and press the down arrow to lower the temperature.
The display will show your selection.
When one temperature is displayed, the driver
temperature is set. When both temperatures are
displayed, the temperature for both the driver and
passenger are set. Pressing PASS will turn the
passenger temperature setting on and off. If only the
driver temperature is set, the driver temperature is used
for the passenger and the passenger display is off.

9 (Fan):

Turn the fan knob clockwise to increase the
fan speed and counterclockwise to decrease the fan
speed. Turning the fan knob cancels the automatic fan
operation and places the system in manual. Turn the
knob to AUTO to return to automatic fan operation. If the
airflow seems low when the fan is at the highest setting,
the passenger compartment air filter, if equipped, may
need to be replaced. See Passenger Compartment Air
Filter on page 3-36 for additional information.

9 (Off):

Turning the fan knob off will turn the controller
completely off.
Mode: This control has several settings to control the
direction of airflow.
To change the current mode, select one of the following:
AUTO: This mode is automatically set depending on the
temperature in the vehicle and solar sensor information.

H (Vent): This mode directs air to the instrument
panel outlets.
% (Bi-Level): This mode directs airflow to the
instrument panel outlets and to the floor outlets. A small
amount of air is also directed to the windshield and
the side window outlets.
6 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air to the
floor outlets with some air directed to the side window
outlets, and a little air directed to the windshield.
# (Air Conditioning):

Press this button to turn the air
conditioning compressor on or off. The indicator light on
the button will come on when the air conditioning is on.

3-33

? (Recirculation): Press this button to turn the
recirculation mode on or off. This mode keeps outside air
from coming in the vehicle. It can be used to help reduce
the outside air and odors that may enter the vehicle or
help to cool the air inside the vehicle quicker.
Recirculation is not available in defrost or floor/defog
mode. Pressing the recirculation button will turn on the
indicator light.
Using recirculation for long periods of time may cause the
air inside your vehicle to become too dry. To prevent this
from happening, after the air in your vehicle has cooled,
turn the recirculation mode off.

z

(Heated Seats): Press this button to turn the heated
seats on and off. The button on the left controls the
driver’s seat and the button on the right controls
the passenger’s seat. See Heated Seats on page 1-4
for additional information.

3-34

Sensors
The solar sensor on your vehicle monitors the solar
radiation and the air inside of your vehicle, then uses the
information to maintain the selected temperature by
initiating needed adjustments to the temperature, the fan
speed and the air delivery system. The system may
also supply cooler air to the side of the vehicle facing the
sun. The recirculation mode will also be activated, as
necessary. Do not cover the solar sensor located in the
center of the instrument panel, near the windshield,
or the system will not work properly.

Defogging and Defrosting
Fog on the inside of windows is a result of high humidity
(moisture) condensing on the cool window glass.
This can be minimized if the climate control system is
used properly. There are two modes to clear fog or
frost from your windshield. Use the floor/defog mode
to clear the windows of fog or moisture and warm
the passengers. Use the defrost mode to remove fog
or frost from the windshield more quickly.

- (Floor/Defog): This mode directs the air between
the windshield, floor outlets and side windows.
When you select this mode, the system turns off
recirculation and runs the air-conditioning compressor
unless the outside temperature is near or below
freezing. Pressing the recirculation button, while in this
mode, will have no effect other than turning on the
indicator light.
1 (Defrost): This mode directs most of the air to the
windshield, with some air directed to the side windows.
In this mode, the system will automatically turn off
the recirculation and run the air conditioning compressor,
unless the outside temperature is near or below
freezing. Pressing the recirculation button, while in this
mode, will have no affect other than turning on the
indicator light.

Rear Window Defogger
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog or frost from the rear window.
The rear window defogger will only work when the
engine is running.

= (Rear Window Defogger): Press this button to
turn the rear window defogger on and off. Be sure
to clear as much snow from the rear window as possible.
The rear window defogger will turn off about 20 minutes
after the button is pressed. If turned on again, the
defogger will only run for about 20 minutes before
turning off. The defogger can also be turned off
by pressing the button again or by turning off the engine.
Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.
Notice: Do not use anything sharp on the inside
of the rear window. If you do, you could cut or
damage the warming grid, and the repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Do not attach
a temporary vehicle license, tape, a decal or
anything similar to the defogger grid.

3-35

Outlet Adjustment

Passenger Compartment Air Filter

Turn the air outlets, located in the middle and at each
outboard side of the instrument panel, to adjust the
direction of the airflow.

The passenger compartment air filter is located near the
passenger’s side windshield wiper arm, under the
inlet grille.

Operation Tips
• Clear away any ice, snow, or leaves from the air

The filter traps most of the pollen from entering the
climate control system. Similar to the engine’s air filter,
it may need to be changed periodically to insure
system performance. See Scheduled Maintenance on
page 6-4 for more information.

inlets at the base of the windshield that may
block the flow of air into the vehicle.

• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may
adversely affect the performance of the system.

• Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects
to help circulate the air inside of the vehicle more
effectively.

• If the airflow seems low when the fan is at the
highest setting, the passenger compartment air
filter may need to be replaced. See “Passenger
Compartment Air Filter” following, for more
information.

3-36

To change the passenger compartment air filter,
1. Turn the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY and the
windshield wipers on.
2. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF when the windshield
wipers are in the upright position.
3. Raise the hood.
4. Disconnect the windshield washer pump hose from
the fender rail and the air inlet grille.
5. Remove the hood weather-strip from the
passenger’s side of the vehicle, peeling it back
halfway.

6. Remove the two air inlet grille retainers using a flat
tool to first pry up on the center post and then the
remainder of the fastener can be pulled out.
7. Remove the air inlet grille by sliding it down to
disengage the two tabs that hold it to the bottom
of the windshield glass. Place the grille on the
windshield while you remove the filter. Do not try
to remove the grille from the vehicle because
it is still attached on the right side of the vehicle
by a fastener.

8. Remove the water deflector.
9. Remove the passenger compartment air filter.
10. Install a new passenger compartment air filter.
Make sure it slides under the compartment
retainers. Be sure the long rubber water deflector
above the filter stays in place.
11. Reverse steps 1 through 8.

3-37

Warning Lights, Gages,
and Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages on
your vehicle. The pictures help to locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something
is wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause
an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention
to the warning lights and gages could also save
you or others from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is
a problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As the
details show on the next few pages, some warning lights
come on briefly when you start the engine just to let
you know they are working. If you are familiar with
this section, you should not be alarmed when this
happens.

3-38

Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages
and warning lights work together to let you know when
there is a problem with your vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
as you are driving, or when one of the gages shows
there may be a problem, check the section that tells
you what to do about it. Please follow this manual’s
advice. Waiting to do repairs can be costly and even
dangerous. So please get to know your vehicle’s
warning lights and gages. They can be a big help.
Your vehicle may also have a Driver Information
Center (DIC) that works along with the warning lights
and gages. See Driver Information Center (DIC)
on page 3-55 for more information.

Instrument Panel Cluster
The instrument panel cluster is designed to show at a glance how the vehicle is running. It will show how fast the
vehicle is going, about how much fuel is in the fuel tank, and many other things needed to drive the vehicle safely
and economically.

United States version shown, Canada similar
The vehicle is equipped with this cluster or one very similar to it. It has indicator warning lights that are explained
on the following pages. Be sure to read about them.
3-39

Speedometer and Odometer
The speedometer shows the vehicle’s speed in both
miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
The odometer, located on the Driver Information Center
(DIC) display, shows how far the vehicle has been
driven, in either miles or kilometers. See DIC Operation
and Displays (Uplevel DIC with Trip Computer) on
page 3-55 or DIC Operation and Displays (Base Level
DIC) on page 3-62 for more information.

Tachometer
The tachometer
displays the engine
speed in revolutions
per minute (rpm).

If the vehicle has the Head-Up Display (HUD) the speed
will also be displayed on the HUD screen.
If a vehicle has to have a new odometer installed, a
new one can be set to the mileage total of the old
odometer, if that can be done. If it cannot, than it will be
set at zero and a label must be put on the driver’s
door to show the old mileage reading when the new
odometer was installed.

3-40

Notice: If you operate the engine with the
tachometer in the shaded warning area, your vehicle
could be damaged, and the damages would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not operate
the engine with the tachometer in the shaded
warning area.

Safety Belt Reminders

Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light

Safety Belt Reminder Light

Several seconds after the engine is started, a chime
will sound for several seconds to remind the front
passenger to buckle their safety belt. This would only
occur if the passenger airbag is enabled. See Passenger
Sensing System on page 1-60 for more information.
The passenger safety belt light, located on the
instrument panel, will come on and stay on for several
seconds and then flash for several more.

When the engine is started, a chime will come on for
several seconds to remind people to fasten their safety
belts, unless the driver’s safety belt is already buckled.
The safety belt light will
also come on and stay
on for several seconds,
then it will flash for
several more.

This chime and light is repeated if the driver remains
unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion. If the driver’s belt
is already buckled, neither the chime nor the light will
come on.

This chime and light are
repeated if the passenger
remains unbuckled and
the vehicle is in motion.

If the passenger’s safety belt is buckled, neither the
chime nor the light will come on.

3-41

Airbag Readiness Light
There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument
panel cluster, which shows the airbag symbol. The
system checks the airbag’s electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. The system check includes the airbag
sensor, the pretensioners, the airbag modules, the
wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module.
For more information on the airbag system, see Airbag
System on page 1-52.
This light will come on
when you start your
vehicle, and it will flash
for a few seconds.
The light should go out
and the system is ready.

If the airbag readiness light stays on after you start
the vehicle or comes on when you are driving,
your airbag system may not work properly.
Have your vehicle serviced right away.

3-42

{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you
start your vehicle, it means the airbag system
may not be working properly. The airbags in
your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they
could even inflate without a crash. To help
avoid injury to yourself or others, have your
vehicle serviced right away if the airbag
readiness light stays on after you start your
vehicle.
The airbag readiness light should flash for a few
seconds when you start the engine. If the light does not
come on then, have it fixed immediately. If there is a
problem with the airbag system, an airbag Driver
Information Center (DIC) message may also come on.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-67 for
more information.

Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
Your vehicle has the passenger sensing system.
Your instrument panel has a passenger airbag status
indicator.

If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the right front
passenger’s frontal airbag is enabled (may inflate).

{CAUTION:

United States

Canada

When you start the vehicle, the passenger airbag status
indicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbol for on
and off, for several seconds as a system check. If you
use remote start to start your vehicle from a distance,
if equipped, you may not see the system check.
Then, after several more seconds, the status indicator
will light either ON or OFF, or either the on or off symbol
to let you know the status of the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag.

If the on indicator comes on when you have
a rear-facing child restraint installed in the
right front passenger’s seat, it means that the
passenger sensing system has not turned off
the passenger’s frontal airbag. A child in a
rear-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger’s
airbag inflates. This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would be very close
to the inflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facing
child restraint in the right front passenger’s
seat if the airbag is turned on.

3-43

{CAUTION:
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag if the system detects a rear-facing
child restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no
one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in the
rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the airbag
status indicator, it means that the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag. See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-60
for more on this, including important safety information.

3-44

If, after several seconds, both status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may
be a problem with the lights or the passenger sensing
system. See your dealer/retailer for service.

{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light in the instrument
panel cluster ever comes on and stays on,
it means that something may be wrong with
the airbag system. If this ever happens, have
the vehicle serviced promptly, because an
adult-size person sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat may not have the protection
of the airbag(s). See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-42 for more on this, including
important safety information.

Up-Shift Light

Brake System Warning Light
If your vehicle has this
light, it will come on when
the shift lever is in the
manual transmission
position.

The vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part is not working, the other part
can still work and stop the vehicle. For good braking,
though, both parts should be working well.

It will appear as a prompt to up-shift to the next gear
using one of the Tap-Shift® paddles located on the
steering wheel.
If your vehicle has the Head-Up Display (HUD), it will
only appear on it.
See Automatic Transmission Operation on page 2-28
and Head-Up Display (HUD) on page 3-23 for more
information.

United States

Canada

This light should come on briefly when the engine is
started. If it does not come on then, have it fixed so it
will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.

3-45

When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
will also come on when the parking brake is set.
The light will stay on if the parking brake does not
release fully. If it stays on after the parking brake is fully
released, it means the vehicle has a brake problem.
The PARKING BRAKE ON message will also appear in
the Driver Information Center (DIC) when the parking
brake is set and the vehicle is going faster than 5 mph.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-67 for
more information.
The brake warning light may also come on when the
brake fluid is low. If this occurs, the LOW BRAKE FLUID
message will also appear in the Driver Information
Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-67 for more information.

3-46

If the brake warning light comes on while the vehicle is
being driven, pull off the road and stop carefully.
The brake pedal may be harder to push, or it may go
closer to the floor. It may also take the vehicle longer to
stop. If the light is still on, have the vehicle towed for
service. See Towing Your Vehicle on page 4-27.

{CAUTION:
Your brake system may not be working
properly if the brake system warning light is on.
Driving with the brake system warning light on
can lead to an accident. If the light is still on
after you have pulled off the road and stopped
carefully, have the vehicle towed for service.

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light
For vehicles with
the Antilock Brake
System (ABS), this
light comes on briefly
when the engine
is started.

That is normal. If the light does not come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
If the ABS light stays on, turn the ignition off, if the light
comes on when you are driving, stop as soon as it is
safely possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the
engine again to reset the system. If the ABS light still
stays on, or comes on again while you are driving,
your vehicle needs service. If the regular brake system
warning light is not on, your vehicle still has brakes, but
not antilock brakes. If the regular brake system warning
light is also on, your vehicle does not have antilock
brakes and there is a problem with the regular brakes.
See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-45.
For vehicles with a Driver Information Center (DIC),
see DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-67 for
all brake related DIC messages.

Traction Control System (TCS)
Warning Light
If the vehicle has
the Traction Control
System (TCS), this light
may come on for the
following reasons:

• The traction control button, located on the center
console, is pressed, turning the system off. The
light will stay on. To turn the system back on,
press the button again and the warning light should
go out. See Traction Control System (TCS) on
page 4-6 for more information.

• If there is a brake system problem that is specifically
related to traction control, the TCS will turn off and
the warning light will come on.

• If the brakes begin to overheat, the TCS will turn off
and the warning light will come on until the brakes
cool down.
If the TCS warning light comes on and stays on for an
extended period of time when the system is turned
on, the vehicle needs service.
3-47

Enhanced Traction System
Warning Light
For vehicles with the
Enhanced Traction
System (ETS), this light
may come on for the
following reasons:

• If the traction control button located on the center
console is pressed, turning the system off. This
light will come on and stay on. To turn the system
back on, press the button again and the warning
light should turn off. See Enhanced Traction
System (ETS) on page 4-7.

• If the system is affected by an engine-related
problem, the system will turn off and the warning
light will come on.
If the light comes on and stays on for an extended
period of time when the system is turned on, the vehicle
needs service.

3-48

Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light
This light indicates
that the engine coolant
has overheated or
the radiator cooling fan
is not working.

If the vehicle has been operating under normal driving
conditions, pull off the road, stop the vehicle, and turn off
the engine as soon as possible.
See Cooling System on page 5-30 for more information.

Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
The vehicle has a gage
that shows the engine
coolant temperature.

If the gage pointer moves into the shaded area, the
engine is too hot. That reading means the engine
coolant has overheated. If you have been operating
the vehicle under normal driving conditions, you should
pull off the road, stop the vehicle, and turn off the
engine as soon as possible.
See Cooling System on page 5-30 for more information.

Tire Pressure Light
This light comes on briefly
when the engine is started.

This light will also come on when one or more of your
tires are significantly underinflated.
A tire pressure message in the Driver Information
Center (DIC), may accompany the light. See DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 3-67 for more
information.
Stop and check your tires as soon as it is safe to
do so. If underinflated, inflate to the proper pressure.
See Tires on page 5-62 for more information.
If a problem is detected with the Tire Pressure
Monitor System, this light will flash for approximately
60 seconds and then stay on solid for the remainder
of the ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure Monitor System
on page 5-71 for more information.
3-49

Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
A computer system called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) monitors operation of
the fuel, ignition, and emission control systems. It makes
sure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the life of
the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner environment.
The check engine
light comes on to
indicate that there is
an OBD II problem and
service is required.

Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of
your vehicle or the replacement of the original tires
with other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission
controls and can cause this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to costly
repairs not covered by your warranty. This could
also result in a failure to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test. See Accessories
and Modifications on page 5-3.
This light comes on, as a check to show it is working,
when the ignition is turned ON/RUN but the engine is not
running. If the light does not come on, have it repaired.
This light also comes on during a malfunction in
one of two ways:

• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has been
Malfunctions often are indicated by the system before
any problem is apparent. This can prevent more serious
damage to your vehicle. This system is also designed
to assist your service technician in correctly diagnosing
any malfunction.
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with this
light on, after a while, the emission controls
might not work as well, your vehicle’s fuel economy
might not be as good, and the engine might not
run as smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs
that might not be covered by your warranty.
3-50

detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions
and could damage the emission control system
on your vehicle. Diagnosis and service might
be required.

• Light On Steady — An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be required.

If the Light is Flashing

If the Light Is On Steady

The following can prevent more serious damage
to your vehicle:

You might be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:

•
•
•
•

Reduce vehicle speed.

Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?

Avoid hard accelerations.

If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install
the cap. See Filling the Tank on page 5-8. The
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing
fuel cap allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap properly installed should
turn the light off.

Avoid steep uphill grades.
If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible.

If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see
“If the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park the vehicle.
Turn the ignition off, wait at least 10 seconds, and restart
the engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If the
Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is still flashing,
follow the previous steps and see your dealer/retailer
for service as soon as possible.

Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If so, your vehicle’s electrical system might be wet. The
condition is usually corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. See
Gasoline Octane on page 5-5. Poor fuel quality causes
the engine not to run as efficiently as designed. You
might notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling when
you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on
acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration — these
conditions might go away once the engine is warmed up.
This will be detected by the system and cause the light
to turn on.

3-51

If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least
one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
your dealer/retailer can check the vehicle. Your
dealer/retailer has the proper test equipment and
diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical
problems that might have developed.

Emissions Inspection and
Maintenance Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
might begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle
registration.
Here are some things you need to know to help your
vehicle pass an inspection:

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the
OBD (on-board diagnostic) system determines that
critical emission control systems have not been
completely diagnosed by the system. The vehicle
would be considered not ready for inspection. This can
happen if you have recently replaced the battery or
if the battery has run down. The diagnostic system is
designed to evaluate critical emission control systems
during normal driving. This can take several days
of routine driving. If you have done this and your
vehicle still does not pass the inspection for lack of
OBD system readiness, your dealer/retailer can
prepare the vehicle for inspection.

Oil Pressure Light
If there is a problem with
the vehicle’s oil pressure,
this light may stay on
when the engine is started.

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check
engine light is on or not working properly.

It may also come on while the vehicle is being driven.
This indicates that the engine could be low on oil or could
have some other oil problem. Have it fixed right away.

3-52

The oil light could also come on in two other situations:

Fog Lamp Light

• When the ignition is on but the engine is not
running, the light will come on as a test to indicate
it is working. The light will go out when the
engine is started. If it does not come on while the
ignition is in the on position, there may be a problem
with the fuse or bulb. See Fuses and Circuit
Breakers on page 5-121.

The fog lamp light will
come on when the fog
lamps are in use.

• If the brakes are applied quickly and the vehicle
makes a hard stop, the light may come on for a
moment. This is normal.

{CAUTION:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low.
If you do, your engine can become so hot that
it catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance may
damage the engine. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Always follow the maintenance
schedule in this manual for changing engine oil.

The light will go out when the fog lamps are turned off.
See Fog Lamps on page 3-18 for more information.

Cruise Control Light
This light comes on
whenever you set the
cruise control.

The light goes out when the cruise control is turned off.
See Cruise Control on page 3-12 for more information.

3-53

Highbeam On Light

Fuel Gage

This light comes on when
the high-beam headlamps
are in use.

See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-9
for more information.

The fuel gage shows
about how much fuel is
left in the fuel tank
when the ignition is on.

When the indicator nears empty, there is still a little fuel
left, but you should get more soon.
Here are four things owners usually ask about the fuel
gage. All these situations are normal and do not
indicate a problem with the fuel gage:

• At the gas station the pump shuts off before the
gage reads full.

• It takes more or less fuel to fill up than the gage
indicates. For example, the gage reads half full,
but it took more or less than half the tank’s capacity
to fill it.

• The gage pointer may move while cornering,
braking or speeding up.

• The gage may not indicate full when the ignition is
turned off.
3-54

Driver Information Center (DIC)

The vehicle’s shift lever position and the direction the
vehicle is traveling will also appear on the DIC screen.

The Driver Information Center (DIC) gives important
safety and maintenance facts. When the vehicle’s
ignition is turned on, all of the DIC lights illuminate for a
few seconds and an introductory message will appear.
After this, the DIC will begin working.

The compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates
the need to manually set the compass. However, under
certain circumstances, such as during a long distance
cross-country trip, it will be necessary to compensate
for compass variance and reset the zone through
the DIC. See DIC Compass (Uplevel DIC) on page 3-65
for more information.

DIC Operation and Displays
(Uplevel DIC with Trip Computer)
The Driver Information Center (DIC) control buttons and
the message display screen are located above the
radio. The DIC gives important safety and maintenance
facts concerning the vehicle. The status of many of
the vehicle’s systems along with driver personalization
menus and warning messages about the vehicle’s
systems may display on the DIC screen.
The outside temperature automatically appears on
the bottom right corner of the DIC display screen.
If the outside temperature is below 38°F (3°C), the
temperature reading will toggle between displaying the
outside temperature and the word ICE for two minutes.
If there is a problem with the system that controls
the temperature display, the letters OC (Open Circuit)
or SC (Short Circuit) will appear on the display.
If this occurs, have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer.

The buttons on the DIC trip computer are gages,
trip odometer, set/reset, options, and fuel.

Gages

2 (Gages): Press this button to access the OIL LIFE
REMAINING, TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE,
BATTERY, ENGINE HOURS, and MAXIMUM Gs modes.

3-55

OIL LIFE REMAINING: Press the gages button until
OIL LIFE REMAINING is displayed. This screen
indicates the percentage of oil life in the vehicle’s engine
that has not degraded. See Engine Oil on page 5-15
for more information.

See Electric Power Management on page 3-22 for more
information.

After the oil has been changed in the vehicle, reset the
ENGINE OIL MONITOR screen in the options menu.
To reset the engine oil monitor system, see Engine Oil
Life System on page 5-18.

ENGINE HOURS: This screen shows the number of
cumulative hours the engine has operated while the key
was in ON/RUN. This screen cannot be reset.

Press the gages button again to advance to the
next screen.

MAXIMUM Gs: If you have the GXP option, this screen
will appear. The DIC monitors and keeps track of the
maximum levels for acceleration, deceleration, and
lateral-acceleration achieved since the screen was last
reset. When trying to select this screen while the vehicle
is moving, the message MAXIMUM Gs NOT AVAILABLE
WHILE MOVING will display. To view the maximum
accelerations achieved since last reset, stop the vehicle.
The values will then display. To reset the values to zero,
press and hold the set/reset button.

TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMP: This screen displays
this message along with the temperature (F° or C°)
of the transmission fluid.
Press the gages button again to advance to the
next screen.
BATTERY: This screen displays the amount of volts
the battery is generating.
Your vehicle’s charging system regulates voltage based
on the state of the battery. The battery voltage may
fluctuate when viewing this information on the DIC.
This is normal.

3-56

Press the gages button again to advance to the next
screen.

Press the gages button to advance to the next screen.

Press the gages button again to advance to the next
screen.

Trip Odometer

3 (Trip Odometer): Press this button to access the
Odometer, Trip Distances, AVERAGE SPEED, and
TIME ELAPSED modes.
Odometer: When the trip odometer button is pressed,
the first menu displayed on the DIC screen is the
odometer reading, or cumulative mileage of the vehicle.
The odometer cannot be reset.
Press the trip odometer button again to advance to the
next menu.
Trip Distances: This menu shows the distances that
the vehicle has driven between specific points. The
trip odometer will record the number of miles up to
9,999.9 miles or 9 999.9 km travelled for up to two trips.
When 9,999.9 miles or 9 999.9 km is reached for either
trip, the odometer for that trip will go back to zero.
To reset the trip distances:

The trip odometer has a feature called the retro-active
reset. This can be used to set the trip odometer to
the number of miles (kilometers) driven since the
ignition was last turned on. This can be used if the
trip odometer is not reset at the beginning of the trip.
To use the retro-active reset feature, press and hold
the set/reset button for at least three seconds. The trip
odometer will display the number of miles or kilometers
driven since the ignition was last turned on and the
vehicle was moving. Once the vehicle begins moving,
the trip odometer will accumulate mileage. For example,
if the vehicle was driven 5.0 miles (8.0 km) before it
is started again, and then the retro-active reset feature
is activated, the display will show 5.0 miles (8.0 km).
As the vehicle begins moving, the display will then
increase to 5.1 miles (8.2 km), 5.2 miles (8.4 km), etc.
If the retro-active reset feature is activated after the
vehicle is started, but before it begins moving, the
display will show the number of miles or kilometers
that were driven during the last ignition cycle.

1. Press the trip odometer button again to access
TRIP A. Press the trip odometer button again to
access TRIP B. To reset the trip odometer(s) back to
zero miles or to zero kilometers, access the trip that
needs to be reset and press the set/reset button.
2. Press the trip odometer button again to advance
to the next screen.

3-57

AVERAGE SPEED: The average speed is displayed in
miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour (km/h).
The average speed is calculated from the various
vehicle speeds recorded since the last reset of this
menu item. To reset the average speed, press the
set/reset button. The display will return to zero.
Press the trip odometer button again to advance to
the next screen.
TIME ELAPSED: This screen can be used as a
stopwatch. The display can show the hours, minutes
and seconds. The elapsed time indicator will record up
to 99 hours, 59 minutes and 59 seconds, then it will
reset to zero and continue counting.
To set the time elapsed function:
1. Press the set/reset button for less than two seconds
to start or stop the timer.
2. Press and hold the set/reset button for more than
two seconds to reset the timer back to zero.
Press the trip odometer button again to advance to
the next screen.

Set/Reset

r

(Set/Reset): Press this button to set or reset a
mode item when using the trip odometer or option
buttons.

3-58

Options

4 (Options): Press this button to access the Date,
Language, Display Units, Daytime Display Enhancement,
Engine Oil Monitor System, Compass Calibration,
Personal Programming modes, and Tire Pressure
readings.
Date: This menu sets the date.
The time is set through the radio. See Setting the
Clock on page 3-95 for more information.
To set the date:
1. Press the options button until the date is displayed
on the DIC.
2. Press the set/reset button to access the RESET
YEAR screen. The second position in the year
will be selected. Press and hold the set/reset button
to scroll through the available digits. Release the
button when the correct digit appears.
3. Press the options button to advance to the first
position in the year. Press and hold the set/reset
button to scroll through the available digits.
Release the button when the correct digit appears.
4. Press the options button to advance to the
months of the year.

5. Press the set/reset button to scroll through the
months of the year, releasing the button when
the correct month appears.
6. Press the options button to advance to the days
of the month.
7. Press the set/reset button to scroll through the
days of the month, releasing the button when
the correct day appears.
8. Press the options button again to advance to the
main date screen. The screen will now display
the new date.
9. Press the options button to advance to the
next screen.
Language: This menu allows selection of the language
in which the DIC messages will appear. The DIC can
be programmed in one of three languages: English,
French, or Spanish. The message on the HUD, if
equipped, will also appear in the language selected.
See Head-Up Display (HUD) on page 3-23.

DISPLAY UNITS: This menu allows selection of
measurements to be displayed in English or metric
units. The messages on the HUD, if equipped, and the
instrument panel cluster will also appear in the type
of measurement selected.

To change the language:
1. Press the options button to enter the language
screen.
2. Press the set/reset button to scroll through and
set the language choice.
3. Press the options button again to advance to
the next screen.

To set the daytime display enhancement function:

To set the display units function:
1. Press the set/reset button to select ENGLISH
or METRIC.
2. Press the options button to advance to the next
screen.
DAYTIME DISPLAY ENHANCEMENT: This menu
allows selection of the color of the display message.
When ON is selected for the daytime enhancement,
the messages will appear black on a red screen. This
combination makes it easier to see the DIC messages
during the daytime. When OFF is selected, or when
the headlamps are on, the messages will appear red
on a black background.
1. Press the set/reset button to select OFF or ON.
2. Press the options button to advance to the
next screen.

3-59

ENGINE OIL MONITOR SYSTEM: This menu allows
the engine oil monitor system to be reset. To reset
the engine oil monitor system, see Engine Oil Life
System on page 5-18.
Press the options button to advance to the next screen.
COMPASS CALIBRATION MODE: This menu
allows you to adjust for compass variance. See DIC
Compass (Uplevel DIC) on page 3-65 for more
information.
Press the options button again to advance to the
next screen.

TIRE PRESSURE: This menu shows the tire pressure
for each tire. The tire pressure will be shown in
either pounds per square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa).
Press the options button until the DIC shows the tire
pressure for the front tires. Press the options button
again to view the pressure for the rear tires.
If a low tire pressure condition is detected by the
system while driving, a message advising you to
check the pressure in a specific tire will appear in the
display. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-69 and
DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-67 for more
information.

PERSONAL PROGRAMMING MODE: This menu
allows you to customize several features on your
vehicle. See DIC Vehicle Customization on page 3-89
for more information.

If the tire pressure display shows dashes instead of a
value, there may be a problem with your vehicle. If this
consistently occurs, see your dealer/retailer for service.

Press the options button again to advance to the
next screen.

DISPLAY OFF will appear on the next screen.
The screen will count down and then go blank.

Press the options button to advance to the next screen.

Press the options button to return to the main (date)
screen.

3-60

Fuel

. (Fuel): Press this button to access the Average
Fuel Economy, Instantaneous Fuel Economy, and
Fuel Range modes.
AVG ECONOMY (Average Fuel Economy): This
screen will display the approximate average miles per
gallon (mpg) or liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km).
This number is calculated based on the number of
mpg (L/100 km) recorded since the last time this menu
item was reset.
To reset the average fuel economy for the vehicle,
follow this procedure:
1. Press the set/reset button to reset to zero.
2. Press the fuel button again to advance to the
next screen.
INST ECONOMY (Instantaneous Fuel Economy):
This screen displays the current fuel economy at
a particular moment and will change frequently as
driving conditions change. Unlike average fuel economy,
this screen cannot be reset.

RANGE: This screen displays the approximate number
of remaining miles or kilometers the vehicle can be
driven without refueling. This estimate is based on the
average fuel economy for the amount of fuel remaining
in the fuel tank and the current driving conditions.
This estimate will change if driving conditions change.
For example, if driving in traffic and making frequent
stops, the display may read one number, but if the
vehicle is driven on a freeway the number may change
even though the same amount of fuel is in the fuel
tank. This is because different driving conditions produce
different fuel economies. Generally, freeway driving
produces better fuel economy than city driving.
If the fuel tank contains less than 2 gallons (7.6 L), the
LOW FUEL message will appear on the DIC screen.
Fill the fuel tank as soon as possible to avoid running
out of fuel. See “Low Fuel” under DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 3-67.
Press the fuel button again to advance to the next
screen.

Press the fuel button again to advance to the next
screen.

3-61

DIC Operation and Displays
(Base Level DIC)
The Driver Information Center (DIC) control buttons and
the message display screen are located above the
radio. The DIC gives important safety and maintenance
facts concerning the vehicle. The status of many of
the vehicle’s systems along with driver personal
programming mode menus and warning messages
about the vehicle’s systems may display on the
DIC screen.
The vehicle’s shift lever position will also appear.

Trip Odometer

3 (Trip Odometer): Press this button to access the
odometer and trip distance modes.
The first menu on the DIC screen will be the odometer
reading, or cumulative mileage of the vehicle. The
odometer cannot be reset.
Press the trip odometer button to advance to the
next menu.
Trip Distances: This menu shows the distances that
the vehicle has driven between specific points. The
trip odometer will record the number of miles up to
9,999.9 miles or 9 999.9 km travelled for up to two trips.
When 9,999.9 miles or 9 999.9 km is reached for either
trip, the odometer for that trip will go back to zero.
Press the trip odometer button again to access TRIP A.
Press the trip odometer button again to access TRIP B.
To reset the trip odometer(s) back to zero miles or
kilometers, access the trip to reset and press the set/
reset button.

The buttons on the base level are trip odometer,
set/reset, and options.

3-62

The trip odometer has a feature called the retro-active
reset. This can be used to set the trip odometer to the
number of miles or kilometers driven since the ignition
was last turned on. This can be used if the trip odometer
was not reset at the beginning of the trip.

To use the retro-active reset feature, press and hold the
set/reset button for at least three seconds. The trip
odometer will display the number of miles or kilometers
driven since the ignition was last turned on and the
vehicle began moving. Once the vehicle has begun
moving, the trip odometer will accumulate mileage. For
example, if the vehicle was driven 5.0 miles (8.0 km)
before the vehicle is started again, and then the
retro-active reset feature is activated, the display will
show 5.0 miles (8.0 km). As the vehicle begins moving,
the display will increase to 5.1 miles (8.2 km), 5.2 miles
(8.4 km), etc.
If the retro-active reset feature is activated after the
vehicle is started, but before it begins moving, the display
will show the number of miles or kilometers that were
driven during the last ignition cycle.
Press the trip odometer button again to access the
odometer.

Set/Reset

r

(Set/Reset): Press this button to set or reset a
menu item when using the trip odometer or options
buttons.

Options

4 (Options): Press this button to access the Date,
Language, Display Units, Daytime Display Enhancement,
Engine Oil Monitor System, Personal Programming
modes, and Tire Pressure readings.
Date: This menu sets the date.
The time is set through the radio. See Setting the
Clock on page 3-95 for more information.
To set the date:
1. Press the options button until the date is displayed
on the DIC.
2. Press the set/reset button to access the RESET
YEAR screen. The second position in the year
will be selected. Press and hold the set/reset button
to scroll through the available digits. Release the
button when the correct digit appears.
3. Press the options button to advance to the first
position in the year. Press and hold the set/reset
button to scroll through the available digits. Release
the button when the correct digit appears.
4. Press the options button to advance to the months
of the year.

3-63

5. Press the set/reset button to scroll through the
months of the year, releasing the button when
the correct month appears.
6. Press the options button to advance to the days of
the month.
7. Press the set/reset button to scroll through the days
of the month, releasing the button when the correct
day appears.
8. Press the options button again to advance to the
main date screen. The screen will now display the
new date.
Language: This menu allows the selection of the
language in which the DIC messages will appear. The
DIC can be programmed to one of three languages:
English, French, or Spanish. The message on the HUD,
if equipped, will also appear in the language selected.
See Head-Up Display (HUD) on page 3-23.
To change the language:
1. Press the options button to enter the language
screen.
2. Press the set/reset button to scroll through and set
the language choice.
3. Press the options button again to advance to the
next screen.

3-64

DISPLAY UNITS: This menu allows selection of
measurements to be displayed in English or metric units.
The messages on the HUD, if equipped, and the
instrument panel cluster will also appear with the type of
measurement selected.
To set the measurement when Display Units is shown:
1. Press the set/reset button to select ENGLISH
or METRIC.
2. Press the options button again to advance to the
next screen.
DAYTIME DISPLAY ENHANCEMENT: This menu
allows selection of the color of the display message.
When ON is selected for the daytime enhancement,
the messages will appear black on a red screen. This
combination makes it easier to see the DIC messages
during the daytime. When OFF is selected, or when
the headlamps are on, the messages will appear red on
a black background.
To set the daytime display enhancement:
1. Press the set/reset button to select OFF or ON.
2. Press the options button again to advance to
the next screen.

ENGINE OIL MONITOR SYSTEM: This menu allows
the engine oil monitor system to be reset. To reset
the engine oil monitor system, see Engine Oil Life
System on page 5-18.
PERSONAL PROGRAMMING MODE: This menu
allows you to customize several features on your
vehicle. See DIC Vehicle Customization on page 3-89
for more information.
Press the options button again to advance to the next
screen.
TIRE PRESSURE: This menu shows the tire pressure
for each tire. The tire pressure will be shown in
either pounds per square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa).
Press the options button until the DIC shows the tire
pressure for the front tires. Press the options button
again to view the pressure for the rear tires.
If a low tire pressure condition is detected by the
system while driving, a message advising you to
check the pressure in a specific tire will appear in the
display. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-69 and
DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-67 for more
information.
If the tire pressure display shows dashes instead of a
value, there may be a problem with your vehicle. If this
consistently occurs, see your dealer/retailer for service.

DISPLAY OFF will appear on the next screen.
The screen will count down and then go blank.
Press the options button to advance to a new screen.
Press the options button to return to the main (date)
screen.

DIC Compass (Uplevel DIC)
Your vehicle may have a compass in the Driver
Information Center (DIC).

Compass Zone
The zone is set to zone eight upon leaving the factory.
Your dealer/retailer will set the correct zone for your
location.
Under certain circumstances, such as during a long
distance cross-country trip or moving to a new state
or province, it will be necessary to compensate for
compass variance by resetting the zone through the
DIC if the zone is not set correctly.
Compass variance is the difference between the earth’s
magnetic north and true geographic north. If the compass
is not set to the zone where you live, the compass may
give false readings. The compass must be set to the
variance zone in which the vehicle is traveling.

3-65

Compass Calibration
The compass can be manually calibrated. Only calibrate
the compass in a magnetically clean and safe location,
such as an open parking lot, where driving the vehicle
in circles is not a danger. It is suggested to calibrate
away from tall buildings, utility wires, manhole covers,
or other industrial structures, if possible.
If the DIC display does not show a heading, for example,
N for North, or the heading does not change after
making turns, there may be a strong magnetic field
interfering with the compass. Such interference may
be caused by a magnetic CB or cell phone antenna
mount, a magnetic emergency light, magnetic note
pad holder, or any other magnetic item. Turn off
the vehicle, move the magnetic item, then turn on
the vehicle and calibrate the compass.
To adjust for compass variance and to calibrate the
compass, use the following procedure:

Compass Variance (Zone) and Calibration
Procedure
1. Do not set the compass zone when the vehicle is
moving. Only set it when the vehicle is in PARK (P).
Press the options button until COMPASS
CALIBRATION MODE displays.

3-66

2. Find the vehicle’s current location and variance
zone number on the map.
Zones 1 through 15 are available.
3. Press the set/reset button to scroll through and
select the appropriate variance zone.
4. Press the options button to advance to the
calibration screen.
Do not operate any switches such as window,
sunroof, climate controls, seats, etc. during
the calibration procedure.

5. The DIC will display COMPASS CALIBRATION
MODE - DRIVE CAR IN CIRCLE. Drive the
vehicle in tight circles at less than 5 mph (8 km/h)
to complete the calibration.
The direction the vehicle is moving will be displayed in
the bottom left corner of the screen, and will appear
in the gages, fuel, trip, and some of the options modes.

DIC Warnings and Messages
These messages display if there is a problem in one of
the vehicle’s systems. They override any other mode
or screen the Driver Information Center (DIC) may be in.
Some messages can be cleared from the DIC screen.
In order to do this, the message must be acknowledged.
To acknowledge or clear the message from the
screen, press the set/reset button on the DIC.
See DIC Operation and Displays (Uplevel DIC with
Trip Computer) on page 3-55 or DIC Operation
and Displays (Base Level DIC) on page 3-62 for
DIC button descriptions.
Other warning messages are not allowed to be cleared
until the problem indicated by the warning message
is taken care of. When the problem indicated by
the message is resolved, it can be acknowledged and
the screen can be reset.

Be sure to take any message that appears on the
DIC screen seriously and remember that clearing the
messages that are able to be acknowledged, will
only make the message disappear, not correct the
problem.

A/C OFF FOR ENGINE PROTECTION
This message displays when the engine coolant
becomes hotter than the normal operating temperature.
To avoid added strain on a hot engine, the air
conditioning compressor is automatically turned off.
When the coolant temperature returns to normal, the
air conditioning compressor turns back on. The vehicle
can then continue to be driven.
This message comes on while the ignition is in ON/RUN.
A chime sounds for two seconds when this message
is displayed. Press the set/reset button to acknowledge
this warning message and to clear it from the screen.
This message continues to display for three seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine
is turned off. It also re-displays for three seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition
still exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.

3-67

AJAR

BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE
This symbol appears
with this message.

This message displays when a door or the trunk is not
closed properly. If your vehicle has the remote start
feature, this message also displays when the hood is not
closed properly. The graphic highlights the area that
is not closed properly. Make sure that the area indicated
is closed completely.
This message displays while the ignition is in ON/RUN.
A chime sounds for two seconds when the gear
position is shifted out of PARK (P). Press the set/reset
button to acknowledge this message and to clear it
from the screen.
This message continues to display for three seconds if
it has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It also re-displays for three seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition still
exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
3-68

This message displays when the system detects that the
battery voltage is dropping beyond a reasonable level.
The battery saver system starts reducing certain features
of the vehicle which you may be able to notice. At the point
that the features are disabled, this message is displayed.
It means that the vehicle is trying to save the charge in
the battery. Turn off all unnecessary accessories to allow
the battery to recharge. The normal battery voltage range
is 11.5 to 15.5 volts. If your vehicle has the uplevel DIC,
you can monitor battery voltage on the DIC by pressing
the gages button until BATTERY appears.

CHANGE OIL SOON
This symbol comes on
with this message.

This message displays when service is required for the
vehicle. See your dealer/retailer. See Engine Oil on
page 5-15 and Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4 for
more information.

The CHANGE OIL SOON message is reset by
acknowledging the message. The ENGINE OIL
MONITOR SYSTEM screen under the options menu
on the DIC must also be reset. See “Engine Oil Monitor
System” in options under DIC Operation and Displays
(Uplevel DIC with Trip Computer) on page 3-55 or
DIC Operation and Displays (Base Level DIC) on
page 3-62 for more information.
This message displays while the ignition is in ON/RUN.
Press the set/reset button to acknowledge this
message and to clear it from the screen.
This message continues to display for three seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine
is turned off. It also re-displays for three seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition
still exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.

CHARGING SYSTEM FAILURE
This symbol comes on
with this message.

This message displays when there is a problem with the
generator and battery charging systems. Driving with this
problem could drain the battery. Turn off all unnecessary
accessories. Stop and turn off the vehicle as soon as
it is safe to do so. Have the electrical system checked by
your dealer/retailer as soon as possible.
This message displays while the ignition is in ON/RUN.
A chime sounds for two seconds when this message is
displayed. Press the set/reset button to acknowledge this
message and to clear it from the screen.
This message continues to display if it has not been
acknowledged when the engine is turned off. It also
re-displays for three seconds if the message has been
acknowledged, but the condition still exists when the
engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
3-69

CHECK GAS CAP
This message displays when the fuel cap is not on,
or is not fully tightened. Check the fuel cap to ensure it is
on and properly tightened. The diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly
installed. A loose or missing fuel cap allows fuel to
evaporate into the atmosphere. A few driving trips with
the cap properly installed should turn this message off.
See Filling the Tank on page 5-8 for more information.
This message displays while the ignition is in ON/RUN.
A chime sounds for two seconds when this message
is displayed and then the message continues to display.
Press the set/reset button to acknowledge this
message and to clear it from the screen.
This message continues to display for three seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine
is turned off. It also re-displays for three seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition
still exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.

CHECK TIRE PRESSURE
This message displays when the pressure in one or
more of the vehicle’s tires needs to be checked. This
message also displays LEFT FRONT, RIGHT FRONT,

3-70

LEFT REAR, or RIGHT REAR to indicate which tire
needs to be checked. You can receive more than one tire
pressure message at a time. To read the other messages
that may have been sent at the same time, press the
set/reset button. If a tire pressure message appears on
the DIC, stop as soon as you can. Have the tire pressures
checked and set to those shown on the Tire Loading
Information label. See Tires on page 5-62, Loading Your
Vehicle on page 4-22, and Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 5-69. The DIC also shows the tire pressure values.
See DIC Operation and Displays (Uplevel DIC with Trip
Computer) on page 3-55 or DIC Operation and Displays
(Base Level DIC) on page 3-62. If the tire pressure is low,
the low tire pressure warning light comes on. See Tire
Pressure Light on page 3-49.
This message displays while the ignition is in ON/RUN.
Press the set/reset button to acknowledge this
message and to clear it from the screen.
This message continues to display for three seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine
is turned off. It also re-displays for three seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition
still exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.

CRUISE SET
This symbol comes on
with this message.

This message displays when the ignition is in
LOCK/OFF. A chime sounds for two seconds
when this message is displayed.
This message cannot be acknowledged.

HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED

This message and symbol display briefly whenever the
cruise control is set. The cruise control light on the
instrument panel cluster also comes on when cruise
control is set. See Cruise Control Light on page 3-53.
CRUISE SET also appears briefly in the Head-Up
Display (HUD), if your vehicle has this feature. This
message displays when the ignition is in ON/RUN.
See Cruise Control on page 3-12 for more information.
This message does not need to be acknowledged.

DELAYED LOCKING
This message displays when the doors of the vehicle
are closed and the delayed locking feature has
been programmed through the DIC. See “DELAYED
LOCKING” under DIC Vehicle Customization on
page 3-89 for more information.

This message displays when the amount of available
light outside the vehicle is low and the exterior
lamps control has been turned off. This condition
happens when the headlamps are turned off at night
or the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) are turned
off during the day. This message informs the driver
that it has become dark enough outside to require the
headlamps to be turned on. When the headlamps
are turned on, this message clears from the screen.
See Exterior Lamps on page 3-16 and Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) on page 3-17 for more information.
This message displays while the ignition is in ON/RUN.
A chime sounds for two seconds when this message
is displayed. Press the set/reset button to acknowledge
this warning message and to clear it from the screen.
This message continues to display if it has not
been acknowledged when the engine is turned off.
It also re-displays for three seconds if the message has
been acknowledged, but the condition still exists
when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
3-71

HOT COOLANT
Notice: If the HOT COOLANT warning message
appears on the DIC display, stop the vehicle as soon
as possible. Do not increase the engine speed
above normal idling speed. Severe engine damage
can result from driving a vehicle with an overheated
engine. See Engine Overheating on page 5-27 for
more information.
This symbol comes on
with this message.

This message displays only while the ignition is in
ON/RUN. A chime sounds continuously when this
message is displayed. Press the set/reset button
to acknowledge this message and to clear it from
the screen.
This message continues to display if it has not
been acknowledged when the engine is turned off.
It also re-displays for three seconds if the message has
been acknowledged, but the condition still exists
when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.

HOT ENGINE OIL. REDUCE SPEED
This message displays when the engine coolant
temperature is too hot. The engine coolant temperature
warning light also appears on the instrument panel
cluster. Also, the engine coolant temperature gage
will read in the red or hot area. See Engine Coolant
Temperature Warning Light on page 3-48 and Engine
Coolant Temperature Gage on page 3-49 for more
information.
To avoid added strain, turn off the air conditioner if it is
on. When the coolant temperature returns to normal,
the air conditioner can be turned back on.
3-72

On some vehicles, this message displays when
the vehicle’s engine oil is above the proper engine
operating temperature. Reduce the speed of the vehicle.
If this message continues to display, have the vehicle
serviced by your dealer/retailer as soon as possible.
A chime sounds continuously when this message
is displayed. Press the set/reset button to acknowledge
this message and to clear it from the screen.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.

HOT TRANS (Transmission) FLUID
This symbol comes on
with this message.

This message continues to display if it has not
been acknowledged when the engine is turned off.
It also re-displays for three seconds if the message has
been acknowledged, but the condition still exists
when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.

KEY FOB BATTERY LOW
This message displays when the transmission fluid in
the vehicle is too hot. Stop the vehicle and allow it to
idle until it cools down. If this message continues
to display, have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer as soon as possible.
If the vehicle has the Uplevel Trip Computer DIC,
you can determine the actual temperature of the
transmission fluid using the vehicle’s gages button.
See DIC Operation and Displays (Uplevel DIC with
Trip Computer) on page 3-55 or DIC Operation
and Displays (Base Level DIC) on page 3-62 for
more information.
This message displays while the ignition is in ON/RUN.
A chime sounds for two seconds when this message
is displayed. Press the set/reset button to acknowledge
this message and to clear it from the screen.

This symbol comes on
with this message.

This message displays when the battery in the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter needs to be replaced.
To replace the battery, see “Battery Replacement”
under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation
on page 2-4.
This message displays while the ignition is in ON/RUN.
A chime sounds for two seconds when this message
is displayed. Press the set/reset button to acknowledge
this message and to clear it from the screen.

3-73

This message continues to display if it has not
been acknowledged when the engine is turned off.
It also re-displays for three seconds if the message has
been acknowledged, but the condition still exists
when the engine is turned off.

This message continues to display if it has not
been acknowledged when the engine is turned off.
It also re-displays for three seconds if the message has
been acknowledged, but the condition still exists
when the engine is turned off.

The message re-appears when the engine is turned
on and the condition still exists.

If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.

KEY IN IGNITION

LEFT REAR TURN LAMP OUT

This message displays and a chime sounds continuously
when the driver exits the vehicle while the key is in
the ignition after the engine is turned off.

This message displays when the left rear turn signal
lamp needs to be replaced. See Taillamps, Turn Signal,
and Stoplamps on page 5-58 for replacement
procedures.

This message cannot be acknowledged.
This message disappears and the chiming stops when
the key is removed from the ignition.

LEFT FRONT TURN LAMP OUT
This message displays when the left front turn signal
lamp needs to be replaced. See Taillamps, Turn Signal,
and Stoplamps on page 5-58 for replacement
procedures.
This message displays while the ignition is in ON/RUN.
A chime sounds for two seconds when this message
is displayed. Press the set/reset button to acknowledge
this message and to clear it from the screen.

3-74

This message displays while the ignition is in ON/RUN.
A chime sounds for two seconds when this message
is displayed. Press the set/reset button to acknowledge
this message and to clear it from the screen.
This message continues to display if it has not
been acknowledged when the engine is turned off.
It also re-displays for three seconds if the message has
been acknowledged, but the condition still exists
when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.

LOW BRAKE FLUID

LOW FUEL
This symbol comes on
with this message.

This message displays when the brake fluid level is low.
Have the brake system serviced by your dealer/retailer
as soon as possible. See Brakes on page 5-41.
The brake system warning light also appears on the
instrument panel cluster when this message appears
on the DIC. See Brake System Warning Light on
page 3-45.
This message displays only while the ignition is in
ON/RUN. A chime sounds for two seconds while this
message is displayed. Press the set/reset button
to acknowledge this message and to clear it from the
screen.
This message continues to display if it has not
been acknowledged when the engine is turned off.
It also re-displays for three seconds if the message has
been acknowledged, but the condition still exists
when the engine is turned off.

This symbol comes on
with this message.

This message displays when the vehicle is low on fuel.
Refill the fuel tank as soon as possible.
This message displays while the ignition is in ON/RUN.
A chime sounds for two seconds when this message
is displayed. Press the set/reset button to acknowledge
this message and to clear it from the screen.
This message continues to display if it has not
been acknowledged when the engine is turned off.
It also re-displays for three seconds if the message has
been acknowledged, but the condition still exists
when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.

If the condition exists, the message re-appears when
the engine is turned on.
3-75

LOW OIL LEVEL

LOW OIL PRESSURE

On some vehicles, this message displays when the
vehicle’s engine oil is low.

Notice: If the LOW OIL PRESSURE warning
message appears on the DIC display, stop the
vehicle immediately. Do not drive the vehicle until
the cause of the low oil pressure is corrected.
Severe engine damage can result from driving a
vehicle with low oil pressure. See Engine Oil
on page 5-15 for more information.

This symbol comes on
with this message.

This symbol comes on
with this message.
If this message comes on, fill the oil to the proper
level as soon as possible. See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for engine oil fill location. Also,
see Engine Oil on page 5-15 for information on the
kind of oil to use and proper oil level.
This message displays while the ignition is in ON/RUN.
A chime sounds for two seconds when this message
is displayed. Press the set/reset button to acknowledge
this message and to clear it from the screen.
This message continues to display if it has not
been acknowledged when the engine is turned off.
It also re-displays for three seconds if the message has
been acknowledged, but the condition still exists
when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
3-76

This message displays when the vehicle’s engine oil
pressure is low. The low oil pressure warning light
also appears on the instrument panel cluster. See Oil
Pressure Light on page 3-52.

Stop the vehicle immediately, as engine damage can
result from driving a vehicle with low oil pressure.
Have the vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer as soon
as possible when this warning message is displayed.

LOW WASHER FLUID
This symbol comes on
with this message.

This message displays only while the ignition is in
ON/RUN. A chime sounds continuously when this
message is displayed. Press the set/reset button
to acknowledge this message and to clear it from
the screen.
This message continues to display if it has not
been acknowledged when the engine is turned off.
It also re-displays for three seconds if the message has
been acknowledged, but the condition still exists
when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.

This message displays when the windshield washer
fluid is low. Fill the windshield washer fluid reservoir as
soon as possible. See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 5-12 for location of the windshield washer fluid
reservoir. Also, see Windshield Washer Fluid on
page 5-40 for more information.
This message displays only while the ignition is in
ON/RUN. A chime sounds for two seconds when this
message is displayed. Press the set/reset button
to acknowledge this message and to clear it from
the screen.
This message continues to display if it has not
been acknowledged when the engine is turned off.
It also re-displays for three seconds if the message has
been acknowledged, but the condition still exists
when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
3-77

PARKING BRAKE ON
This symbol comes on
with this message.

PARK LAMPS ON
This message displays to alert the driver when the
parking lamps are on, the ignition is in LOCK/OFF,
and the key is removed. A chime sounds continuously
while this message is displayed. This message
cannot be acknowledged.

REDUCED ENGINE POWER
This message displays to alert the driver when the
vehicle’s parking brake is on, the ignition is in ON/RUN,
and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).
See Parking Brake on page 2-33 for more information.

This symbol comes on
with this message.

The brake system warning light also appears on the
instrument panel cluster when this message appears
on the DIC. See Brake System Warning Light on
page 3-45.
A chime sounds continuously while this message is
displayed if driving above 5 mph (8 km/h). Press
the set/reset button to acknowledge this message
and to clear it from the screen.
This message continues to display for three seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine
is turned off. It also re-displays for three seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition
still exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
3-78

This message displays when the vehicle’s engine power
is reduced. If this happens during driving conditions,
such as climbing a steep hill, the transmission may
overwork in a gear that may cause damage to
the vehicle’s engine or transmission. Reduced engine
power can affect the vehicle’s ability to accelerate. If this
message is on, but there is no reduction in performance,
proceed to your destination. The performance may
be reduced the next time the vehicle is driven.

The vehicle may be driven at a reduced speed while
this message is on, but acceleration and speed may be
reduced. Anytime this message stays on, the vehicle
should be taken to your dealer/retailer for service
as soon as possible.
This message displays only when the ignition is in
ON/RUN. A chime sounds for two seconds while this
message is displayed. Press the set/reset button
to acknowledge this message and to clear it from
the screen.
This message continues to display if it has not
been acknowledged when the engine is turned off.
It also re-displays for three seconds if the message
has been acknowledged, but the condition still exists
when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.

REMOTE START ACTIVE PRESS
HAZARD SWITCH TO CANCEL
If your vehicle has the remote start feature, this
message displays when a remote start is initiated.
If you would like to cancel the remote start, turn on
the hazard warning flashers. See Hazard Warning
Flashers on page 3-6.

REMOTE START DISABLED
If your vehicle has the remote start feature, this
message displays if a remote start attempt is
unsuccessful. This may be caused if any of the
following conditions are true when a remote start
attempt is made:

• The remote start system is disabled
through the DIC.

•
•
•
•
•
•
•

The key is in the ignition.
The hood or the doors are not closed.
There is an emission control system malfunction.
The engine coolant temperature is too high.
The oil pressure is low.
The hazard warning flashers are turned on.
The maximum number of remote starts or
remote start attempts between ignition cycles
has been reached.

• The content theft-deterrent alarm is on while
attempting to remote start the vehicle.
See “REMOTE START” under DIC Vehicle
Customization on page 3-89 and Remote Vehicle
Start on page 2-7 for more information.

3-79

RIGHT FRONT TURN LAMP OUT

RIGHT REAR TURN LAMP OUT

This message displays when the vehicle’s right front
turn signal needs to be replaced. See Front Turn Signal,
Parking and Fog Lamps on page 5-57 for bulb
replacement procedures.

This message displays when the vehicle’s right rear
turn signal needs to be replaced. See Taillamps,
Turn Signal, and Stoplamps on page 5-58 for bulb
replacement procedures.

This message displays only while the ignition is in
ON/RUN. A chime sounds for two seconds while this
message is displayed. Press the set/reset button
to acknowledge this message and to clear it from
the screen.

This message displays only while the ignition is in
ON/RUN. A chime sounds for two seconds while this
message is displayed. Press the set/reset button
to acknowledge this message and to clear it from
the screen.

This message continues to display if it has not
been acknowledged when the engine is turned off.
It also re-displays for three seconds if the message
has been acknowledged, but the condition still exists
when the engine is turned off.

This message continues to display if it has not
been acknowledged when the engine is turned off.
It also re-displays for three seconds if the message
has been acknowledged, but the condition still exists
when the engine is turned off.

If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.

If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.

3-80

SERVICE ABS SYSTEM
This symbol comes on
with this message.

If the vehicle has the Antilock Brake System (ABS), this
message displays when the vehicle’s brakes are not
functioning properly. Have the brake system serviced by
your dealer/retailer as soon as possible.
This message displays only while the ignition is in
ON/RUN. A chime sounds for two seconds while this
message is displayed. Press the set/reset button
to acknowledge this message and to clear it from
the screen.
This message continues to display if it has not
been acknowledged when the engine is turned off.
It also re-displays for three seconds if the message
has been acknowledged, but the condition still exists
when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.

SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM
This symbol comes on
with this message.

This message displays when the vehicle’s brakes are
not functioning properly. Have the brake system serviced
by your dealer/retailer as soon as possible.
This message displays only while the ignition is in
ON/RUN. A chime sounds for two seconds while this
message is displayed. Press the set/reset button
to acknowledge this message and to clear it from
the screen.
This message continues to display if it has not
been acknowledged when the engine is turned off.
It also re-displays for three seconds if the message
has been acknowledged, but the condition still exists
when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.

3-81

SERVICE BRAKE APPLY SENSOR

SERVICE PARK LAMPS

This message displays when the brake apply sensor is
not functioning properly. The vehicle still has brakes
when this warning message displays, but you should
have the vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer as soon
as possible.

This message displays if one of the vehicle’s parking
lamps needs to be replaced. See Front Turn Signal,
Parking and Fog Lamps on page 5-57 for bulb
replacement procedures.

This message displays only while the ignition is in
ON/RUN. A chime sounds for two seconds while this
message is displayed. Press the set/reset button
to acknowledge this message and to clear it from
the screen.
This message continues to display if it has not
been acknowledged when the engine is turned off.
It also re-displays for three seconds if the message
has been acknowledged, but the condition still exists
when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.

3-82

This message displays only while the ignition is in
ON/RUN. A chime sounds for two seconds while this
message is displayed. Press the set/reset button
to acknowledge this message and to clear it from
the screen.
This message continues to display if it has not
been acknowledged when the engine is turned off.
It also re-displays for three seconds if the message
has been acknowledged, but the condition still exists
when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.

SERVICE STABILITY SYSTEM
This symbol comes on
with this message.

If the vehicle has the StabiliTrak® Plus system, this
message displays when it is not functioning properly.
A warning light also appears on the instrument
panel cluster. See Traction Control System (TCS)
Warning Light on page 3-47. See StabiliTrak® Plus
System on page 4-8 for more information. Have
the StabiliTrak® Plus system serviced by your
dealer/retailer as soon as possible.
This message displays only while the ignition is in
ON/RUN. A chime sounds for two seconds while this
message is displayed. Press the set/reset button
to acknowledge this message and to clear it from
the screen.
This message continues to display if it has not
been acknowledged when the engine is turned off.
It also re-displays for three seconds if the message
has been acknowledged, but the condition still exists
when the engine is turned off.

If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.

SERVICE THEFT SYSTEM
This message displays if there is a problem with
the theft-deterrent system programmed in the key.
A fault has been detected in the system which means
that the system is disabled and it is not protecting
the vehicle. The vehicle usually restarts; however, you
may want to take the vehicle to your dealer/retailer
before turning off the engine. See Keys on page 2-2
for information on the PASS-Key III system.
This message displays only while the ignition is in
ON/RUN. A chime sounds for two seconds while
this message is displayed. Press the set/reset button
to acknowledge this message and to clear it from
the screen.
This message continues to display if it has not
been acknowledged when the engine is turned off.
It also re-displays for three seconds if the message
has been acknowledged, but the condition still exists
when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.

3-83

SERVICE TIRE MONITOR SYSTEM
This message displays if a part on the Tire Pressure
Monitor System (TPMS) is not working properly. The tire
pressure light also flashes and then remains on during
the same ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure Light on
page 3-49. Several conditions may cause this message
to appear. See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on
page 5-72 for more information. If the warning comes on
and stays on, there may be a problem with the TPMS.
See your dealer/retailer.
This message displays only while the ignition is in
ON/RUN. Press the set/reset button to acknowledge
this message and to clear it from the screen.
This message continues to display if it has not
been acknowledged when the engine is turned off.
It also re-displays for three seconds if the message
has been acknowledged, but the condition still exists
when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.

SERVICE TRACTION SYSTEM
This symbol comes on
with this message.

If the vehicle has the traction system, this message
displays when the system is not functioning properly.
A warning light also appears on the instrument panel
cluster. See Traction Control System (TCS) Warning
Light on page 3-47. See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 4-6 or Enhanced Traction System (ETS) on
page 4-7 for more information. Have the system serviced
by your dealer/retailer as soon as possible.
This message displays only while the ignition is in
ON/RUN. A chime sounds for two seconds while this
message is displayed. Press the set/reset button
to acknowledge this message and to clear it from
the screen.
This message continues to display if it has not
been acknowledged when the engine is turned off.
It also re-displays for three seconds if the message
has been acknowledged, but the condition still exists
when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.

3-84

SERVICE VARIABLE EFFORT
STEERING
This symbol comes on
with this message.

If the vehicle has the variable effort steering system,
this message displays if this system is not functioning
properly. See Steering on page 4-10 for more
information. Have the system serviced by your
dealer/retailer as soon as possible.
This message displays only while the ignition is in
ON/RUN. A chime sounds for two seconds while this
message is displayed. Press the set/reset button
to acknowledge this message and to clear it from
the screen.
This message continues to display if it has not
been acknowledged when the engine is turned off.
It also re-displays for three seconds if the message
has been acknowledged, but the condition still exists
when the engine is turned off.

SERVICE VEHICLE SOON
This symbol comes on
with this message.

This message displays when a non-emissions related
malfunction occurs. Have the vehicle serviced by
your dealer/retailer as soon as possible.
This message displays only while the ignition is in
ON/RUN. A chime sounds for two seconds while this
message is displayed. Press the set/reset button
to acknowledge this message and to clear it from
the screen.
This message continues to display if it has not
been acknowledged when the engine is turned off.
It also re-displays for three seconds if the message
has been acknowledged, but the condition still exists
when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.

If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
3-85

STABILITY CONTROL ACTIVE
This symbol comes on
with this message.

STABILITY CONTROL OFF
This symbol comes on
with this message.

If the vehicle has the StabiliTrak® Plus system, this
message displays when the system is engaged
and actively assisting the driver with directional control
of the vehicle. Slippery road conditions may exist
when this warning message is displayed, so driving
should be adjusted accordingly. STABILITY CONTROL
ACTIVE also appears in the Head-Up Display (HUD),
if your vehicle has this feature.

If the vehicle has the StabiliTrak® Plus system, this
message displays when the system turns off. This
message displays only while the ignition is in ON/RUN.
A chime sounds once and the message stays on for
three seconds and then disappears. A warning
light indicating that this system is deactivated also
appears on the instrument panel cluster. See Traction
Control System (TCS) Warning Light on page 3-47.

This message displays only while the ignition is in
ON/RUN. This message stays on until road conditions
change and StabiliTrak® Plus is not active.

When the StabiliTrak® Plus system is off, the system will
not be engaged and will not actively assist the driver
with directional control of the vehicle. See StabiliTrak®
Plus System on page 4-8.

This message cannot be acknowledged and cleared
from the screen.

3-86

Any of the following conditions may cause the
StabiliTrak® Plus system to turn off:
• The StabiliTrak® Plus system on the GXP
option is manually turned off. See StabiliTrak®
Plus System on page 4-8 for more information.
• The battery is low.
• There is a StabiliTrak® Plus system failure.
See your dealer/retailer for service.

This message only appears while the ignition is in
ON/RUN, and will not disappear until the problem
is resolved. A chime sounds for two seconds.
This message cannot be acknowledged.

TRACTION CONTROL ACTIVE
This symbol comes on
with this message.

STARTING DISABLED DUE TO
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL
This message displays when there is a malfunction
with the electronic throttle control which prevents
the vehicle from starting. Have the vehicle serviced
by your dealer/retailer.
This message only appears while the ignition is in
ON/RUN, and will not disappear until the problem
is resolved. A chime sounds for two seconds.
This message cannot be acknowledged.

STARTING DISABLED DUE TO
THEFT SYSTEM
This message displays when the system detects a
malfunction in the content theft-deterrent system and
prevents the vehicle from starting.

If the vehicle has the traction system, this message
displays when the system is on. TRACTION CONTROL
ACTIVE also appears in the Head-Up Display (HUD),
if your vehicle has this feature.
This message only displays while the ignition is in
ON/RUN and will not disappear until driving conditions
change and the system is no longer active.
This message cannot be acknowledged or cleared
from the screen.

3-87

TRACTION CONTROL OFF
This symbol comes on
with this message.

Any of the following conditions may cause the system
to turn off:

• The system is turned off by pressing the TC
(traction control) button located on the center
console. See Traction Control System (TCS) on
page 4-6 or Enhanced Traction System (ETS)
on page 4-7 for more information.

• The battery is low.
• There is a system failure. See your dealer/retailer
If the vehicle has the traction system, this message
displays when the system turns off. TRACTION
CONTROL OFF also appears in the Head-Up Display
(HUD), if your vehicle has this feature. This message
only displays while the ignition is in ON/RUN and
disappears after three seconds. A chime sounds once
and the message stays on for three seconds and
then disappears. A warning light indicating that this
system is deactivated also appears on the instrument
panel cluster. See Traction Control System (TCS)
Warning Light on page 3-47.

3-88

for service.

TURN SIGNAL ON
This message displays if the vehicle is driven for
more than 0.75 mile (1.21 km) while one of the turn
signals are on. It appears as a reminder to turn off
the turn signal.
This message only displays when the ignition is in
ON/RUN. A chime sounds for two seconds and
the message will not disappear until the turn signal
is manually turned off, or a turn is completed.

DIC Vehicle Customization

3. Press the set/reset button to display the
first screen.

Your vehicle may have customization capabilities that
allow you to program certain features to one preferred
setting. Customization features can only be programmed
to one setting on the vehicle and cannot be programmed
to a preferred setting for two different drivers.

4. Press the options button to access these modes:

All of the customization options may not be available on
your vehicle. Only the options available will be displayed
on the DIC.
The default settings for the customization features were
set when your vehicle left the factory, but may have
been changed from their default state since then. The
customization preferences are automatically recalled.
To change customization preferences, use the
following procedure.

Entering the Personal Programming Mode
1. Turn the ignition on and make sure the vehicle
is in PARK (P).
To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it is
recommended that the headlamps are turned off.
2. Press the options button until PERSONAL
PROGRAMMING MODE appears on the DIC.

Personal Programming Mode Screens
EXTERIOR LIGHTING DELAY: This screen allows
this feature to be turned off, or allows the selection of the
number of seconds the exterior lamps are turned on
after the key is removed from the ignition, or the vehicle
is unlocked using the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter.
If OFF is selected, the exterior lamps will not turn on.
If a time delay is chosen, the lamps will turn on for
the selected time. The time delay will be cancelled
and the exterior lamps will turn on automatically when
the key is removed from the ignition, or the vehicle
is unlocked using the RKE transmitter.
To program this mode:
1. Press and release the set/reset button to scroll to
the selection you want to program. Choose from
OFF, 15, 30, 60, or 90 seconds.
2. Press the options button again to advance to the
next screen.

3-89

INTERIOR LIGHTS WHEN DOOR CLOSED: This
screen allows this feature to be turned OFF or ON.
If OFF is selected, the interior lamps will turn off
immediately when the ignition is turned off and the
last open door is closed.

To program this mode:
1. Press and release the set/reset button to scroll to
either OFF or ON.
2. Press the options button again to advance to the
next screen.

If ON is selected, the interior lamps will stay on for
about 25 seconds after the vehicle’s ignition is turned
off and the last open door is closed.

AUTO DOOR UNLOCK: This screen allows this feature
to be turned off, used for the driver’s door only, or for
all the doors.

To program this mode:

If OFF is selected, none of the doors will unlock when
the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).

1. Press and release the set/reset button to scroll to
either OFF or ON.
2. Press the options button again to advance to the
next screen.
INTERIOR LIGHTS WHEN KEY REMOVED: This
screen allows this feature to be turned OFF or ON.
This feature enables the interior lamps in the vehicle to
turn on for about 25 seconds after the key is removed
from the ignition.
If OFF is selected, removing the key from the ignition
will not cause the interior lamps to turn on.
If ON is selected, removing the key from the ignition will
cause the interior lamps to be turned on for about
25 seconds.

3-90

If DRIVER is selected, only the driver’s door will unlock
when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).
If ALL is selected, all the doors will unlock when the
vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).
To program this mode:
1. Press and release the set/reset button to scroll to
either OFF, DRIVER, or ALL.
2. Press the options button again to advance to the
next screen.

AUTO DOOR UNLOCK ON: If DRIVER or ALL was
selected on the AUTO DOOR UNLOCK screen, this
screen allows selection of when the vehicle’s doors will
unlock. The choices are when the key is removed from
the ignition or when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).
If KEY-OUT is selected, the auto door unlock will function
when the key is taken out of the ignition.
If PARK is selected, the auto door unlock will function
when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).
To program this mode:
1. Press and release the set/reset button to scroll to
either KEY-OUT or PARK.

To program this mode:
1. Press and release the set/reset button to scroll to
either OFF or ON.
2. Press the options button again to advance to the
next screen.
REMOTE LOCKS FEEDBACK: This screen allows
selection for this option to be turned OFF, or gives the
choice of two methods of verification; LIGHTS or
LIGHTS and HORN; that indicate the vehicle’s doors
are locked when the LOCK button on the RKE
transmitter is pressed.
If OFF is selected, this feature will not be programmed.

2. Press the options button again to advance to the
next screen.

If LIGHTS is selected, the exterior lamps will flash when
the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter is pressed.

DELAYED LOCKING: This screen allows this feature
to be turned OFF or ON. The key must be out of
the ignition for this feature to work.

If LIGHTS and HORN is selected, the exterior lamps will
flash when the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter is
pressed, and the horn will sound when the LOCK button
on the RKE transmitter is pressed again within five
seconds of the previous command.

If OFF is selected, there will be no delayed locking of
the vehicle’s doors.
If ON is selected, the locking of the vehicle’s doors will
be delayed by five seconds after a power door lock
switch is pressed while the door is open, or the LOCK
button on the RKE transmitter is pressed while any
door is open.

To program this mode:
1. Press the set/reset button to scroll to OFF, LIGHTS,
or LIGHTS and HORN.
2. Press the options button again to advance to the
next screen.

3-91

If the vehicle does not have a content theft-deterrent
system, the next screens with PROGRAMMING
FINISHED and DISPLAY OFF will appear.
If the vehicle does have a content theft-deterrent
system, the next screen will appear.
THEFT DETERRENT: The vehicle may have a content
theft-deterrent system. Once it is turned on, the
system will activate if someone tries to enter the vehicle
without using the RKE transmitter or the correct key.
This screen allows this feature to be turned OFF or ON.
If OFF is selected, the content theft-deterrent system
will not function.
If ON is selected, the content theft-deterrent system
will be activated.
To program this mode:
1. Press the set/reset button to scroll to OFF or ON.
2. Press the options button again to advance to
the next screen.

KEY CYLINDER DISARM: If the vehicle has a content
theft-deterrent system, and ON was selected on the
THEFT DETERRENT screen, this screen allows
this feature to be turned OFF or ON. This feature
determines whether the driver’s door key cylinder may
be used to disarm the content theft-deterrent system.
If OFF is selected, the vehicle’s content theft-deterrent
system can not be disarmed by unlocking the driver’s
door using the driver’s door key cylinder. Selecting OFF
prevents a thief from disarming the vehicle’s content
theft-deterrent system by attacking the driver’s door key
cylinder, and may make the vehicle more secure.
However, if OFF is selected, unlocking an armed vehicle
by using the driver’s door key cylinder and opening
the door will cause the content theft alarm to activate.
For this reason, it is recommended that the vehicle
be unlocked using the remote keyless entry system
when this feature is set to OFF.
If ON is selected, the vehicle’s content theft-deterrent
system can be disarmed by unlocking the driver’s
door using the driver’s door key cylinder.
To program this mode:
1. Press the set/reset button to scroll to OFF or ON.
2. Press the options button again to advance to
the next screen.

3-92

LOCK SWITCH ARM: If the vehicle has the content
theft-deterrent system and ON was selected on
the THEFT DETERRENT screen, this screen allows this
feature to be turned OFF or ON. This feature controls
whether the vehicle’s content theft system can be
activated using a door lock switch.

REMOTE START: If your vehicle has the remote start
feature, this screen allows this feature to be turned
OFF or ON. The remote start feature allows you to start
the engine from outside of the vehicle using the RKE
transmitter. See Remote Vehicle Start on page 2-7
for more information.

If OFF is selected, locking the vehicle using a door lock
switch will not cause the vehicle’s content theft
system to arm.

If OFF is selected, the remote start feature will be
disabled.

If ON is selected, the content theft-deterrent system
can be armed using the driver’s door lock switch
by pressing the driver’s door lock switch while the
driver’s door is open and the key is not in the ignition,
or by pressing the front passenger’s door lock switch
while the front passenger’s door is open and the key
is not in the ignition.
To program this mode:
1. Press the set/reset button to scroll to OFF or ON.

If ON is selected, the remote start feature will be
enabled.
To program this mode:
1. Press the set/reset button to scroll to OFF or ON.
2. Press the options button again to advance to
the next screen.
PROGRAMMING FINISHED will appear on the next
screen. This confirms that the personal options
programming is complete.

2. Press the options button again to advance to
the next screen.

3-93

Audio System(s)
Determine which radio your vehicle has and then read the
pages following to familiarize yourself with its features.

{CAUTION:
This system provides you with far greater
access to audio stations and song listings.
Giving extended attention to entertainment
tasks while driving can cause a crash and
you or others can be injured or killed. Always
keep your eyes on the road and your mind
on the drive — avoid engaging in extended
searching while driving.
Keeping your mind on the drive is important for
safe driving. See Defensive Driving on page 4-2.
Here are some ways in which you can help avoid
distraction while driving.
While your vehicle is parked:

• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.
• Familiarize yourself with its operation.

3-94

• Set up your audio system by presetting your
favorite radio stations, setting the tone, and
adjusting the speakers. Then, when driving
conditions permit, you can tune to your favorite
radio stations using the presets and steering wheel
controls if the vehicle has them.
Notice: Before adding any sound equipment to
your vehicle, such as an audio system, CD player,
CB radio, mobile telephone, or two-way radio, make
sure that it can be added by checking with your
dealer/retailer. Also, check federal rules covering
mobile radio and telephone units. If sound
equipment can be added, it is very important to do
it properly. Added sound equipment may interfere
with the operation of your vehicle’s engine, radio,
or other systems, and even damage them. Your
vehicle’s systems may interfere with the operation
of sound equipment that has been added.
Notice: The chime signals related to safety belts,
parking brake, and other functions of your vehicle
operate through the radio/entertainment system.
If that equipment is replaced or additional equipment
is added to your vehicle, the chimes may not
work. Make sure that replacement or additional
equipment is compatible with your vehicle before
installing it. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3.

Your vehicle may have a feature called Retained
Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP, the audio system
can be played even after the ignition is turned off.
See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on page 2-24
for more information.

Radio(s)

Setting the Clock
The radio may have a button marked with an H or HR to
represent hours and an M or MN to represent minutes.
Press and hold the hour button until the correct hour
displays. AM or PM displays for morning or evening
hours. Press and hold the minute button until the correct
minute displays. The time can be set with the ignition
on or off.
To synchronize the time with an FM station broadcasting
Radio Data System (RDS) information, press and
hold the hour and minute buttons at the same time
until UPDATED and the clock symbol appear on
the display. If the time is not available from the
station, NO UPDATE or NO UPDAT will appear on
the display.

Radio with CD (MP3) shown,
Radio with CD (Base) similar
Your vehicle has one of these radios as its audio system.

RDS time is broadcast once a minute. After tuning to
an RDS broadcast station, it could take a few minutes
for the time to update.

3-95

Radio Data System (RDS)

XM™ Satellite Radio Service

The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).
RDS features are available for use only on FM stations
that broadcast RDS information.

XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the
48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian provinces.
XM™ Satellite Radio has a wide variety of programming
and commercial-free music, coast-to-coast, and in
digital-quality sound. During your trial or when you
subscribe, you will get unlimited access to XM™ Radio
Online for when you are not in your vehicle. A service
fee is required to receive the XM™ service. For more
information, contact XM™ at www.xmradio.com or
call 1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and www.xmradio.ca
or call 1-877-438-9677 in Canada.

With RDS, the radio can do the following:

• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of
programming

• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies

• Display messages from radio stations
• Seek to stations with traffic announcements
This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and only works when the information
is available. In rare cases, a radio station may
broadcast incorrect information that causes the radio
features to work improperly. If this happens, contact the
radio station.
While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, the station
name or the call letters appear on the display instead
of the frequency. RDS stations may also provide
the time of day, a program type (PTY) for current
programming, and the name of the program being
broadcast.

3-96

Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Push this knob to turn the system
on and off.
VOL (Volume): Turn this knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or to decrease the volume.
RCL (Recall): Push this knob to switch the display
between the radio station frequency and the time.
When the ignition is turned off, push this knob to display
the time.
For RDS, push the RCL knob to change what appears
on the display while using RDS. The display options
are station name, RDS station frequency, PTY, and the
name of the program (if available).

For XM™ (if equipped), push the RCL knob while
in XM™ mode to retrieve four different categories
of information related to the current song or
channel: Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY,
Channel Number/Channel Name.
To change the default on the display, push the RCL
knob until you see the desired display, then hold
the knob until the display flashes. The selected
display is now the default.
SCV (Speed-Compensated Volume): Vehicles with
the SCV feature, automatically lets the audio system
adjust volume to make up for road and wind noise
while driving.
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button
to select MIN (minimum), MED (medium), or MAX
(maximum). Each higher setting allows for more volume
compensation at faster vehicle speeds. Then, as you
drive, SCV automatically increases the volume, as
necessary, to overcome noise at any speed. The volume
level should always sound the same while driving.
To turn SCV off, press this button until OFF displays.
AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): Vehicles with
automatic volume, automatically lets the audio system
adjust volume to make up for road and wind noise
as you drive.

Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button
to select MIN (minimum), MED (medium), or MAX
(maximum). Each higher setting allows for more volume
compensation at faster vehicle speeds. Then, as you
drive, automatic volume increases the volume, as
necessary, to overcome noise at any speed. The volume
level should always sound the same to you as you
drive. To turn automatic volume off, press this button
until OFF displays.

Finding a Station
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). The display shows
the selection.
TUNE: Turn this knob to select radio stations.

wx or s tSEEK: Press the up or the down arrow
to go to the next or to the previous station and stay there.
The radio only seeks stations with a strong signal that are
in the selected band.

wx or s tSCAN: Press and hold either SCAN
arrow for two seconds until SCAN or SC displays and a
beep sounds. The radio goes to a station, plays for a
few seconds, then goes to the next station. Press either
SCAN arrow again to stop scanning.

3-97

To scan preset stations, press and hold either SCAN
arrow for more than four seconds until PSCAN or
PRESET SCAN and the preset number displays and a
double beep sounds. The radio goes to the first
preset station, plays for a few seconds, then goes to the
next preset station. Press either SCAN arrow again to
stop scanning presets.
The radio scans stations only with a strong signal that
are in the selected band.

Setting Preset Stations
Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,
six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can be programmed
on the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the
following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1
or XM2.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press EQ, or depending on the radio, AUTO EQ,
to select the equalization.
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until a beep sounds. When that
numbered pushbutton is pressed, the station that
was set returns and the equalization that was
selected is stored for that pushbutton.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
3-98

Setting the Tone
(Bass/Midrange/Treble)
TONE: Press and release the TONE button until BASS,
MID (midrange), or TREB (treble) displays. The
SELECT LED indicator lights to show that the tone
control can be adjusted. Turn the SELECT knob
to increase or to decrease. If a station is weak or has
static, decrease the treble.
To return all of the tone controls to the middle position,
press and hold the TONE button until FLAT displays.
AUDIO (Radio with Six-Disc CD Player): Push
the AUDIO knob until BASS, MID (midrange), or
TREB (treble) displays. Turn the knob to increase
or to decrease. If a station is weak or noisy, decrease
the treble.
To adjust bass, midrange, or treble to the middle
position, select BASS, MID, or TREB and push and
hold the AUDIO knob. The display level adjusts to the
middle position and a beep sounds.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker control is displayed. CENTERED displays
and one beep sounds.

EQ or AUTO EQ (Equalization): Press this button to
select customized equalization settings.
Up to six customized equalization settings, can be
programmed on the six numbered pushbuttons,
by performing the following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Use the TONE button and the SELECT knob to
create the desired equalization.
3. Press and hold the EQ or AUTO EQ button for
two seconds. SELECT EQ # displays and the
EQ symbol flashes.
4. Press EQ or turn the SELECT knob to select the
desired EQ number.
5. Press and hold the EQ or AUTO EQ button or push
the SELECT knob to store the equalization setting
and the number. A beep sounds and EQ SAVED
displays.
6. Repeat the steps for the other EQ settings and
numbers.
EQ 5 has been programmed at the factory for use with
talk radio, but it can be set to a different tone.

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
BAL (Balance): Press this button until BAL displays,
to adjust the balance between the right and the left
speakers. The SELECT LED indicator lights to show
that the speakers can be adjusted. Turn the SELECT
knob to move the sound toward the right or the left
speakers.
FADE: Press this button until FADE displays, to adjust
the fade between the front and the rear speakers.
The SELECT LED indicator lights to show that the
speakers can be adjusted. Turn the SELECT knob to
move the sound toward the front or the rear speakers.
Press and hold the BAL FADE button for two seconds
to return all speaker settings to the middle position.
AUDIO (Radio with Six-Disc CD Player): Push
the AUDIO knob until BAL (balance) displays, to adjust
the balance between the right and the left speakers.
Turn the knob to move the sound toward the right or
the left speakers.
To adjust the fade between the front and rear
speakers, push and hold the AUDIO knob until FAD
(fade) displays. Turn the knob to move the sound
toward the front or the rear speakers.
To adjust the balance and the fade to the middle
position, select balance or fade and push and hold
the AUDIO knob. The display level adjusts to the
middle position and a beep sounds.
3-99

To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker controls are displayed. CENTERED
displays and one beep sounds.

Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station
(RDS and XM™)
To select and find a desired PTY perform the following:
1. Press PROG TYPE, or depending on the radio,
P-TYPE, to activate program type select mode.
The PTY symbol displays.
2. Turn the SELECT, or depending on the radio,
P-TYPE, knob to select a PTY.

If both PTY and TRAF are on, the radio searches
for stations with the selected PTY and traffic
announcements.
The Radio with Six-Disc CD player has the PTY
interrupt feature. To use this feature, press and hold the
P-TYPE button until a beep sounds on the PTY used
to interrupt. When selected, an asterisk displays beside
that PTY on the display. Select multiple interrupts if
desired. When listening to a CD, the last selected RDS
station interrupts play if that selected program type
format is broadcast.

wx or s tSCAN: Scan the stations within a
PTY by performing the following:

3. Press either SEEK arrow, once the desired PTY
displays, to select the PTY and to go to the
PTY’s first station.

1. Press PROG TYPE, or depending on the radio,
P-TYPE, to activate program type select mode.
The PTY symbol displays.

4. To go to another station within that PTY, and the
PTY displays, press either SEEK arrow once.
If the PTY is not displayed, press either SEEK
arrow twice to display the PTY and then to go to
another station.

2. Turn the SELECT, or depending on the radio,
P-TYPE, knob to select a PTY.

5. Press PROG TYPE, or depending on the radio,
P-TYPE, to exit program type select mode.
If PTY times out and is no longer on the display,
go back to Step 1.

4. Press either SCAN arrow to stop at a station.

3-100

3. Press and hold either SCAN arrow, once the
desired PTY is displayed, and the radio begins
scanning the stations in the PTY.
If both PTY and TRAF are on, the radio scans for
stations with the selected PTY and traffic
announcements.

BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency
allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the
same program type. To turn alternate frequency on,
press and hold BAND for two seconds. AF ON displays.
The radio can switch to stations with a stronger
frequency.
To turn alternate frequency off, press and hold BAND
again for two seconds. AF OFF displays. The radio
does not switch to other stations.
This function does not apply for XM™ Satellite
Radio Service.

Setting Preset PTYs (RDS Only)
These pushbuttons have factory PTY presets. Up to
12 PTYs (six FM1 and six FM2), can be programmed
on the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing
the following steps:
1. Press BAND, or depending on the radio, AM/FM
to select FM1 or FM2.
2. Press PROG TYPE, or depending on the radio,
P-TYPE, to activate program type select mode.
The PTY symbol displays.

4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until a beep sounds. When that
numbered pushbutton is pressed, the PTY that
was set, returns, if program type select mode
is activated.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.

RDS Messages
ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies.
When an alert announcement comes on the current
radio station, ALERT! displays. The announcement is
heard, even if the volume is low or a CD is playing.
If a CD is playing, play stops during the announcement.
Alert announcements cannot be turned off.
ALERT! is not affected by tests of the emergency
broadcast system. This feature is not supported by
all RDS stations.
INFO (Information): If the current station has a
message, INFO displays. Press this button to see the
message. The message can display the artist, song title,
call in phone numbers, etc.

3. Turn the SELECT, or depending on the radio,
P-TYPE, knob to select a PTY.

3-101

If the entire message is not displayed, parts of the
message appears every three seconds. To scroll
through the message, press and release the INFO
button. A new group of words appear on the display
after every press of this button. Once the complete
message has been displayed, the information symbol
disappears from the display until another new message
is received. The last message can be displayed by
pressing the INFO button. The last message can
be viewed until a new message is received or a different
station is tuned to.
TRAF (Traffic): If TRAF displays, the tuned station
broadcasts traffic announcements. To receive the traffic
announcement from the tuned station, press this
button. Brackets are displayed around TRAF and when
a traffic announcement broadcasts on the tuned
radio station, you will hear it.
If the station does not broadcast traffic announcements,
press the TRAF button and the radio seeks to a
station that does. When a station that broadcasts traffic
announcements is found, the radio stops seeking
and brackets are displayed around TRAF. If no station
is found that broadcasts traffic announcements, NO
TRAFFIC displays.

If the brackets are on the display and TRAF is not,
press the TRAF button to remove the brackets or
use the TUNE knob or the SEEK arrows to go to a
station that supports traffic announcements. If no station
is found that broadcasts traffic announcements, NO
TRAFFIC may display.
The radio plays the traffic announcement if the volume
is low. The radio interrupts the play of a CD if the
last tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements
and the brackets are displayed.
This function does not apply to XM™ Satellite Radio
Service.

Radio Messages
CALIBRATE: The audio system has been calibrated for
your vehicle from the factory. If CALIBRATE displays
it means that the radio has not been configured properly
for your vehicle and it must be returned to your dealer/
retailer for service.
LOCKED: Vehicles with the Theft-Deterrent Feature
may display LOCKED when the THEFTLOCK® system
has locked up. Take the vehicle to your dealer/retailer
for service.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer/retailer.

3-102

Radio Messages for XM™ Only
See XM Radio Messages on page 3-114 later in
this section for further detail.

For vehicles that have a radio with a Six-Disc CD
player, see the following:

Playing a CD

LOAD / CD Z: Press the LOAD side of this button to
load CDs into the CD player. This CD player holds up
to six CDs.

Radio with CD (Base)

To insert one CD, do the following:

Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing. If you
want to insert a CD when the ignition is off, first press
the eject button or push the RCL knob. If you insert a CD
with the radio off and the ignition on, it starts to play.

Radio with CD (MP3)
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player pulls it in and READING DISC and the CD symbol
appears on the display. If you want to insert a CD
with the ignition off, first press the EJECT button or
push the RCL knob.
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol appears on
the display. As each new track starts to play, the track
number appears on the display.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player it stays in the player. When the ignition or radio
is turned on, the CD starts to play where it stopped,
if it was the last selected audio source.

1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Press and release the LOAD button.
3. Wait for the indicator light, located to the right of
the slot, to turn green.
4. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,
label side up. The player pulls the CD in.
To insert multiple CDs, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Press and hold the LOAD button for two seconds.
A beep sounds and the indicator light, located to
the right of the slot, begins to flash.
3. Once the light stops flashing and turns green, load
a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot, label side
up. The player pulls the CD in.
Once the CD is loaded, the light begins flashing
again. Once the light stops flashing and turns green
you can load another CD. The CD player takes
up to six CDs. Do not try to load more than six.

3-103

To load more than one CD but less than six, complete
Steps 1 through 3. When finished loading CDs, the
radio begins to play the last CD loaded.
If more than one CD has been loaded, a number for
each CD displays.

Playing a Specific Loaded CD
For every CD loaded, a number appears on the display.
To play a specific CD, first press the CD AUX button,
then press the numbered pushbutton that corresponds to
the CD. A small bar appears under the CD number
that is playing and the track number displays.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
LOAD / CD Z (Eject): Press the CD eject side of this
button to eject a CD(s). A beep sounds and the indicator
light flashes to indicate when a CD is being ejected.
REMOVE CD displays. The CD can be removed.
If the CD is not removed, after 25 seconds, the CD is
automatically pulled back into the player. If the CD is
pushed back into the player, before the 25 second time
period is complete, the player senses an error and tries
to eject the CD several times before stopping.

Do not repeatedly press the CD eject button to eject a CD
after trying to push it in manually. The player’s 25-second
eject timer resets at each press of eject, causing the
player to not eject the CD until the 25-second time period
has elapsed.
Once the player stops and the CD is ejected, remove the
CD. After removing the CD, push the PWR knob off and
then on again, or wait for the system to reset. This clears
the CD-sensing feature and enables CDs to be loaded
into the player again.

\1 (Forward) or FWD | (Forward): Depending
on the radio that your vehicle has, the reverse arrows
will look different, but they function the same. Press
and hold this button to advance quickly within a track.
Sound is heard at a reduced volume. Release this
pushbutton to play the passage. The elapsed time of
the track displays.
RPT (Repeat): For the Radio with Six-Disc CD player,
use this feature to repeat one track or an entire CD.
To use repeat, do the following:
• To repeat the track you are listening to, press and
release the RPT button. RPT displays. Press RPT
again to turn off repeat play.

• To repeat the CD you are listening to, press and hold
the RPT button for two seconds. RPT displays. Press
RPT again to turn off repeat play.
3-104

RDM 2 / RDM 3 / RDM (Random): Depending on the
radio, press this button to hear the tracks in random,
rather than sequential, order. RDM and the track number
displays. Press RDM again to turn off random play.
For the Radio with Six-Disc CD player, the tracks can
be listened to in random order, on one CD or on all
of the CDs.
To use random on the Radio with Six-Disc CD player,
do one of the following:

• To play the tracks on the CD in random order, press
and release the RDM button. RANDOM ONE
displays. Press RDM again to turn off random play.

• To play the tracks on all of the CDs that are loaded in
random order, press and hold RDM for more than
two seconds. A beep sounds and RANDOM ALL
displays. Press RDM again to turn off random play.

# 3 (Next Folder):

This button does not have a
function for non-MP3 CDs. Press this button to go to
the next MP3 folder.
4 sor { REV (Reverse): Depending on the radio
that your vehicle has, the reverse arrows will look
different, but they function the same. Press and hold
this button to reverse quickly within a track. Sound
is heard at a reduced volume. Release this pushbutton
to play the passage. The elapsed time of the track
displays.

6 ! (Previous Folder): This button does not have a
function for non-MP3 CDs. Press this button to go to
the previous MP3 folder.
EQ or AUTO EQ (Equalization): Press EQ, or
depending on the radio, AUTO EQ, to select the desired
customized equalization setting while playing a CD.
The equalization is automatically set when a CD
is played. See “EQ” or “AUTO EQ” listed previously for
more information.

w SEEK x (Radios with CD): Press the SEEK
arrows to go to the previous or to the next track. Press
either arrow for more than two seconds to search
the previous or next tracks at two tracks per second.
When the desired track number displays, release
the arrow to stop searching and to play the track.
sSEEK t (Radio with Six-Disc CD Player): Press
the left arrow to go to the start of the current track, if more
than ten seconds have played. Press the right arrow to go
to the next track. If either arrow is held or pressed more
than once, the player continues moving backward or
forward through the CD.
w SCAN x (Radios with CD): Press and hold either
arrow for more than two seconds until SCAN and the
track number displays and a beep sounds. The CD goes
to the next track, plays for a few seconds, then goes to
the next track. Press either arrow again to stop scanning.
3-105

s SCAN t (Radio with Six-Disc CD Player):
To scan one CD, press and hold either SCAN arrow for
more than two seconds until SCAN displays and a
beep sounds. The radio goes to the next track, plays for
10 seconds, then goes to the next track. Press either
SCAN arrow again, to stop scanning.
To scan all loaded CDs, press and hold either SCAN
arrow for more than four seconds until CD SCAN
displays and a beep sounds. Use this feature to listen
to 10 seconds of the first track of each loaded CD.
Press either SCAN arrow again, to stop scanning.
RCL (Recall): Push this button, or depending on the
radio, press the RCL knob, to see how long the current
track has been playing. To change the default on the
display, track and elapsed time, push the button until the
desired option displays, then hold the button until the
display flashes. The selected display is now the default.
BAND: Depending on the radio, press this button to
listen to the radio when a CD is playing. The inactive
CD(s) remains inside the radio for future listening.
CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD
while listening to the radio.

3-106

Care of Your CDs
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. Handle them carefully.
Store CD-R(s) in their original cases or other protective
cases and away from direct sunlight and dust. The
CD player scans the bottom surface of the disc. If the
surface of a CD is damaged, such as cracked, broken,
or scratched, the CD does not play properly or not
at all. Do not touch the bottom side of a CD while
handling it; this could damage the surface. Pick up CDs
by grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole
and the outer edge.
If the surface of a CD is soiled, take a soft, lint free cloth
or dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent
solution mixed with water, and clean it. Make sure the
wiping process starts from the center to the edge.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known good CD.

Care of Your CD Player
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top
of the recorded CD with a marking pen instead.
The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised,
due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics
with lubricants internal to the CD player mechanism.
Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more than one
CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or an attempt
is made to play scratched or damaged CDs, the
CD player could be damaged. While using the CD
player, use only CDs in good condition without
any label, load one CD at a time, and keep the CD
player and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
liquids, and debris.
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in this
section.

Using Song List Mode
(Radio with Six-Disc CD Player)
This type of radio has a feature called song list.
This feature is capable of saving 20 track selections.
To save tracks into the song list feature, perform
the following steps:
1. Turn the CD player on and load it with at least
one CD. See “LOAD CD” listed previously in this
section for more information.
2. Check to see that the CD changer is not in song
list mode. S-LIST should not display. If S-LIST
displays, press the SONG LIST button to turn it off.
3. Select the desired CD by pressing the numbered
pushbutton and then use the SEEK SCAN right
arrow to locate the track to be saved. The
track begins to play.
4. Press and hold the SONG LIST button to save the
track into memory. When SONG LIST is pressed,
one beep sounds. After two seconds of continuously
pressing the SONG LIST button, two beeps
sound to confirm the track has been saved.
5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for saving other selections.
S-LIST FULL displays if you try to save more than
20 selections.

3-107

To play the song list, press the SONG LIST button.
One beep sounds and S-LIST displays. The recorded
tracks begins to play in the order they were saved.
Seek through the song list by using the SEEK SCAN
arrows. Seeking past the last saved track returns to
the first saved track.
To delete tracks from the song list, perform the
following steps:
1. Turn the CD player on.
2. Press the SONG LIST button to turn song list on.
S-LIST displays.
3. Press the SEEK SCAN arrows to select the desired
track to be deleted.
4. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for
two seconds. When SONG LIST is pressed,
one beep sounds. After two seconds of continuously
pressing the SONG LIST button, two beeps
sound to confirm the track has been deleted.
After a track has been deleted, the remaining tracks are
moved up the list. When another track is added to
the song list, the track is added to the end of the list.

3-108

To delete the entire song list, perform the following steps:
1. Turn the CD player on.
2. Press the SONG LIST button to turn song list on.
S-LIST displays.
3. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for more
than four seconds. One beep sounds, followed by
two beeps after two seconds, and a final beep
sounds after four seconds. S-LIST EMPTY displays
indicating the song list has been deleted.
If a CD is ejected, and the song list contains saved
tracks from that CD, those tracks are automatically
deleted from the song list. Any tracks saved to the
song list again are added to the bottom of the list.
To end song list mode, press the SONG LIST button.
One beep sounds and S-LIST is removed from the
display.

Playing an MP3 CD-R Disc
Your vehicle’s radio system may have the MP3 feature.
If it has this feature, it is capable of playing an MP3
CD-R disc. For more information on how to play an
MP3 CD-R disc, see Using an MP3 on page 3-109
later in this section.

CD Messages

Using an MP3

CHECK CD: If this message appears on the display
and/or the CD comes out, it could be for one of the
following reasons:

MP3 CD-R Disc

• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.

• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour
and try again.

• The format of the CD may not be compatible. See
Using an MP3 on page 3-109 later in this section.

• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.

• The label may be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot
be corrected, contact your dealer/retailer. If the radio
displays an error message, write it down and provide
it to your dealer/retailer when reporting the problem.

MP3 Format
If you burn your own MP3 disc on a personal computer:

• Make sure the MP3 files are recorded on
a CD-R disc.

• Do not mix standard audio and MP3 files on
one disc.

• Make sure playlists have a .m3u or .wpl extension,
other file extensions may not work.

• Files can be recorded with a variety of fixed or
variable bit rates. Song title, artist name, and
album are available for display by the radio when
recorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.

• Create a folder structure that makes it easy to find
songs while driving. Organize songs by albums
using one folder for each album. Each folder
or album should contain 18 songs or less.

• Make sure to finalize the disc when burning an
MP3 disc, using multiple sessions. It is usually
better to burn the disc all at once.

3-109

The player is able to read and play a maximum of
50 folders, 50 playlists, 10 sessions, and 255 files.
Long file names, folder names, or playlist names
may use more disc memory space than necessary.
To conserve space on the disc, minimize the length of
the file, folder or playlist names. You can also play
an MP3 CD that was recorded using no file folders.
The system can support up to 11 folders in depth,
though, keep the depth of the folders to a minimum in
order to keep down the complexity and confusion
in trying to locate a particular folder during playback.
If a CD contains more than the maximum of 50 folders,
50 playlists, 10 sessions, and 255 files the player
lets you access and navigate up to the maximum,
but all items over the maximum are ignored.

Root Directory
The root directory is treated as a folder. If the root
directory has compressed audio files, the directory
is displayed as F1 ROOT. All files contained directly
under the root directory are accessed prior to any root
directory folders. However, playlists (Px) are always
be accessed before root folders or files.

3-110

Empty Directory or Folder
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the
file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and
no compressed files directly beneath them, the player
advances to the next folder in the file structure that
contains compressed audio files. The empty folder
does not display.

No Folder
When the CD contains only compressed files, the
files are located under the root folder. The next and
previous folder functions do not function on a CD
that was recorded without folders or playlists.
When displaying the name of the folder the radio
displays ROOT.
When the CD contains only playlists and compressed
audio files, but no folders, all files are located under the
root folder. The folder down and the folder up buttons
search playlists (Px) first and then go to the root folder.
When the radio displays the name of the folder the
radio displays ROOT.

Order of Play
Tracks are played in the following order:

• Play begins from the first track in the first playlist
and continues sequentially through all tracks in
each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist
has played, play continues from the first track of
the first playlist.

• If the CD does not contain any playlists, then play
begins from the first track under the root directory.
When all tracks from the root directory have
played, play continues from files according to
their numerical listing. After playing the last track
from the last folder, play begins again at the
first track of the first folder or root directory.
When play enters a new folder, the display does not
automatically show the new folder name unless
you have chosen the folder mode as the default display.
See RCL later in this section for more information.
The new track name appears on the display.

File System and Naming
The song name that is displayed is the song name that is
contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is not present
in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays the file name
without the extension (such as .mp3) as the track name.

Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages
are shortened. Parts of words on the last page of
text and the extension of the filename does not display.

Preprogrammed Playlists
Preprogrammed playlists that were created by
WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™ software
can be accessed, however, they cannot be edited
using the radio. These playlists are treated as special
folders containing compressed audio song files.

Playing an MP3
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player pulls it in, and READING displays. The CD
should begin playing and the CD symbol appears on the
display. If you want to insert a CD with the ignition off,
first press the EJECT button or the RCL knob.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player it stays in the player. When the ignition or radio
is turned on, the CD starts to play where it stopped,
if it was the last selected audio source.
As each new track starts to play, the track number
appears on the display.

3-111

\ 1 (Forward):

Press and hold this pushbutton to
advance quickly within a track. Press and hold this
pushbutton for less than two seconds to advance
at 10 times the normal playing speed. Press and hold
it for more than two seconds to advance at 20 times
the normal playing speed. Release this pushbutton
to play the track. FWD and the elapsed time of the
track appears on the display.
RDM 2 (Random): To repeat the tracks in the current
folder or playlist, press and release this pushbutton.
FOLDER RANDOM displays. Once all of the tracks in
the current folder or playlist have been played, the
system moves on to the next folder or playlist and plays
all of the tracks in random order.
To repeat the tracks on the CD, press and hold this
pushbutton for two seconds. A beep sounds and
DISC RANDOM displays. This feature does not work
with playlists.
When in random, pressing and releasing either SEEK
arrow takes you to the next or previous random track.
Press and release this pushbutton again to turn off
random play. NO RANDOM displays.

3-112

3 # (Next Folder): Press this pushbutton to go to
the first track in the next folder or playlist. If the
disc contains playlists, it goes through the playlist,
then the folders. Pressing this button while in folder
random mode takes you to the next folder and random
the tracks in that folder. This function does not work
on a CD that does not contain folders or playlists.
4 REV (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to
reverse quickly within a track. Press and hold this
pushbutton for less than two seconds to reverse at
10 times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it
for more than two seconds to reverse at 20 times
the normal playing speed. Release this pushbutton to
play the track. REV and the elapsed time of the
track appears on the display. If this pushbutton is
pressed for more than 20 seconds, the radio stops
reversing and begins to play.
6 ! (Previous Folder): Press this pushbutton to go to
the first track in the previous folder or playlist. If the disc
contains playlists, it goes through the playlist, then the
folders. Pressing this pushbutton while in folder random
mode takes you to the previous folder and random the
tracks in that folder. This function does not work on a CD
that does not contain folders or playlists.

w SEEK x: Press the up arrow to go to the start of
the next track. Press the down arrow to go to the start of
the previous track. Pressing either arrow for more than
two seconds searches the previous or next tracks at
two tracks per second. When the track number that
you would like to play appears on the display, release
the arrow to stop searching and to play the track.
TUNE: Turn this knob to fast track reverse or advance
through tracks in all folders or playlists. The track
number and file name appears on the display for each
track. Turn this knob while in random to fast track
reverse or advance the tracks in sequential order.
RCL (Recall): Push this knob to switch between track
mode, folder/playlist mode, and time of day mode.
The display shows only 13 characters, but there can
be up to three pages of text. If there are more than
13 characters in the song, folder, or playlist name
pushing this knob within two seconds takes you to the
next page of text. If there are no other pages to be
shown, pushing this knob within two seconds takes
you to the next display mode.
Track mode displays the current track number and
the ID3 tag song name.

Folder/playlist mode displays the current folder or
playlist number and the folder/playlist name.
Time of day mode displays the time of day and the
ID3 tag song name.
To change the default on the display, push this knob
until you see the desired display, then hold this knob
for two seconds. The radio produces one beep and the
selected display is now the default.
INFO (Information): INFO displays whenever a current
track has ID3 tag information. Press this button to
display the artist name and album contained in the tag.
INFO disappears from the display when the information
in the ID3 tag has finished.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing. The inactive CD remains inside the radio
for future listening.
CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD
when listening to the radio. The CD symbol appears on
the display when a CD is loaded.
EJECT: Press this button to eject a CD. Eject may
be activated with either the ignition or radio off.
CDs may be loaded with the radio and ignition off if
this button is pressed first.

3-113

XM Radio Messages
XL (Explicit Language Channels): These channels,
or any others, can be blocked at a customer’s request,
by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Updating: The encryption code in the receiver is
being updated, and no action is required. This process
should take no longer than 30 seconds.
No Signal: The system is functioning correctly, but
the vehicle is in a location that is blocking the XM™
signal. When the vehicle is moved into an open area,
the signal should return.
Loading XM: The audio system is acquiring and
processing audio and text data. No action is needed.
This message should disappear shortly.
CH Off Air: This channel is not currently in service.
Tune to another channel.
CH Unavail: This previously assigned channel is no
longer assigned. Tune to another station. If this station
was one of the presets, choose another station for
that preset button.

3-114

No Info: No artist, song title, category, or text
information is available at this time on this channel.
The system is working properly.
No Info: No text or informational messages are
available at this time on this channel. The system
is working properly.
Not Found: There are no channels available for the
selected category. The system is working properly.
XM Locked: The XM™ receiver in your vehicle may
have previously been in another vehicle. For security
purposes, XM™ receivers cannot be swapped between
vehicles. If this message is received after having
your vehicle serviced, check with your dealer/retailer.
Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, this message alternates
with the XM™ Radio eight digit radio ID label. This
label is needed to activate the service.
Unknown: If this message is received when tuned to
channel 0, there may be a receiver fault. Consult
with your dealer/retailer.
Chk XMRcvr: If this message does not clear within a
short period of time, the receiver may have a fault.
Consult with your dealer/retailer.

Theft-Deterrent Feature

Audio Steering Wheel Controls

®

THEFTLOCK is designed to discourage theft of
your vehicle’s radio. The feature works automatically
by learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). If the radio is moved to a different
vehicle, it does not operate and LOCKED displays.
When the radio and vehicle are turned off, the
blinking red light indicates that THEFTLOCK®
is armed.
With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio does not
operate if stolen.
If your vehicle has this feature, some audio controls
can be adjusted at the steering wheel. They include
the following:

wt u x(Seek/Scan): Press the seek arrows to
go to the previous or the next station and stay there.
To scan stations, press and hold either scan arrow
for two seconds until FREQUENCY SCAN displays.
The radio goes to a station, plays for a few seconds,
then goes to the next station. Press either scan
arrow again to stop scanning.
The sound mutes while seeking or scanning.
The radio seeks or scans stations only with a strong
signal that are in the selected band.

3-115

When a CD is playing, press either scan arrow to go to
the previous or next track, if more than eight seconds
have played. If either scan arrow is held or pressed
more than once, the player continues moving backward
or forward through the CD.
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped).
1–6 (Preset Pushbuttons): Press this button to play
stations that are programmed on the radio preset
pushbuttons. The radio seeks preset stations only
with a strong signal that are in the selected band.

$ (Mute//OnStar®):

Press this button to silence the
system. Press this button again, to turn the sound on.
If your vehicle is equipped with OnStar®, press and
hold this button to interact with the OnStar® system.
See the OnStar® System on page 2-40 in this manual for
more information.

r (Play): When listening to the radio, press this
button to play a CD.
wux (Volume): Press the volume arrows to
increase or decrease the volume.

3-116

Radio Reception
Frequency interference and static during normal
radio reception can occur if items such as cellphone
chargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and external
electronic devices are plugged into the accessory
power outlet. If there is interference or static, unplug
the item from the accessory power outlet.

AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range can cause station
frequencies to interfere with each other. For better radio
reception, most AM radio stations boost the power levels
during the day, and then reduce these levels during the
night. Static can also occur when things like storms and
power lines interfere with radio reception. When this
happens, try reducing the treble on your radio.

FM Stereo
FM stereo gives the best sound, but FM signals reach
only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall buildings or
hills can interfere with FM signals, causing the sound
to fade in and out.

XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio
reception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous
United States, and in Canada. Just as with FM,
tall buildings or hills can interfere with satellite radio
signals, causing the sound to fade in and out. In
addition, traveling or standing under heavy foliage,
bridges, garages, or tunnels may cause loss of the
XM™ signal for a period of time. The radio may
display NO SIGNAL to indicate interference.

Backglass Antenna
The AM-FM antenna is integrated with the rear window
defogger, located in the rear window. Make sure that the
inside surface of the rear window is not scratched and
that the lines on the glass are not damaged. If the inside
surface is damaged, it could interfere with radio
reception. Also, for proper radio reception, the antenna
connector at the top-center of the rear window needs to
be properly attached to the post on the glass.

Notice: Do not apply aftermarket glass tinting
with metallic film. The metallic film in some tinting
materials will interfere with or distort the incoming
radio reception. Any damage caused to your
backglass antenna due to metallic tinting materials
will not be covered by your warranty.
Because this antenna is built into the rear window,
there is a reduced risk of damage caused by car washes
and vandals.
If static is heard on the radio, when the rear window
defogger is turned on, it could mean that a defogger
grid line has been damaged and the grid line must
be repaired.
If adding a cellular telephone to your vehicle, and the
antenna needs to be attached to the glass, make
sure that you do not damage the grid lines for the
AM-FM antenna. There is enough space between the
lines to attach a cellular telephone antenna without
interfering with radio reception.

Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object to clear
the inside rear window may damage the rear window
antenna and/or the rear window defogger. Repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Do not clear
the inside rear window with sharp objects.

3-117

XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System
The XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located on the
roof of the vehicle. Keep this antenna clear of snow
and ice build up for clear radio reception.
If the vehicle has a sunroof, the performance of the
XM™ system may be affected if the sunroof is open.
Loading items onto the roof of the vehicle can
interfere with the performance of the XM™ system.
Make sure the XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is
not obstructed.

3-118

Chime Level Adjustment
The radio is used to adjust the vehicle’s chime level.
To change the volume level of the chime, press and hold
pushbutton 6 with the ignition on and the radio power
off. The volume level will change from the normal
level to loud, and LOUD will appear on the radio display.
To change back to the default or normal setting,
press and hold pushbutton 6 again. The volume level
will change from the loud level to normal, and NORMAL
will appear on the radio display. Each time the chime
volume is changed, three chimes will sound to indicate
the new volume selected. Removing the radio and
not replacing it with a factory radio or chime module will
disable vehicle chimes.

Section 4

Driving Your Vehicle

Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ..........4-2
Defensive Driving ...........................................4-2
Drunk Driving .................................................4-2
Control of a Vehicle ........................................4-3
Braking .........................................................4-3
Antilock Brake System (ABS) ...........................4-4
Braking in Emergencies ...................................4-5
Traction Control System (TCS) .........................4-6
Enhanced Traction System (ETS) .....................4-7
StabiliTrak® Plus System .................................4-8
Steering ......................................................4-10
Off-Road Recovery .......................................4-12
Passing .......................................................4-12
Loss of Control .............................................4-12

Driving at Night ............................................4-14
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ..................4-14
Before Leaving on a Long Trip .......................4-15
Highway Hypnosis ........................................4-16
Hill and Mountain Roads ................................4-16
Winter Driving ..............................................4-17
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice,
or Snow ...................................................4-21
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out .................4-22
Loading Your Vehicle ....................................4-22
Towing ..........................................................4-27
Towing Your Vehicle .....................................4-27
Recreational Vehicle Towing ...........................4-27
Towing a Trailer ...........................................4-29

4-1

Your Driving, the Road,
and Your Vehicle

Drunk Driving

{CAUTION:
Defensive Driving
Defensive driving means “always expect the
unexpected.” The first step in driving defensively
is to wear your safety belt — See Safety Belts: They
Are for Everyone on page 1-10.

{CAUTION:
Assume that other road users (pedestrians,
bicyclists, and other drivers) are going to be
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what
they might do and be ready. In addition:
• Allow enough following distance between
you and the driver in front of you.
• Focus on the task of driving.
Driver distraction can cause collisions
resulting in injury or possible death. These
simple defensive driving techniques could
save your life.

4-2

Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and
judgment can be affected by even a small
amount of alcohol. You can have a serious — or
even fatal — collision if you drive after drinking.
Do not drink and drive or ride with a driver who
has been drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if you
are with a group, designate a driver who will
not drink.
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving
is a global tragedy.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a
vehicle: judgment, muscular coordination, vision, and
attentiveness.
Police records show that almost 40 percent of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than
17,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have
been associated with the use of alcohol, with about
250,000 people injured.

For persons under 21, it is against the law in every
U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good medical,
psychological, and developmental reasons for
these laws.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol
and then drive.
Medical research shows that alcohol in a person’s
system can make crash injuries worse, especially
injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or heart. This means
that when anyone who has been drinking — driver
or passenger — is in a crash, that person’s chance
of being killed or permanently disabled is higher than
if the person had not been drinking.

Control of a Vehicle
The following three systems help to control your vehicle
while driving — brakes, steering, and accelerator. At
times, as when driving on snow or ice, it is easy to ask
more of those control systems than the tires and road can
provide. Meaning, you can lose control of your vehicle.
See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-6 and
Enhanced Traction System (ETS) on page 4-7.

Braking
See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-45.
Braking action involves perception time and reaction
time. First, you have to decide to push on the brake
pedal. That is perception time. Then you have to bring
up your foot and do it. That is reaction time.
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a
second. But that is only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or
more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,
coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,
drugs, and frustration. But even in three-fourths of a
second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels
66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an
emergency, so keeping enough space between
your vehicle and others is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement or
gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is wet, dry, or
icy; tire tread; the condition of the brakes; the weight of
the vehicle; and the amount of brake force applied.

Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 5-3.

4-3

Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This
is a mistake. The brakes might not have time to cool
between hard stops. The brakes will wear out much
faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace
with the traffic and allow realistic following distances,
you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking. That
means better braking and longer brake life.
If your vehicle’s engine ever stops while you are
driving, brake normally but do not pump the brakes.
If you do, the pedal could get harder to push down.
If the engine stops, you will still have some power
brake assist. But you will use it when you brake.
Once the power assist is used up, it can take longer
to stop and the brake pedal will be harder to push.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can
affect your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories
and Modifications on page 5-3.

Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Your vehicle might have the Antilock Brake
System (ABS), an advanced electronic braking
system that will help prevent a braking skid.
If your vehicle has ABS,
this warning light on
the instrument panel will
come on briefly when
you start your vehicle.

When you start the engine, or when you begin to
drive away, ABS will check itself. You might hear a
momentary motor or clicking noise while this test
is going on, and you might even notice that the brake
pedal moves or pulses a little. This is normal.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you.
You slam on the brakes and continue braking.
Here is what happens with ABS:
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down.
If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each wheel.

4-4

ABS can change the brake pressure faster than any
driver could. The computer is programmed to make the
most of available tire and road conditions. This can
help you steer around the obstacle while braking hard.

Braking in Emergencies

As you brake, the computer keeps receiving updates
on wheel speed and controls braking pressure
accordingly.

If you have ABS, you can steer and brake at the same
time. However, if you do not have ABS, your first
reaction — to hit the brake pedal hard and hold it
down — might be the wrong thing to do. Your wheels
can stop rolling. Once they do, the vehicle cannot
respond to your steering. Momentum will carry it in
whatever direction it was headed when the wheels
stopped rolling. That could be off the road, into the
very thing you were trying to avoid, or into traffic.

Remember: ABS does not change the time you need to
get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in
front of you, you will not have time to apply the brakes if
that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave
enough room up ahead to stop, even though you
have ABS.

Using ABS
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let antilock work for you. You might
feel a slight brake pedal pulsation or notice some noise,
but this is normal.

At some time, nearly every driver gets into a situation
that requires hard braking.

If you do not have ABS, use a “squeeze” braking
technique. This will give you maximum braking while
maintaining steering control. You can do this by pushing
on the brake pedal with steadily increasing pressure.
In an emergency, you will probably want to squeeze the
brakes hard without locking the wheels. If you hear or
feel the wheels sliding, ease off the brake pedal. This will
help you retain steering control. If you do have ABS, it is
different. See Antilock Brake System (ABS) on page 4-4.
In many emergencies, steering can help you more
than even the very best braking.

4-5

Traction Control System (TCS)
If the vehicle has a 5.3L V8 engine, it has a Traction
Control System (TCS) that limits wheel spin. This
is especially useful in slippery road conditions. The
system operates only if it senses that one or both of the
front wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction.
When this happens, the system works the front
brakes and reduces engine power to limit wheel spin.
This symbol, along with the
TRACTION CONTROL
ACTIVE message, comes
on the DIC screen when
the system is active.

You may feel or hear the system working, but this
is normal.
This symbol, along with
the message TRACTION
CONTROL OFF will
display in the DIC for
three seconds when
the traction control
system is disabled.

4-6

If there is a problem with the system, the service
traction system will also appear on the DIC. When
these symbols and messages appear on the instrument
panel and the DIC, the system will not limit wheel
spin. Adjust driving accordingly.
The traction control system automatically comes
on whenever the vehicle is started. To limit wheel
spin, especially in slippery road conditions, always
leave the system on. But the traction control system
can be turned off if needed. The system should
be turned off if the vehicle ever gets stuck in sand,
mud, or snow and rocking the vehicle is required.
See Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 4-22
and If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or
Snow on page 4-21 for more information.
Press the traction
control button located
on the console to turn
the system off.

If the system is limiting wheel spin when the traction
control button is pressed, the system will turn off
instantly. Turn the system back on at any time by
pressing the button again.

If the vehicle is in cruise control when the traction
control system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise
control will automatically disengage. When road
conditions allow safe use of it, the cruise control can
be used again. See Cruise Control on page 3-12.

This symbol comes on
the Driver Information
Center (DIC) when
the ETS is limiting
wheel spin.

Adding non-GM accessories can affect your vehicle’s
performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3 for more information.

Enhanced Traction System (ETS)
If the vehicle has the 3.8L V6 engine and Antilock
brakes, it has an Enhanced Traction System (ETS)
that limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in
slippery road conditions. The system operates only
if it senses that one or both of the front wheels
are spinning or beginning to lose traction. When this
happens, the system reduces engine power and
may also upshift the transmission to limit wheel spin.

If the vehicle is in cruise control when ETS begins to
limit wheel spin, the cruise control will automatically
disengage. When road conditions allow safe use of it,
the cruise control can be used again. See Cruise Control
on page 3-12.
ETS operates in all transmission shift lever positions.
But the system can upshift the transmission only as
high as the chosen shift lever position, so use the
lower gears only when necessary. See Automatic
Transmission Operation on page 2-28.

4-7

This symbol, along with
the message TRACTION
CONTROL OFF will
display on the DIC for
three seconds when the
ETS is not on.

If there is a problem with the system, the service
traction system will also come on in the DIC. See
Enhanced Traction System Warning Light on page 3-48.
When this warning light is on, the system will not limit
wheel spin. Adjust driving accordingly.
To limit wheel spin, especially in slippery road
conditions, the ETS should always be left on. But
the system can be turned off. The system should be
turned off if the vehicle ever gets stuck in sand, mud,
or snow and rocking the vehicle is required. See
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 4-22 and
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow
on page 4-21 for more information.

4-8

Press the traction control
button located on the
console to turn the
system off.

If the system is limiting wheel spin when the button is
pressed, the system will turn off instantly. Press the
traction control button again to turn the system on.

StabiliTrak® Plus System
The vehicle may have a vehicle stability enhancement
system called Stabilitrak® Plus. It is an advanced
computer controlled system that assists with directional
control of the vehicle in difficult driving conditions.
Stabilitrak® Plus comes on whenever the vehicle is
started. It activates when the computer senses a
discrepancy between the intended path and the
direction the vehicle is actually traveling. Stabilitrak®
Plus selectively applies braking pressure at any one
of the vehicle’s brakes to help control the vehicle in
the steering direction.

This symbol, along with
the STABILITY CONTROL
ACTIVE message comes
on the Driver Information
Center (DIC).

See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-67.
You may also hear a noise or feel vibration in the
brake pedal. This is normal. Continue to steer the
vehicle in the desired direction.
This symbol will appear
on the DIC.

See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-67.
When this message is displayed, the system is not
operational. Driving should be adjusted accordingly.
To turn the Stabilitrak® system off (GXP only), press
and hold the traction control button for more than
five seconds. A message will appear on the DIC
indicating that Stabilitrak® has been turned off.
You can turn the system back on at any time by
pressing the button again.
If the vehicle is in cruise control when Stabilitrak® Plus
activates, the cruise control will automatically disengage.
When road conditions allow safe use of it, the cruise
control can be used again. See Cruise Control on
page 3-12 for more information.

If there is a problem detected with Stabilitrak® Plus,
this symbol along with the SERVICE STABILITY
SYSTEM warning message will come on the DIC.

4-9

Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer
but it will take much more effort.

Variable Effort Steering
If your vehicle has this steering system, the system
provides less steering effort for parking and when driving
at speeds below 20 mph (32 km/h). Steering effort will
increase at higher speeds for improved road feel.

Steering Tips
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned
on the news happen on curves. Here is why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject
to the same laws of physics when driving on curves.
The traction of the tires against the road surface
makes it possible for the vehicle to change its path
when you turn the front wheels. If there is no traction,
inertia will keep the vehicle going in the same direction.
If you have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice,
you will understand this.

4-10

The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of the tires and the road surface, the angle at
which the curve is banked, and your speed. While you
are in a curve, speed is the one factor you can control.
Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly apply the brakes. Both control
systems — steering and braking — have to do their
work where the tires meet the road. Unless you have
antilock brakes, adding the hard braking can demand
too much of those places. You can lose control.
The same thing can happen if you are steering through
a sharp curve and you suddenly accelerate. Those
two control systems — steering and acceleration — can
overwhelm those places where the tires meet the
road and make you lose control. See Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 4-6 or Enhanced Traction
System (ETS) on page 4-7.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on
the brake or accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way
you want it to go, and slow down.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds
are based on good weather and road conditions. Under
less favorable conditions you will want to go slower.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach
a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while the
front wheels are straight ahead.

Try to adjust your speed so you can drive through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait
to accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 5-3.

Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective than
braking. For example, you come over a hill and find a
truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls out
from nowhere, or a child darts out from between parked
cars and stops right in front of you. You can avoid these
problems by braking — if you can stop in time. But
sometimes you cannot; there is not room. That is the time
for evasive action — steering around the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply the brakes. See Braking on page 4-3.
It is better to remove as much speed as you can from a
possible collision. Then steer around the problem, to the
left or right depending on the space available.

An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel
at the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you can
turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing
either hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and
just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have
avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.

4-11

Off-Road Recovery

Passing

You may find that your vehicle’s right wheels have
dropped off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while
you are driving.

Passing another vehicle on a two-lane road can be
dangerous. To reduce the risk of danger while passing,
we suggest the following tips:

• Look down the road, to the sides, and to crossroads
for situations that might affect a successful pass.
If in doubt, wait.

• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, and
lines that could indicate a turn or an intersection.
Never cross a solid or double-solid line on your
side of the lane.

• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass. Doing so can reduce your visibility.

• Wait your turn to pass a slow vehicle.
• When you are being passed, ease to the right.

Loss of Control
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer
so that your vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement.
You can turn the steering wheel up to one-quarter turn
until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge. Then
turn the steering wheel to go straight down the roadway.

4-12

Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough friction
where the tires meet the road to do what the driver
has asked.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steer
and constantly seek an escape route or area of less
danger.

Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, the wheels are
not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much
speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose
cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much
throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
If you do not have the Enhanced Traction System (ETS)
or the Traction Control System (TCS), or if the system
is off, then an acceleration skid is also best handled
by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal. See
Enhanced Traction System (ETS) on page 4-7 or
Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-6.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.

Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety,
you will want to slow down and adjust your driving to
these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, or
braking, including reducing vehicle speed by shifting to a
lower gear. Any sudden changes could cause the tires to
slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery until
your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow on
the road to make a mirrored surface — and slow down
when you have any doubt.
If you have the Antilock Brake System (ABS),
remember: It helps avoid only the braking skid. If you
do not have ABS, then in a braking skid, where the
wheels are no longer rolling, release enough pressure
on the brakes to get the wheels rolling again. This
restores steering control. Push the brake pedal down
steadily when you have to stop suddenly. As long as
the wheels are rolling, you will have steering control.

4-13

Driving at Night

Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads

Night driving is more dangerous than day driving because
some drivers are likely to be impaired — by alcohol or
drugs, with night vision problems, or by fatigue.

Rain and wet roads can reduce vehicle traction
and affect your ability to stop and accelerate. Always
drive slower in these types of driving conditions
and avoid driving through large puddles and
deep-standing or flowing water.

Night driving tips include:

• Drive defensively.
• Do not drink and drive.
• Reduce headlamp glare by adjusting the inside
rearview mirror.

• Slow down and keep more space between you and
other vehicles because your headlamps can only
light up so much road ahead.
Watch for animals.
When tired, pull off the road.

•
•
• Do not wear sunglasses.
• Avoid staring directly into approaching headlamps.
• Keep the windshield and all glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out.

• Keep your eyes moving, especially during turns or
curves.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But, as
we get older, these differences increase. A 50-year-old
driver might need at least twice as much light to see the
same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
4-14

{CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause crashes. They might not
work as well in a quick stop and could cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of
the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of water
or a car/vehicle wash, lightly apply the brake
pedal until the brakes work normally.
Flowing or rushing water creates strong
forces. Driving through flowing water could
cause your vehicle to be carried away. If this
happens, you and other vehicle occupants
could drown. Do not ignore police warnings
and be very cautious about trying to drive
through flowing water.

Hydroplaning

Before Leaving on a Long Trip

Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water can build up
under your vehicle’s tires so they actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road is wet enough
and you are going fast enough. When your vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.

To prepare your vehicle for a long trip, consider having
it serviced by your dealer/retailer before departing.

There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when the road is wet.

Other Rainy Weather Tips
Besides slowing down, other wet weather driving
tips include:

•
•
•
•
•

Allow extra following distance.
Pass with caution.
Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape.

Things to check on your own include:

• Windshield Washer Fluid: Reservoir full?
Windows clean — inside and outside?

•
•
•
•

Wiper Blades: In good shape?
Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: All levels checked?
Lamps: Do they all work and are lenses clean?
Tires: Are treads good? Are tires inflated to
recommended pressure?

• Weather and Maps: Safe to travel?
Have up-to-date maps?

Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled.
Have good tires with proper tread depth.
See Tires on page 5-62.

4-15

Highway Hypnosis

Hill and Mountain Roads

Always be alert and pay attention to your surroundings
while driving. If you become tired or sleepy, find a
safe place to park your vehicle and rest.

Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different
than driving on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for driving
in these conditions include:

Other driving tips include:

• Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
• Keep interior temperature cool.
• Keep your eyes moving — scan the road
ahead and to the sides.

• Keep your vehicle serviced and in good shape.
• Check all fluid levels and brakes, tires, cooling
system, and transmission.

• Going down steep or long hills, shift to a
lower gear.

• Check the rearview mirror and vehicle
instruments often.

{CAUTION:
If you do not shift down, the brakes could get
so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down
to let the engine assist the brakes on a steep
downhill slope.

4-16

Winter Driving

{CAUTION:
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. The brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down and they
could get so hot that they would not work well.
You would then have poor braking or even
none going down a hill. You could crash.
Always have the engine running and your
vehicle in gear when you go downhill.

• Stay in your own lane. Do not swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds
that let you stay in your own lane.

Here are some tips for winter driving:

• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
• You might want to put winter emergency
supplies in your trunk.
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom,
a supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some
winter outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight,
a red cloth, and a couple of reflective warning triangles.
And, if you will be driving under severe conditions,
include a small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet,
or a couple of burlap bags to help provide traction.
Be sure you properly secure these items in your vehicle.
Also see Tires on page 5-62.

• Top of hills: Be alert — something could be in your
lane (stalled car, accident).

• Pay attention to special road signs (falling rocks
area, winding roads, long grades, passing or
no-passing zones) and take appropriate action.

4-17

Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where the tires meet the
road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between the tires and the
road, you can have a very slippery situation. You have a
lot less traction, or grip, and need to be very careful.

But wet ice can be even more trouble because it can
offer the least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it
is about freezing, 32°F (0°C), and freezing rain begins
to fall. Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand
crews can get there.
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowing,
or loose snow — drive with caution.
If your vehicle has the Traction Control System (TCS)
or the Enhanced Traction System (ETS), it will improve
your ability to accelerate when driving on a slippery
road. Even though your vehicle has a traction system,
slow down and adjust your driving to the road conditions.
Under certain conditions, you might want to turn
the TCS or ETS off, such as when driving through
deep snow and loose gravel, to help maintain vehicle
motion at lower speeds. See Traction Control System
(TCS) on page 4-6 or Enhanced Traction System (ETS)
on page 4-7.
If your vehicle does not have TCS or ETS, accelerate
gently. Try not to break the fragile traction. If you
accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin and
polish the surface under the tires even more.

What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold snow
or ice can be slick and hard to drive on.

4-18

Unless your vehicle has the Antilock Brake System
(ABS), you will want to brake very gently, too. If you
do have ABS, see Antilock Brake System (ABS)
on page 4-4. ABS improves your vehicle’s stability
when you make a hard stop on a slippery road. Whether
your vehicle has ABS or not, begin stopping sooner
than you would on dry pavement. Without ABS, if you
feel your vehicle begin to slide, let up on the brakes
a little. Push the brake pedal down steadily to get the
most traction you can.
Remember, unless your vehicle has ABS, if you
brake so hard that the wheels stop rolling, you will
just slide. Brake so the wheels always keep rolling
and you can still steer.

• Whatever your vehicle’s braking system, allow
greater following distance on any slippery road.

If You Are Caught in a Blizzard
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with your
vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near
help and you can hike through the snow. Here are
some things to do to summon help and keep yourself
and your passengers safe:

• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you have been stopped by the snow.

• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you do not have blankets or extra clothing, make
body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags,
floor mats — anything you can wrap around yourself
or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.

• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
until you hit a spot that is covered with ice. On an
otherwise clear road, ice patches can appear in
shaded areas where the sun cannot reach, such as
around clumps of trees, behind buildings, or under
bridges. Sometimes the surface of a curve or an
overpass can remain icy when the surrounding roads
are clear. If you see a patch of ice ahead of you,
brake before you are on it. Try not to brake while
you are actually on the ice, and avoid sudden
steering maneuvers.

4-19

{CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon
monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could
overcome you and kill you. You cannot see
it or smell it, so you might not know it is in
your vehicle. Clear away snow from around
the base of your vehicle, especially any that is
blocking the exhaust pipe. And check around
again from time to time to be sure snow does
not collect there.

You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.

Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that is away from the wind. This will
help keep CO out.
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little
faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator
slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get
and it keeps the battery charged. You will need a
well-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possibly
for signaling later on with the headlamps. Let the
heater run for a while.

4-20

Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost all
the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine again and
repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable from
the cold. But do it as little as possible. Preserve the fuel
as long as you can. To help keep warm, you can get out
of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises
every half hour or so until help comes.

If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow
Slowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free your
vehicle when stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. See
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 4-22.
If your vehicle has a traction system, it can often help
to free a stuck vehicle. Refer to your vehicle’s traction
system in the Index. If the stuck condition is too
severe for the traction system to free the vehicle, turn
the traction system off and use the rocking method.

{CAUTION:
If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at high speed,
they can explode, and you or others could be
injured. The vehicle can overheat, causing an
engine compartment fire or other damage.
Spin the wheels as little as possible and avoid
going above 35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on the
speedometer.
For information about using tire chains on your vehicle,
see Tire Chains on page 5-84.

4-21

Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out

Loading Your Vehicle

First, turn the steering wheel left and right to clear
the area around the front wheels. Turn off any traction
or stability system. See Traction Control System
(TCS) on page 4-6, Enhanced Traction System (ETS)
on page 4-7, and StabiliTrak® Plus System on page 4-8.
Then shift back and forth between REVERSE (R) and
a forward gear, spinning the wheels as little as possible.
To prevent transmission wear, wait until the wheels
stop spinning before shifting gears. Release the
accelerator pedal while you shift, and press lightly on
the accelerator pedal when the transmission is in gear.
By slowly spinning the wheels in the forward and
reverse directions, you will cause a rocking motion
that could free your vehicle. If that does not get
your vehicle out after a few tries, it might need to be
towed out. If your vehicle does need to be towed
out, see Towing Your Vehicle on page 4-27.

It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. Two labels on your vehicle show
how much weight it may properly carry, the Tire
and Loading Information label and the Vehicle
Certification label.

4-22

{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, and it
can change the way your vehicle handles.
These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten
the life of your vehicle.

Tire and Loading Information Label

The Tire and Loading Information label also lists
the tire size of the original equipment tires (C) and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).
For more information on tires and inflation, see
Tires on page 5-62 and Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-69.
There is also important loading information on
the Certification label. It tells you the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear
axle, see “Certification Label” later in this section.

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of
Label Example

A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar
(B-pillar). With the driver’s door open, you will find
the label attached below the door lock post (striker).
The Tire and Loading Information label lists the
number of occupant seating positions (A), and
the maximum vehicle capacity weight (B) in
kilograms and pounds. The vehicle capacity weight
includes the weight of all occupants, cargo, and
all nonfactory-installed options.

occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding
in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

4-23

4. The resulting figure equals the available

amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity
is 650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how
this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity for your vehicle.
If your vehicle can tow a trailer, see Towing a
Trailer on page 4-29 for important information
on towing a trailer, towing safety rules, and
trailering tips.

4-24

Example 1

Item
A
B
C

Description
Maximum Vehicle
Capacity Weight for
Example 1 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 2 =
Available Occupant
and Cargo Weight =

Total
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
300 lbs (136 kg)
700 lbs (317 kg)

Example 2

Item
A
B
C

Description
Maximum Vehicle
Capacity Weight for
Example 2 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =

Example 3

Total

Item

1,000 lbs
(453 kg)

A

750 lbs (340 kg)

B

250 lbs (113 kg)

C

Description
Maximum Vehicle
Capacity Weight for
Example 3 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 200 lbs
(91 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =

Total
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
0 lbs (0 kg)

Refer to your vehicle’s Tire and Loading Information
label for specific information about your vehicle’s
maximum vehicle capacity weight and seating
positions. The combined weight of the driver,
passengers, and cargo should never exceed your
vehicle’s maximum vehicle capacity weight.
4-25

Certification Label

If the vehicle is going to carry a heavy load,
spread it out. See “Steps for Determining Correct
Load Limit” earlier in this section.

{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, and it
can change the way your vehicle handles.
These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten
the life of your vehicle.
A vehicle specific Certification label is found on
the rear edge of the driver’s door.
The label shows the gross weight capacity of your
vehicle, called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of the
vehicle, all occupants, fuel, and cargo.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle or the
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for either
the front or rear axle.

4-26

Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
If things like suitcases, tools, packages, or anything
else are put inside the vehicle, they will go as fast
as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn
quickly, or if there is a crash, they will keep going.

Towing

{CAUTION:
Towing Your Vehicle
Things you put inside your vehicle can
strike and injure people in a sudden stop
or turn, or in a crash.
• Put things in the trunk of your vehicle.
In a trunk, put them as far forward
as you can. Try to spread the weight
evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like
suitcases, inside the vehicle so that
some of them are above the tops
of the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured child
restraint in your vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
• Do not leave a seat folded down
unless you need to.

Consult your dealer/retailer or a professional towing
service if you need to have your disabled vehicle towed.
See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-6.
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle
for recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.

Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle
behind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as dinghy towing, towing your vehicle
with all four wheels on the ground, and dolly towing,
towing your vehicle with two wheels on the ground and
two wheels up on a device known as a dolly.
With the proper preparation and equipment, many
vehicles can be towed in these ways. See “Dinghy
Towing” and “Dolly Towing,” following.

4-27

Here are some important things to consider before you
do recreational vehicle towing:
• What is the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?
Be sure to read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s
recommendations.
• How far will the vehicle be towed? Some vehicles
have restrictions on how far and how long they
can tow.
• Do you have the proper towing equipment? See
your dealer/retailer or trailering professional for
additional advice and equipment recommendations.
• Is the vehicle ready to be towed? Just as you would
prepare your vehicle for a long trip, you will want to
make sure the vehicle is prepared to be towed.
See Before Leaving on a Long Trip on page 4-15.

Dolly Towing

Dinghy Towing

The vehicle can be towed using a dolly. To tow your
vehicle using a dolly, follow these steps:

Notice: If you tow your vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground, the drivetrain components could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Do not tow your vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground.
The vehicle was not designed to be towed with all
four wheels on the ground. If the vehicle must be
towed, use a dolly. See “Dolly Towing” following for
more information.

4-28

1. Put the front wheels on the dolly.
2. Put the vehicle in PARK (P).
3. Set the parking brake and then remove the key.
4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead
position.
5. Release the parking brake.

Towing a Trailer

{CAUTION:
If you do not use the correct equipment and
drive properly, you can lose control when you
pull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is too
heavy, the brakes may not work well — or
even at all. You and your passengers could
be seriously injured. You may also damage
your vehicle; the resulting repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Pull a trailer
only if you have followed all the steps in this
section. Ask your dealer/retailer for advice
and information about towing a trailer with
your vehicle.

The vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with the
proper trailer towing equipment. To identify the trailering
capacity of the vehicle, read the information in “Weight of
the Trailer” that appears later in this section. Trailering is
different than just driving the vehicle by itself. Trailering
means changes in handling, durability, and fuel economy.
Successful, safe trailering takes correct equipment, and it
has to be used properly.
That is the reason for this part. In it are many
time-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules.
Many of these are important for your safety and that of
your passengers. So please read this section carefully
before pulling a trailer.
Load-pulling components such as the engine,
transmission, wheel assemblies, and tires are forced
to work harder against the drag of the added weight.
The engine is required to operate at relatively higher
speeds and under greater loads, generating extra heat.
The trailer also adds considerably to wind resistance,
increasing the pulling requirements.

4-29

If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer

Weight of the Trailer

Here are some important points:
• There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal, not only where you live
but also where you will be driving. A good source
for this information can be state or provincial police.
• Consider using a sway control. Ask a hitch
dealer/retailer about sway controls.
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 1,000 miles
(1 600 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine,
axle, or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that the
vehicle tows a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph
(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle.
This helps the engine and other parts of the vehicle
wear in at the heavier loads.
• Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer.
Do not drive faster than the maximum posted
speed for trailers, or no more than 55 mph
(90 km/h), to save wear on the vehicle’s parts.

How heavy can a trailer safely be?

Three important considerations have to do with weight:
• The weight of the trailer

• The weight of the trailer tongue
• The total weight on your vehicle’s tires
4-30

It should never weigh more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg).
But even that can be too heavy.
It depends on how you plan to use your rig.
For example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside
temperature, and how much the vehicle is used to
pull a trailer are all important. It can also depend
on any special equipment that is on the vehicle,
and the amount of tongue weight the vehicle can
carry. See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue” later in
this section for more information.
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming
only the driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all
the required trailering equipment. The weight of
additional optional equipment, passengers and cargo
in the tow vehicle must be subtracted from the
maximum trailer weight.
Ask your dealer/retailer for our trailering information
or advice, or write us at our Customer Assistance
Offices. See Customer Assistance Offices on page 7-5
for more information.

Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
to measure because it affects the total or gross weight
of the vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)
includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo
in it, and the people who will be riding in the vehicle.
If there are a lot of options, equipment, passengers
and cargo in the vehicle, it will reduce the tongue
weight the vehicle can carry, which will also reduce
the trailer weight the vehicle can tow. And if towing
a trailer, the tongue load must be added to the GVW
because the vehicle will be carrying that weight, too.
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-22 for more
information about your vehicle’s maximum load
capacity.

When using a weight-carrying hitch or a
weight-distributing hitch, the trailer tongue (A)
should weigh 10 to 15 percent of the total loaded
trailer weight (B).
After the trailer is loaded, weigh the trailer and then
the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are
proper. The correct weight could be achieved simply
by moving some items around in the trailer.

4-31

Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure the vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper
limit for cold tires. These numbers can be found on
the Tire and Loading Information label, that is located
on the driver’s side center B-pillar. See Loading
Your Vehicle on page 4-22. Be sure not to go over
the GVW limit for the vehicle, or the GAWR, including
the weight of the trailer tongue. If a weight distribution
hitch is used, make sure not to go over the rear axle limit
before applying the weight distribution spring bars.

Hitches
It is important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by, and rough roads
are a few reasons why the correct hitch is needed.
Here are some rules to follow:

• The rear bumper on the vehicle is not intended
for hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or
other bumper-type hitches to it. Use only a
frame-mounted hitch that does not attach
to the bumper.

4-32

• If any holes need to be made in the body of the
vehicle to install a trailer hitch, then be sure to
seal the holes later when the hitch is removed.
If the holes are not sealed, deadly carbon monoxide
(CO) from the exhaust can get into the vehicle.
See Engine Exhaust on page 2-36. Dirt and
water can, too.

Safety Chains
Always attach chains between the vehicle and the
trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the
trailer so that the tongue will not drop to the road if
it becomes separated from the hitch. Instructions about
safety chains may be provided by the hitch manufacturer
or by the trailer manufacturer. Follow the manufacturer’s
recommendation for attaching safety chains and do
not attach them to the bumper. Always leave just
enough slack so the rig can be turned around. And,
never allow safety chains to drag on the ground.

Trailer Brakes

Driving with a Trailer

Does your trailer have its own brakes? Be sure to read
and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so
you’ll be able to install, adjust and maintain them
properly.

Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting out for the open road, get to know the rig.
Acquaint yourself with the feel of handling and braking
with the added weight of the trailer. And always keep in
mind that the vehicle is now a good deal longer and not
nearly as responsive as the vehicle is by itself.

• If your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, do not try to
tap into your vehicle’s brake system. If you do,
both brake systems won’t work well, or at all.

• Even if your vehicle doesn’t have anti-lock brakes,
don’t tap into your vehicle’s brake system if the
trailer’s brake system will use more than
0.02 cubic inch (0.3 cc) of fluid from your vehicle’s
master cylinder. If it does, both braking systems
won’t work well. You could even lose your brakes.

• Will the trailer brake parts take 3,000 psi
(20 650 kPa) of pressure? If not, the trailer brake
system must not be used with your vehicle.

Before starting, check the trailer hitch and platform
(and attachments), safety chains, electrical connector,
lamps, tires, and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has
electric brakes, start the vehicle and trailer moving
and then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to
be sure the brakes are working. This lets you check
the electrical connection at the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that
the load is secure, and that the lamps and any
trailer brakes are still working.

• If everything checks out this far, then make the
brake fluid tap at the upper rear master cylinder
port. But don’t use copper tubing for this. If you do,
it will bend and break off. Use steel brake tubing.

4-33

Following Distance

Making Turns

Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
when driving the vehicle without a trailer. This can
prevent situations that require heavy braking and
sudden turns.

Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.

Passing

When turning with a trailer, make wider turns than
normal. Do this so the trailer will not strike soft
shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees, or other objects.
Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in
advance.

More passing distance is needed up ahead when
towing a trailer. And, because the vehicle and trailer are
a good deal longer, distances between any vehicles
that are passed must be greater, before returning to
the proper lane.

Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move
that hand to the right. Always back up slowly and,
if possible, have someone guide you.

Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
When towing a trailer, the vehicle may need a different
turn signal flasher and/or extra wiring. Check with
your dealer/retailer. The arrows on the instrument panel
will flash whenever signaling a turn or lane change.
Properly hooked up, the trailer lamps will also flash,
telling other drivers the vehicle and trailer are about to
turn, change lanes, or stop.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on the instrument
panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer
are burned out. You may think drivers behind you
are seeing the turn signal when they are not. It is
important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer
bulbs are still working.

4-34

The vehicle has bulb warning lights. When a trailer
lighting system is plugged into the vehicle’s lighting
system, its bulb warning lights may not indicate if one of
the lamps goes out. So, when a trailer lighting system
is plugged in, be sure to check the vehicle and
trailer lamps from time to time to be sure they are all
working. Once the trailer lamps have been disconnected,
the bulb warning lights can once again indicate if one
of the vehicle lamps is out.

Driving On Grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before starting
down a long or steep downgrade. If the vehicle is
not shifted down, the brakes may have to be used so
much that they would get hot and no longer work well.
On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce the
vehicle’s speed to around 45 mph (70 km/h) to reduce
the possibility of engine and transmission overheating.
If the vehicle has overdrive, it may be driven in
THIRD (3) instead of DRIVE (D).

Parking on Hills

{CAUTION:
You really should not park your vehicle, with
a trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes
wrong, your rig could start to move. People
can be injured, and both your vehicle and the
trailer can be damaged.
But if the rig ever has to be parked on a hill, here is
how to do it:
1. Apply the regular brakes, but do not shift into
PARK (P) yet.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer
wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply the
parking brake, and then shift to PARK (P).
5. Release the regular brakes.

4-35

When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply the regular brakes and hold the pedal
down while you:

• Start the engine
• Shift into a gear
• Release the parking brake
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store
the chocks.

Maintenance When Trailer Towing
The vehicle will need service more often when it
pulls a trailer. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4
for more information. Things that are especially
important in trailer operation are automatic transmission
fluid, which should not be overfilled, engine oil, drive
belts, cooling, and brake systems. Each of these
is covered in this manual, and the Index will help locate
them quickly. If trailering, it is a good idea to review
this information before starting on a trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.

Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing
The cooling system may temporarily overheat during
severe operating conditions. See Engine Overheating
on page 5-27.

4-36

Section 5

Service and Appearance Care

Service ............................................................5-3
Accessories and Modifications ..........................5-3
California Proposition 65 Warning .....................5-3
California Perchlorate Materials Requirements .....5-4
Doing Your Own Service Work .........................5-4
Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your
Vehicle ......................................................5-5
Fuel ................................................................5-5
Gasoline Octane ............................................5-5
Gasoline Specifications ....................................5-6
California Fuel ...............................................5-6
Additives .......................................................5-6
Fuels in Foreign Countries ...............................5-7
Filling the Tank ..............................................5-8
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .....................5-10
Checking Things Under the Hood ....................5-10
Hood Release ..............................................5-11
Engine Compartment Overview .......................5-12
Engine Oil ...................................................5-15
Engine Oil Life System ..................................5-18
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ................................5-20
Automatic Transmission Fluid .........................5-22
Engine Coolant .............................................5-24
Pressure Cap ...............................................5-27
Engine Overheating .......................................5-27

Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode ........................................5-29
Cooling System ............................................5-30
Power Steering Fluid .....................................5-39
Windshield Washer Fluid ................................5-40
Brakes ........................................................5-41
Battery ........................................................5-45
Jump Starting ...............................................5-46
Headlamp Aiming ...........................................5-51
Bulb Replacement ..........................................5-54
Halogen Bulbs ..............................................5-54
Headlamps and Sidemarker Lamps .................5-54
Front Turn Signal, Parking and Fog Lamps ......5-57
Taillamps, Turn Signal, and Stoplamps ............5-58
Back-Up Lamps ............................................5-59
License Plate Lamp ......................................5-60
Replacement Bulbs .......................................5-60
Windshield Replacement .................................5-61
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ..............5-61
Tires ..............................................................5-62
Tire Sidewall Labeling ...................................5-63
Tire Terminology and Definitions .....................5-66
Inflation - Tire Pressure .................................5-69
Tire Pressure Monitor System .........................5-71

5-1

Section 5

Service and Appearance Care

Tire Pressure Monitor Operation .....................5-72
Tire Inspection and Rotation ...........................5-75
When It Is Time for New Tires .......................5-77
Buying New Tires .........................................5-78
Different Size Tires and Wheels ......................5-80
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..........................5-80
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ..................5-82
Wheel Replacement ......................................5-82
Tire Chains ..................................................5-84
If a Tire Goes Flat ........................................5-85
Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit (GXP) ...........5-86
Changing a Flat Tire .....................................5-96
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................5-98
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire ..............................................5-100
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ...........5-107
Compact Spare Tire ....................................5-109
Appearance Care ..........................................5-109
Interior Cleaning .........................................5-109
Fabric/Carpet ..............................................5-111
Leather ......................................................5-112
Ultra Lux Suede ..........................................5-113
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic
Surfaces .................................................5-113
Care of Safety Belts ....................................5-114

5-2

Weatherstrips .............................................5-114
Washing Your Vehicle ..................................5-114
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ....................5-115
Finish Care ................................................5-115
Windshield and Wiper Blades .......................5-116
Aluminum Wheels .......................................5-116
Tires .........................................................5-117
Sheet Metal Damage ...................................5-117
Finish Damage ...........................................5-117
Underbody Maintenance ...............................5-117
Chemical Paint Spotting ...............................5-118
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ................5-118
Vehicle Identification .....................................5-119
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ................5-119
Service Parts Identification Label ...................5-120
Electrical System ..........................................5-120
Add-On Electrical Equipment .........................5-120
Headlamp Wiring ........................................5-120
Windshield Wiper Fuses ...............................5-121
Power Windows and Other Power Options ......5-121
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ..........................5-121
Instrument Panel Fuse Block ........................5-122
Underhood Fuse Block ................................5-124
Capacities and Specifications ........................5-128

Service

Accessories and Modifications

For service and parts needs, visit your dealer/retailer.
You will receive genuine GM parts and GM-trained and
supported service people.

When non-dealer/non-retailer accessories are added to
your vehicle they can affect your vehicle’s performance
and safety, including such things as, airbags, braking,
stability, ride and handling, emissions systems,
aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systems like
antilock brakes, traction control and stability control.
Some of these accessories could even cause malfunction
or damage not covered by warranty.

Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:

GM Accessories are designed to complement and
function with other systems on your vehicle. Your GM
dealer/retailer can accessorize your vehicle using
genuine GM Accessories. When you go to your GM
dealer/retailer and ask for GM Accessories, you will know
that GM-trained and supported service technicians will
perform the work using genuine GM Accessories.
Also, see Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 1-65.

California Proposition 65 Warning
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems
(including some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and
some component wear by-products contain and/or emit
these chemicals.
5-3

California Perchlorate Materials
Requirements
Certain types of automotive applications, such as airbag
initiators, seat belt pretensioners, and lithium batteries
contained in remote keyless entry transmitters, may
contain perchlorate materials. Special handling may be
necessary. For additional information, see
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Doing Your Own Service Work

{CAUTION:
You can be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
CAUTION:

(Continued)

CAUTION:

(Continued)

• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,

•

experience, the proper replacement parts,
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts, and
other fasteners. English and metric
fasteners can be easily confused. If you
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break or fall off. You could be hurt.

If you want to do some of your own service work, you
should use the proper service manual. It tells you much
more about how to service your vehicle than this
manual can. To order the proper service manual, see
Service Publications Ordering Information on page 7-15.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting
to do your own service work, see Servicing Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-64.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list
the mileage and the date of any service work you
perform. See Maintenance Record on page 6-15.

5-4

Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can
affect the airflow around it. This can cause wind noise
and can affect fuel economy and windshield washer
performance. Check with your dealer/retailer before
adding equipment to the outside of your vehicle.

Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the
proper maintenance of your vehicle. To help keep the
engine clean and maintain optimum vehicle
performance, we recommend the use of gasoline
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.
The 8th digit of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
shows the code letter or number that identifies your
vehicle’s engine. The VIN is at the top left of the
instrument panel. See Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) on page 5-119.

Gasoline Octane
If your vehicle has the 3.8L V6 engine (VIN Code 2),
use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
rating of 87 or higher. If the octane rating is less than 87,
you might notice an audible knocking noise when you
drive, commonly referred to as spark knock. If this
occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as
soon as possible. If you are using gasoline rated at 87
octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking, the
engine needs service.
If your vehicle has the 5.3L V8 engine (VIN Code C),
use premium unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
rating of 91 or higher. You can also use regular unleaded
gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher, but your vehicle’s
acceleration could be slightly reduced, and you might
notice a slight audible knocking noise, commonly referred
to as spark knock. If the octane is less than 87, you might
notice a heavy knocking noise when you drive. If this
occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as
soon as possible. Otherwise, you could damage the
engine. If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or
higher and you hear heavy knocking, the engine
needs service.

5-5

Gasoline Specifications

Additives

At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM specification
D 4814 in the United States or CAN/CGSB-3.5 or
3.511 in Canada. Some gasolines contain an
octane-enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend against
the use of gasolines containing MMT. See Additives on
page 5-6 for additional information.

To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that help prevent
engine and fuel system deposits from forming, allowing
the emission control system to work properly. In most
cases, you should not have to add anything to the fuel.
However, some gasolines contain only the minimum
amount of additive required to meet U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency regulations. To help keep fuel injectors
and intake valves clean, or if your vehicle experiences
problems due to dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline
that is advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. Also,
your dealer/retailer has additives that will help correct and
prevent most deposit-related problems.

California Fuel
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions
Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that meet
California specifications. See the underhood emission
control label. If this fuel is not available in states adopting
California emissions standards, your vehicle will operate
satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications, but
emission control system performance might be affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp could turn on and your
vehicle might fail a smog-check test. See Malfunction
Indicator Lamp on page 3-50. If this occurs, return to your
authorized dealer/retailer for diagnosis. If it is determined
that the condition is caused by the type of fuel used,
repairs might not be covered by your warranty.

5-6

Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines might be available
in your area. We recommend that you use these
gasolines, if they comply with the specifications
described earlier. However, E85 (85% ethanol) and
other fuels containing more than 10% ethanol must not
be used in vehicles that were not designed for
those fuels.

Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel
system and also damage plastic and rubber parts.
That damage would not be covered under your
warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions can contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. We recommend against
the use of such gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can
reduce the life of spark plugs and the performance of the
emission control system could be affected. The
malfunction indicator lamp might turn on. If this occurs,
return to your dealer/retailer for service.

Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel might be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not be
covered by your warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you will be driving.

5-7

Filling the Tank

{CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to
you and others, read and follow all the
instructions on the pump island. Turn off your
engine when you are refueling. Do not smoke
if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle.
Do not use cellular phones. Keep sparks,
flames, and smoking materials away from fuel.
Do not leave the fuel pump unattended when
refueling your vehicle. This is against the law in
some places. Do not re-enter the vehicle while
pumping fuel. Keep children away from the fuel
pump; never let children pump fuel.

5-8

The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel
door on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise.
While refueling, let the fuel cap hang by the tether
below the fuel fill opening.

{CAUTION:
Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel
cap too quickly. If you spill fuel and then
something ignites it, you could be badly burned.
This spray can happen if your tank is nearly full,
and is more likely in hot weather. Open the fuel
cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise to stop.
Then unscrew the cap all the way.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the
tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel from
painted surfaces as soon as possible. See Washing Your
Vehicle on page 5-114.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until it
clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed. The
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. This would allow fuel
to evaporate into the atmosphere. See Malfunction
Indicator Lamp on page 3-50.

The CHECK GAS CAP message will be displayed on
the Driver Information Center (DIC) if the fuel cap is not
properly installed. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-67 for more information.

{CAUTION:
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by notifying the
station attendant. Leave the area immediately.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer/retailer can get one for
you. If you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly.
This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp to
light and may damage your fuel tank and emissions
system. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 3-50.

5-9

Filling a Portable Fuel Container

Checking Things Under
the Hood

{CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from
the container can ignite the fuel vapor. You
can be badly burned and your vehicle damaged
if this occurs. To help avoid injury to you and
others:
• Dispense fuel only into approved
containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed, or
on any surface other than the ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
• Do not smoke while pumping fuel.
• Do not use a cellular phone while
pumping fuel.

5-10

{CAUTION:
An electric fan under the hood can start up
and injure you even when the engine is not
running. Keep hands, clothing, and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.

{CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts
and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and
other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or
others could be burned. Be careful not to drop
or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.

Hood Release
To open the hood, do the following:

1. Pull the hood release handle with this symbol on
it. It is located inside the vehicle near the parking
brake pedal.

2. Go to the front of the vehicle and release the
secondary hood latch, located near the center
front of the engine compartment, by moving it to
the right.
3. Lift the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are
on properly. Then pull the hood down and close it firmly.

5-11

Engine Compartment Overview
When you open the hood on the 3.8L V6 engine, this is what you will see:

5-12

A. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-40
B. Battery. See Battery on page 5-45.
C. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump Starting on
page 5-46.
D. Passenger Compartment Air Filter. See Passenger
Compartment Air Filter on page 3-36.
E. Underhood Fuse Block. See Underhood Fuse Block
on page 5-124.
F. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank. See Cooling System
on page 5-30.
G. Pressure Cap. See Pressure Cap on page 5-27.
H. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir (Out of View). See
Power Steering Fluid on page 5-39.

I. Electric Engine Cooling Fans. See Cooling System
on page 5-30.
J. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-15.
K. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-15.
L. Automatic Transmission Fluid Dipstick. See
“Checking the Fluid Level” under Automatic
Transmission Fluid on page 5-22.
M. Engine Coolant Bleed Valve. See “How to Add
Coolant to the Radiator” under Cooling System on
page 5-30.
N. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
under Brakes on page 5-41.
O. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-20.

5-13

When you open the hood on the 5.3L V8 engine, here is what you will see:

5-14

A. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-40.
B. Battery. See Battery on page 5-45.
C. Underhood Fuse Block. See Underhood Fuse Block
on page 5-124.
D. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump Starting on
page 5-46.
E. Pressure Cap. See Pressure Cap on page 5-27.
F. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power Steering
Fluid on page 5-39.
G. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-15.
H. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-15.
I. Automatic Transmission Fluid Dipstick. See
“Checking the Fluid Level” under Automatic
Transmission Fluid on page 5-22.
J. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
under Brakes on page 5-41.
K. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-20.
L. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank. See Cooling System
on page 5-30.

Engine Oil
Checking Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check the engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil
must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. See
Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the engine oil dipstick.
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes
to drain back into the oil pan. If you do not do this,
the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel
or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it
again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.

5-15

When to Add Engine Oil

Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine has
so much oil that the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating
range, the engine could be damaged.
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the engine
oil fill cap.

V6 Engine

V8 Engine
If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the tip of
the dipstick, add at least one quart/liter of the
recommended oil. This section explains what kind of oil
to use. For engine oil crankcase capacity, see
Capacities and Specifications on page 5-128.

5-16

Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere in
the proper operating range in the cross-hatched area.
Push the dipstick all the way back in when you are
through.

What Kind of Engine Oil to Use

Look for three things:

• GM6094M
Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting
GM Standard GM6094M. Look for and use only an
oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.

• SAE 5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is best
for your vehicle.

These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity
oils such as SAE 20W-50.
• Oils meeting these
requirements should
have the starburst
symbol on the container.
This symbol indicates
that the oil has
been certified by the
American Petroleum
Institute (API).

Look for this information on the oil container, and use
only those oils that are identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and have the starburst symbol
on the front of the oil container.
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
oil can result in engine damage not covered by
your warranty.
If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it is
recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both provide easier
cold starting and better protection for the engine at
extremely low temperatures.
5-17

Engine Oil Additives
Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard
GM6094M are all you need for good performance
and engine protection.

Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine Oil
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know
when to change the engine oil and filter. This is based
on engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not
on mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage
at which an oil change will be indicated can vary
considerably. For the oil life system to work properly,
you must reset the system every time the oil is changed.

5-18

When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is
necessary. A CHANGE OIL SOON message will come
on. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-67.
Change the oil as soon as possible within the next
600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are driving
under the best conditions, the oil life system might not
indicate that an oil change is necessary for over a year.
However, the engine oil and filter must be changed at
least once a year and at this time the system must be
reset. Your dealer/retailer has trained service people who
will perform this work using genuine parts and reset the
system. It is also important to check the oil regularly and
keep it at the proper level.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must
change the oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since the last oil
change. Remember to reset the oil life system whenever
the oil is changed.

How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
System
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change
the engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Whenever
the oil is changed, reset the system so it can calculate
when the next oil change is required. If a situation occurs
where you change the oil prior to a CHANGE OIL SOON
message appearing on the DIC, reset the system.
To reset the oil life system, after the oil has been
changed:
1. Press the options button on the DIC until ENGINE
OIL MONITOR appears on the DIC screen.
2. Press the set/reset button to reset the system.
The next screen indicates that the engine oil
monitor system has been reset.
If the vehicle is equipped with the trip computer
DIC, when the gage button is pressed and the OIL
LIFE REMAINING mode appears, it should read
100 percent OIL LIFE REMAINING.

What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that can be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good hand
cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or rags
containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it in
the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by taking it
to a place that collects used oil. If you have a problem
properly disposing of used oil, ask your dealer/retailer, a
service station, or a local recycling center for help.

3. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.
If the CHANGE OIL SOON message comes back on
when you start your vehicle, the engine oil life system
has not reset. Repeat the procedure.

5-19

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
The engine air cleaner/filter is located in the engine
compartment on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
more information on location.

When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter

How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
To inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the filter from
the vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release loose
dust and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt, a new
filter is required.
To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter do the
following:

Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace it at the first oil change after each
50,000 mile (80 000 km) interval. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 6-4 for more information. If you
are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter
at each engine oil change.

3.8L V6 Engine

5-20

5. To reinstall the cover, position the tabs through the
slots on the housing. If your vehicle has one of the
3800 V6 engines, a notch on the sides of the filter
cover will indicate the correct engagement.
6. Push the cover tabs on top of the housing to lock
the cover in place.

{CAUTION:

5.3L V8 Engine
1. Lift the filter cover tabs on top of the engine air
cleaner/filter housing.
2. Push the filter cover housing toward the engine.

Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off can cause you or others to be burned.
The air cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps
to stop flames if the engine backfires. If it is not
there and the engine backfires, you could be
burned. Do not drive with it off, and be careful
working on the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off.

3. Pull out the filter.
4. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can
cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can easily
get into your engine, which will damage it. Always
have the air cleaner/filter in place when you are
driving.

5-21

Automatic Transmission Fluid
When to Check and Change Automatic
Transmission Fluid
A good time to check the automatic transmission fluid
level is when the engine oil is changed.
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in
Additional Required Services on page 6-6, and be sure
to use the transmission fluid listed in Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.

How to Check Automatic Transmission
Fluid

Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage
your transmission. Too much can mean that some
of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine
parts or exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Too
little fluid could cause the transmission to overheat.
Be sure to get an accurate reading if you check your
transmission fluid.
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the
transmission fluid level if you have been driving:

•
•
•
•

When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C).
At high speed for quite a while.
In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather.
While pulling a trailer.

Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may
choose to have this done at the dealer/retailer service
department.

To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal
operating temperature, which is 180°F to 200°F
(82°C to 93°C).

If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions
here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.

Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles
(24 km) when outside temperatures are above 50°F
(10°C). If it is colder than 50°F (10°C), you may have to
drive longer.

5-22

Checking the Fluid Level
Prepare the vehicle as follows:
1. Park the vehicle on a level place. Keep the engine
running.
2. With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever
in PARK (P).

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
more information on location.
1. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or
paper towel.
2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and
then pull it back out again.

3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift
lever through each gear, pausing for about three
seconds in each one. Then, position the shift lever
in PARK (P).
4. Let the engine run at idle for three to five minutes.
Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps:
The transmission fluid
dipstick handle has this
symbol on it, and is located
near the rear of the
engine compartment.

3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the
lower level. The fluid level must be in the
crosshatched area.
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the
dipstick back in all the way.

How to Add Automatic Transmission
Fluid
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of transmission fluid to use. See Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.

5-23

If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper
fluid to bring the level into the crosshatched area on the
dipstick.
1. Pull out the dipstick.
2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluid at the
dipstick hole to bring it to the proper level.
It does not take much fluid, generally less than one
pint (0.5 L). Do not overfill.
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission
fluid may damage your vehicle, and the damages
may not be covered by your warranty. Always use
the automatic transmission fluid listed in
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
3. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
described under “How to Check Automatic
Transmission Fluid,” earlier in this section.
4. When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the
dipstick back in all the way.

Engine Coolant
The cooling system in the vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in the vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if only
DEX-COOL® extended life coolant is added.

5-24

The following explains the cooling system and how to
add coolant when it is low. If there is a problem with
engine overheating or if coolant needs to be added to the
radiator, see Engine Overheating on page 5-27.
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® engine coolant will:
• Give freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C).

•
•
•
•

Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
Protect against rust and corrosion.
Help keep the proper engine temperature.
Let the warning lights and gages work as
they should.

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at the first maintenance
service after each 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or
24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.

What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and
one-half DEX-COOL® engine coolant which will not
damage aluminum parts. If this coolant mixture is used,
nothing else needs to be added.

{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other
liquid such as alcohol, can boil before the
proper coolant mixture will. Your vehicle’s
coolant warning system is set for the proper
coolant mixture. With plain water or the wrong
mixture, your engine could get too hot but you
would not get the overheat warning. Your
engine could catch fire and you or others could
be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.

Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture,
your engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be covered by your
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core, and
other parts.
If coolant needs to be added more than four times a
year, have your dealer/retailer check the cooling system.
Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/or additives
in your vehicle’s cooling system, you could
damage your vehicle. Use only the proper mixture
of the engine coolant listed in this manual for
the cooling system. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 6-12 for more information.

5-25

Adding Coolant

Checking Coolant
The coolant recovery tank
cap has this symbol on it.

If more coolant is needed, add the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank, but be
careful not to spill it.
If the coolant recovery tank is completely empty, add
coolant to the radiator. See Engine Overheating
on page 5-27.

{CAUTION:
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
more information on the location of the coolant
recovery tank.
The vehicle must be on a level surface when checking
the coolant level.
When the engine is cold, the coolant level should be at
the cold fill line or a little higher. The cold fill line is
marked with the same symbol as the coolant recovery
tank cap.

5-26

Turning the pressure cap when the engine and
radiator are hot can allow steam and scalding
liquids to blow out and burn you badly. With
the coolant recovery tank, you will almost
never have to add coolant at the radiator. Never
turn the pressure cap — even a little — when
the engine and radiator are hot.

Pressure Cap

{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
Occasionally check the coolant level in the radiator. For
information on how to add coolant to the radiator,
see Cooling System on page 5-30.

Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may
occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly
secured.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
more information on location.

Engine Overheating
There is a coolant temperature gage and a warning light
on the instrument panel that indicate an overheated
engine condition. See Engine Coolant Temperature
Gage on page 3-49 and Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light on page 3-48.

5-27

If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine

{CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn you
badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear steam coming
from it. Turn it off and get everyone away from
the vehicle until it cools down. Wait until there
is no sign of steam or coolant before you open
the hood.
If you keep driving when the vehicles engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You
or others could be badly burned. Stop your
engine if it overheats, and get out of the vehicle
until the engine is cool.
See Overheated Engine Protection Operating
Mode on page 5-29 for information on driving to
a safe place in an emergency.

5-28

Notice: If your engine catches fire because you
keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can be
badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. See Overheated Engine
Protection Operating Mode on page 5-29 for
information on driving to a safe place in an
emergency.

If No Steam is Coming From Your
Engine
An overheat warning can indicate a serious problem.
If you get an engine overheat warning but see or
hear no steam, the problem may not be too serious.
Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you:

•
•
•
•

Climb a long hill on a hot day.
Stop after high-speed driving.
Idle for long periods in traffic.
Tow a trailer.

If an overheat warning occurs without any sign of
steam, try this for a minute or so:
1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in NEUTRAL (N)
while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the road,
shift to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) and let the
engine idle.
2. Set the heater at the highest setting and the fan at
the highest speed and open the windows as
necessary.
If the overheat warning no longer exists, the vehicle can
be driven. Just to be safe, drive slower for about
10 minutes. If the warning does not come back on, the
vehicle can be driven normally.
If the warning continues, and you have not stopped, pull
over, stop, and park the vehicle right away.
If there is still no sign of steam, idle the engine for three
minutes while parked. If the warning is still there, turn off
the engine and get everyone out of the vehicle until it
cools down. Also, see “Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode” later in this section.

Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode
The overheated engine protection operating mode
allows the vehicle to be driven to a safe place in an
emergency situation. If an overheated engine condition
exists, this protection mode alternates firing groups
of cylinders to help prevent engine damage. In this
mode, there will be a significant loss in power and engine
performance. The engine coolant temperature gage
indicator will move to the shaded area, and the engine
coolant temperature warning light will come on, showing
that an overheated engine condition exists. Driving
extended miles (km) and/or towing a trailer in the
overheated engine protection mode should be avoided.
Notice: After driving in the overheated engine
protection operating mode, to avoid engine damage,
allow the engine to cool before attempting any
repair. The engine oil will be severely degraded.
Repair the cause of coolant loss, change the oil and
reset the oil life system. See Engine Oil on page 5-15.

You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.

5-29

Cooling System
When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is what
you will see:

5.3L V8 Engine

3.8L V6 Engine
A. Coolant Recovery Tank
B. Pressure Cap
C. Electric Engine Cooling Fan(s)

5-30

A. Pressure Cap
B. Electric Engine Cooling Fans
C. Coolant Recovery Tank

{CAUTION:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood
can start up even when the engine is not
running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing, and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.
If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling,
do not do anything else until it cools down. The vehicle
should be parked on a level surface.

The coolant recovery tank is located in the rear of the
engine compartment on the passenger’s side of the
vehicle on the 3.8L V6 engine. The coolant recovery
tank on the 5.3L V8 engine is located in the rear of the
engine compartment on the driver’s side of the vehicle,
behind the engine air cleaner/filter.
When the engine is cold, the coolant level should be at
or above the COLD FILL line on the coolant recovery
tank. To check the coolant level, look for the COLD FILL
line on the side of the coolant recovery tank that faces
the engine. If the level is not correct, there may be a leak
at the pressure cap or in the radiator hoses, heater
hoses, radiator, water pump, or somewhere else in the
cooling system.

5-31

or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by the warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in the vehicle.

{CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them. If you
do, you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you
run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That
could cause an engine fire, and you could be
burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive the
vehicle.
If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on, check
to see if the electric engine cooling fan(s) are running.
If the engine is overheating, the fan(s) should be
running. If the fan(s) are not running, the vehicle
needs service.
Notice: Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant is not covered by your warranty. See
Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode on
page 5-29 for information on driving to a safe place
in an emergency.
®

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL may
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant could
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
5-32

How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Recovery Tank

{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to the cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other
liquid such as alcohol, can boil before the
proper coolant mixture will. The vehicle’s
coolant warning system is set for the proper
coolant mixture. With plain water or the wrong
mixture, the engine could get too hot but you
would not get the overheat warning. The
engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
If you have not found a problem yet, but the coolant
level is not at the COLD FILL line, add a 50/50 mixture
of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® engine
coolant at the coolant recovery tank. See Engine
Coolant on page 5-24 for more information.

Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mixture.

{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.

{CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They
are under pressure, and if you turn the
pressure cap — even a little — they can come
out at high speed. Never turn the cap when the
cooling system, including the pressure cap, is
hot. Wait for the cooling system and pressure
cap to cool if you ever have to turn the
pressure cap.

When the coolant level in the coolant recovery tank is at
the COLD FILL line, start the vehicle.
If the overheat warning continues, there is one more
thing you can try. You can add the proper coolant
mixture directly to the radiator, but be sure the system
is cool before you do it.

5-33

How to Add Coolant to the Radiator
(3.8L V6 Engine)
Notice: Your engine has a specific radiator fill
procedure. Failure to follow this procedure could
cause your engine to overheat and be severely
damaged.

2. Then keep turning the pressure cap and remove it.

{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
3. Remove the engine cover to access the
bleed valve.
3.1. Clean the area around the engine oil fill tube
and cap before removing. Twist the oil fill
tube, with cap attached, counterclockwise
and remove it.

3.8L V6 Engine
1. You can remove the pressure cap when the cooling
system, including the pressure cap and upper
radiator hose, is no longer hot. Turn the cap slowly
counterclockwise.
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss
means there is still some pressure left.
5-34

4. After the engine cools,
open the coolant air
bleed valve located on
the thermostat housing
near the upper
radiator hose.

Thermostat Housing

3.8L V6 Engine
3.2. Lift the engine cover at the front, slide the
catch tab out of the engine bracket and
remove the cover.
3.3. Put the oil fill tube, with cap attached, in the
valve cover oil fill hole until you are ready to
replace the cover.

5-35

7. Replace the engine cover.
7.1. Remove the oil fill tube, with cap attached,
from the valve cover.
7.2. Insert the catch tab on the engine cover
under the bracket on the engine.
7.3. Place the hole in the engine cover over the
hole in the valve cover. Install oil fill tube and
cap by twisting clockwise.
8. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the COLD
FILL line.
9. Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank, but
leave the pressure cap off.
3.8L V6 Engine
5. Fill the radiator with the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture, up to the base of the filler neck.
See Engine Coolant on page 5-24 for more
information about the proper coolant mixture.
If you see a stream of coolant coming from the air
bleed valve, close the valve. Otherwise, close the
valve after the radiator is filled.
6. Rinse or wipe any spilled coolant from the engine
and the compartment.

5-36

11. By this time, the coolant level inside the radiator
filler neck may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper DEX-COOL® coolant mixture
through the filler neck until the level reaches the
base of the filler neck.
12. Then replace the pressure cap. At any time during
this procedure if coolant begins to flow out of the
filler neck, reinstall the pressure cap. Be sure the
pressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.
13. Check the coolant in the recovery tank. The level in
the coolant recovery tank should be at the COLD
FILL line when the engine is cold.

3.8L V6 Engine
10. Start the engine and let it run until you can feel the
upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fan(s).

5-37

How to Add Coolant to the Cooling
System (5.3L V8 Engine)
Notice: The engine has a specific cooling system
drain and fill procedure. Failure to follow this
procedure could cause the engine to overheat and
be severely damaged. If the engine’s cooling system
needs to be drained and re-filled, please see the
dealer/retailer.
You can remove the
pressure cap when the
cooling system, including
the pressure cap and
upper radiator hose is no
longer hot. Turn the
pressure cap slowly
counterclockwise.

{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
3. Fill the cooling system with the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture, up to the base of the filler neck.
See Engine Coolant on page 5-24 for more
information about the proper coolant mixture.
4. Rinse or wipe any spilled coolant from the engine
and the compartment.
5. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the COLD
FILL line.
6. Install the coolant recovery tank cap and the
pressure cap.

1. If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss
means that there is still some pressure left.
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap to remove the
pressure cap.

5-38

7. If the coolant in the recovery tank is constantly low,
you should have a dealer/retailer service
department inspect your vehicle for leaks.

Power Steering Fluid
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for
reservoir location.

How to Check Power Steering Fluid
To check the power steering fluid, do the following:
1. Turn the key off and let the engine compartment
cool down.
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a
clean rag.
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.
5. Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on
the dipstick
The fluid level should be between the ADD and HOT
marks when the engine is cold.

When to Check Power Steering Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid
unless a leak is suspected in the system, or an unusual
noise is heard. A fluid loss in this system could indicate a
problem. Have the system inspected and repaired.

When the engine compartment is hot, the level should
be at the HOT mark.
If the fluid is at the ADD mark when the engine is cold
or hot, power steering fluid should be added.

What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
Always use the proper fluid.
Notice: Use of the incorrect fluid may damage your
vehicle and the damages may not be covered by
your warranty. Always use the correct fluid listed in
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
5-39

Windshield Washer Fluid

• When using concentrated washer fluid, follow

What to Use
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will
be operating the vehicle in an area where the
temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has
sufficient protection against freezing.

Adding Washer Fluid
When the windshield washer fluid reservoir is low, a
LOW WASHER FLUID message along with the washer
symbol, comes on in the Driver Information Center
(DIC). See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-67
for more information.
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it. Add
washer fluid until the tank
is full. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for reservoir
location.

5-40

Notice:
the manufacturer’s instructions for adding
water.

• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts of
the washer system. Also, water does not clean as
well as washer fluid.

• Fill the washer fluid tank only three-quarters full
when it is very cold. This allows for fluid
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is completely full.

• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage the vehicle’s
windshield washer system and paint.

Brakes
Brake Fluid
The brake master cylinder
reservoir is filled with
DOT-3 brake fluid. See
Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the
reservoir.

There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down. The first is that the brake
fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal
brake lining wear. When new linings are put in, the fluid
level goes back up. The other reason is that fluid is
leaking out of the brake hydraulic system. If it is, you
should have the brake hydraulic system fixed, since a
leak means that sooner or later the brakes will not
work well.

It is not a good idea to top off the brake fluid. Adding
brake fluid will not correct a leak. If fluid is added when
the linings are worn, there will be too much fluid when
new brake linings are installed. Add or remove brake
fluid, as necessary, only when work is done on the brake
hydraulic system.

{CAUTION:
If your vehicle has too much brake fluid, it can
spill on the engine. The fluid will burn if the
engine is hot enough. You or others could be
burned, and your vehicle could be damaged.
Add brake fluid only when work is done on the
brake hydraulic system.
When the brake fluid falls to a low level, the brake
warning light comes on. See Brake System Warning
Light on page 3-45.

5-41

What to Add
When you need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake fluid.
Use new brake fluid from a sealed container only.
See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This helps keep dirt
from entering the reservoir.

Notice:

• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
hydraulic system parts. For example, just a few
drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in
the brake hydraulic system can damage brake
hydraulic system parts so badly that they will
have to be replaced. Do not let someone put in
the wrong kind of fluid.

• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted

{CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake
hydraulic system, the brakes might not work
well. This could cause a crash. Always use the
proper brake fluid.

5-42

surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Be
careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle.
If you do, wash it off immediately. See Washing
Your Vehicle on page 5-114.

Brake Wear

Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.

Your vehicle has disc brakes. Disc brake pads have
built-in wear indicators that make a high-pitched warning
sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads are
needed. The sound can come and go or be heard all the
time your vehicle is moving, except when you are pushing
on the brake pedal firmly.

Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
the brakes.

{CAUTION:
The brake wear warning sound means that
soon the brakes will not work well. That could
lead to an accident. When you hear the brake
wear warning sound, have your vehicle
serviced.

Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
the proper sequence to torque specifications in
Capacities and Specifications on page 5-128.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.

5-43

Brake Pedal Travel

Replacing Brake System Parts

See your dealer/retailer if the brake pedal does not
return to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign that brake service
might be required.

The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your vehicle
was designed and tested with top-quality brake parts.
When you replace parts of the braking system — for
example, when the brake linings wear down and you
need new ones put in — be sure you get new approved
replacement parts. If you do not, the brakes might not
work properly. For example, if someone puts in brake
linings that are wrong for your vehicle, the balance
between the front and rear brakes can change — for the
worse. The braking performance you have come to
expect can change in many other ways if someone puts
in the wrong replacement brake parts.

Brake Adjustment
Every time you apply the brakes, with or without the
vehicle moving, the brakes adjust for wear.

5-44

Battery
Your vehicle has a maintenance free battery. When it is
time for a new battery, see your dealer/retailer for one
that has the replacement number shown on the original
battery’s label. See Engine Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for battery location.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
If the battery has a very low charge or is dead, you
might not be able to remove the ignition key from the
ignition switch or shift out of PARK (P). See Shifting Out
of PARK (P) on page 2-35.

Vehicle Storage

{CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you
are not careful. See Jump Starting on
page 5-46 for tips on working around a battery
without getting hurt.
Infrequent Usage: If you drive your vehicle infrequently,
remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery.
This will help keep the battery from running down.
Extended Storage: For extended storage of your vehicle,
remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery or
use a battery trickle charger. This will help maintain the
charge of the battery over an extended period of time.

5-45

Jump Starting
If your vehicle’s battery has run down, you may want to
use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start
your vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do
it safely.

{CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode or
ignite.
• They contain enough electricity to
burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some
or all of these things can hurt you.

Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to your vehicle that would not be covered
by your warranty.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage your vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you do not want. You would not be able
to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding
could damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in
the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transmission in PARK (P) or a manual transmission
in NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake.
Notice: If you leave your radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. Always turn off your radio and other
accessories when jump starting your vehicle.

5-46

If your vehicle has one of
the 3.8L V6 engines, to
uncover the remote
positive (+) terminal, press
the tab at the bottom of
the fuse block and lift
the cover up.

3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or the accessory power outlet. Turn off the
radio and all lamps that are not needed. This will
avoid sparks and help save both batteries. And it
could save the radio!
4. Open the hood on the other vehicle and locate the
positive (+) and negative (−) terminal locations on
that vehicle.
You will not use your vehicle’s battery for jump
starting. It has a remote positive (+) jump starting
terminal, located on the underhood fuse block, for
that purpose.

3.8L V6 Engine
If your vehicle has the
5.3L V8 engine, to uncover
the remote positive (+)
terminal, remove the fuse
block cover.

5.3L V8 Engine

5-47

Always use the remote positive (+) terminal instead
of the positive (+) terminal on the battery. See
Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
more information on location.

{CAUTION:

{CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing
this, and some have been blinded. Use a
flashlight if you need more light.

An electric fan can start up even when the
engine is not running and can injure you. Keep
hands, clothing and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.

Be sure the battery has enough water. You do
not need to add water to the battery installed
in your new vehicle. But if a battery has filler
caps, be sure the right amount of fluid is there.
If it is low, add water to take care of that first.
If you do not, explosive gas could be present.

{CAUTION:

Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it
in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place
with water and get medical help immediately.

Fans or other moving engine parts can injure
you badly. Keep your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.

5-48

5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some basic
things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if the
vehicle has one. Negative will go to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−), or you
will get a short that would damage the battery and
maybe other parts too. And do not connect the
negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on the
dead battery because this can cause sparks.
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal location on the vehicle with the dead
battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the
vehicle has one.
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to
the positive (+) terminal location on the vehicle with
the good battery. Use a remote positive (+)
terminal if the vehicle has one.

8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal location on the vehicle with
the good battery. Use a remote negative (−) terminal
if the vehicle has one.
Do not let the other end touch anything until the
next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable
does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (–) terminal on the vehicle with the dead
battery.
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable at
least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery,
but not near engine parts that move. The electrical
connection is just as good there, and the chance
of sparks getting back to the battery is much less.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.
If it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.

5-49

Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may
occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Always connect
and remove the jumper cables in the correct
order, making sure that the cables do not touch
each other or other metal.

To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, do
the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other
vehicle.
5. Return the remote positive (+) terminal cover to its
original position.

Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
Negative (−) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
5-50

Headlamp Aiming
The visual optical headlamp aiming system has been
preset at the factory and should need no further
adjustment.
However, If the vehicle is damaged in an accident, the
headlamp aim may be affected and adjustment may
be necessary.

The vehicle should be properly prepared as follows:

• The vehicle should be placed so the headlamps are
25 ft. (7.6 m) from a light colored wall.

• The vehicle must have all four tires on a perfectly
level surface which is level all the way to the wall.

• The vehicle should be placed so it is perpendicular
to the wall.

If oncoming vehicles flash their high beams at you, this
may also mean the vertical aim needs to be adjusted.

• The vehicle should not have any snow, ice, or

It is recommended that the vehicle is taken to your
dealer/retailer for service if the headlamps need to be
re-aimed. It is possible however, to re-aim the
headlamps as described in the following procedure.

• The vehicle should be fully assembled and all other

mud on it.
work stopped while headlamp aiming is being done.

• The vehicle should be normally loaded with a
full tank of fuel and one person or 160 lbs (75 kg)
sitting on the driver’s seat.

• Tires should be properly inflated.

5-51

Headlamp aiming is done with the low-beam headlamps.
The high-beam headlamps will be correctly aimed if the
low-beam headlamps are aimed properly.
To adjust the vertical aim, do the following:

4. At the wall measure from the ground upward (A) to
the recorded distance from Step 3 and mark it.

1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on page 5-11
for more information.
Find the aim dot on the lens of the low-beam lamp.
2. Locate the aim dot on the lens of the low-beam
headlamp.
3. Measure the distance from the ground to the aim
dot on the lamp. Record the distance.

5-52

5. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B) on the wall the
width of the vehicle at the height of the mark
in Step 4.
6. Turn on the low-beam headlamps and place a
piece of cardboard or equivalent in front of the
headlamp not being aimed. This should allow only
the beam of light from the headlamp being aimed to
be seen on the flat surface.
Notice: Do not cover a headlamp to improve beam
cut-off when aiming. Covering a headlamp may
cause excessive heat build-up which may cause
damage to the headlamp.

Driver’s Side shown
7. Locate the vertical headlamp aiming screws, which
are under the hood, near the headlamps. Turn the
vertical aiming screw until the headlamp beam is
aimed to the horizontal tape line.
The adjustment screws can be turned with a 6 mm
hex key bit socket or a 6 mm hex key.

8. Turn the vertical aiming screw until the headlamp
beam is aimed to the horizontal tape line. Turn it
clockwise or counterclockwise to raise or lower the
angle of the beam.
9. Make sure that the light from the headlamp is
positioned at the bottom edge of the horizontal tape
line. The lamp on the left (A) shows the correct
headlamp aim. The lamp on the right (B) shows the
incorrect headlamp aim.
10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 for the opposite
headlamp.

5-53

Bulb Replacement

Headlamps and Sidemarker Lamps

For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see
Replacement Bulbs on page 5-60.

To replace a headlamp or sidemarker bulb:

For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer/retailer.

Halogen Bulbs

{CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure to read and
follow the instructions on the bulb package.

A. High-Beam Headlamp
B. Low-Beam Headlamp
C. Sidemarker Lamp
1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on page 5-11
for more information.

5-54

2. Locate the metal retaining clip. Remove the bolt.
3. Pull up half-way on the metal retaining clip
while pushing rearward on the headlamp.
Align the square cut-out on the retaining clip with
the notch on the headlamp.

4. Pull the headlamp assembly straight out from the
vehicle. Moving the headlamp up and down slightly
may help with its removal.

5-55

6. Pull the old bulb from the socket.
7. Place the new bulb into the socket.
8. Turn the bulb socket ring one-quarter turn clockwise
to reinstall it back into the headlamp assembly.
9. Carefully reinstall the headlamp assembly.
10. Push down on the metal retaining clip while pushing
rearward on the headlamp, making sure the
headlamp assembly is secure.
11. Reinstall the bolt and tighten to secure.

A. High-Beam Headlamp
B. Low-Beam Headlamp
C. Sidemarker Lamp
5. Turn the bulb socket ring one-quarter of a turn
counterclockwise to remove it from the headlamp
assembly.

5-56

Front Turn Signal, Parking and Fog
Lamps
The front turn signal, parking, and fog lamps, if the
vehicle has them, are located below the headlamp
assembly.

2. Locate the front turn
signal/parking lamp (all
models) and fog lamp
bulbs (if equipped),
which are located below
the headlamp
assembly.

The arrow indicates which is the turn signal/parking
lamp bulb. The fog lamp bulb is below it, if your
vehicle has this bulb. If you need to have fog lamp
bulb replaced, see your dealer/retailer for service.
3. Turn the bulb socket one-quarter of a turn
counterclockwise to remove it from its assembly.
A. Front Turn Signal/Parking Lamp
B. Fog Lamp (If Equipped)

4. Pull the old bulb from the socket and replace it with
a new one.

To replace one of these bulbs, do the following:

5. Turn the bulb socket a quarter turn clockwise to
reinstall it.

1. Follow Steps 1 through 4 of the headlamp
replacement procedure. See Headlamps and
Sidemarker Lamps on page 5-54 for more
information.

6. Reinstall the headlamp assembly.
7. Push down on the metal retaining clip while pushing
rearward on the headlamp, making sure the
headlamp assembly is secure.
8. Reinstall the bolt and tighten to secure.
5-57

Taillamps, Turn Signal, and
Stoplamps

6. Remove the taillamp
assembly by pulling it
out from the vehicle.

A. Taillamp
B. Taillamps, Turn Signal
and Stoplamps

7. Turn the appropriate
lamp socket a quarter
turn counterclockwise
and remove it.

1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 2-14 for more
information.
2. Remove the convenience net, if equipped, by
removing the net hook attachments.
3. Remove the plastic cap from the trunk trim.
4. Pull the trunk trim and carpet away from the back of
the trunk.
5. Remove the bottom bolt and two nuts.
8. Remove the old bulb.
5-58

9. Replace with a new bulb into the socket and turn
the lamp socket clockwise to install it.
10. Reinstall the taillamp assembly by reversing
Steps 2 through 5.

Back-Up Lamps
The back-up lamps are located on the trunk lid.

To replace the back-up lamp bulb(s):
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 2-14 for more
information.

2. Turn the appropriate lamp socket a quarter turn
counterclockwise and remove it.
3. Remove the old bulb.
4. Put the new bulb into the lamp socket.
5. Turn the bulb a quarter turn clockwise to reinstall it.

5-59

License Plate Lamp
To replace one of these bulbs:
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 2-14

Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamps
Back-Up Lamp
Front Parking/Turn Signal Lamp

Bulb Number
3157
3757 NAK* or
5702 KA**

Front Sidemarker and License
194
Plate Lamp
Headlamps
High-Beam Halogen
9005
Low-Beam Halogen
9006
Stop/Taillamp/Turn Signal Lamps
3057
* Base Models with the Optional Fog Lamps
** For Lamps Not Equipped with the Fog Function and
GXP Models
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact your
dealer/retailer.
2. Turn the appropriate lamp socket a quarter turn
counterclockwise and remove it.
3. Remove the old bulb.
4. Put the new bulb into the lamp socket.
5. Turn the bulb a quarter turn clockwise to reinstall it.

5-60

Windshield Replacement
If your vehicle is equipped with the Head-Up Display
(HUD) system, keep in mind that your windshield is part
of the HUD system. If you ever have to get your
windshield replaced, be sure to get one that is designed
for HUD or your HUD image may look blurred or out
of focus.

Replacement blades come in different types and are
removed in different ways. For the proper type and
length, see Maintenance Replacement Parts on
page 6-13. Here is how to remove the wiper blade:
1. Pull the windshield wiper arm connector away from
the windshield.

Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear
or cracking. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4
for more information on wiper blade inspection.

2. While holding the wiper arm, pull the clip up from
the blade connecting point, and pull the blade
assembly down toward the windshield to remove it
from the wiper arm.
3. Install the new wiper blade onto the wiper arm and
snap the clip into place.

5-61

Tires

CAUTION:

Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires
made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever
have questions about your tire warranty and where
to obtain service, see your vehicle Warranty
booklet for details.

{CAUTION:
Poorly maintained and improperly used
tires are dangerous.
• Overloading your vehicle’s tires can
cause overheating as a result of too
much flexing. You could have an
air-out and a serious accident. See
Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-22.
CAUTION:

5-62

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Underinflated tires pose the same
danger as overloaded tires. The
resulting accident could cause serious
injury. Check all tires frequently to
maintain the recommended pressure.
Tire pressure should be checked when
your vehicle’s tires are cold. See
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-69.
• Overinflated tires are more likely
to be cut, punctured, or broken by a
sudden impact — such as when
you hit a pothole. Keep tires
at the recommended pressure.
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents.
If the tire’s tread is badly worn, or if
your vehicle’s tires have been
damaged, replace them.

Low-Profile Performance Tire (GXP)
If your vehicle has P255/45R18 size tires on the
front wheels and P225/50R18 size tires on the
rear wheels, they are classified as low-profile
performance tires. These tires are designed for very
responsive driving on wet or dry pavement. You
may also notice more road noise with low-profile
performance tires and that they tend to wear faster.
Notice: If your vehicle has low-profile tires,
they are more susceptible to damage from road
hazards or curb impact than standard profile
tires. Tire and/or wheel assembly damage
can occur when coming into contact with road
hazards like, potholes, or sharp edged
objects, or when sliding into a curb. Your
vehicle warranty does not cover this type of
damage. Keep tires set to the correct inflation
pressure and, when possible avoid contact
with curbs, potholes, and other road hazards.

Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into its
sidewall. The examples below show a typical
passenger vehicle tire and a compact spare tire
sidewall.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of
letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type,
and service description. See the “Tire Size”
illustration later in this section for more detail.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a
TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal
safety guidelines.
5-63

(C) DOT (Department of Transportation): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates
that the tire is in compliance with the U.S.
Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following DOT (Department of
Transportation) code is the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer
and plant code, tire size, and date the tire was
manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides of
the tire, although only one side may have the date
of manufacture.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires based on
three performance factors: treadwear, traction, and
temperature resistance. For more information see
Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 5-80.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.

5-64

Compact Spare Tire Example
(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact spare
tire or temporary use tire has a tread life of
approximately 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and should
not be driven at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h).
The compact spare tire is for emergency use when
a regular road tire has lost air and gone flat. If your
vehicle has a compact spare tire, see Compact
Spare Tire on page 5-109 and If a Tire Goes Flat on
page 5-85.

(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under
the tread.
(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following the DOT (Department of
Transportation) code is the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer
and plant code, tire size, and date the tire was
manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides of
the tire, although only one side may have the date
of manufacture.

(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a
TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal
safety guidelines.
Tire Size
The following illustration shows an example of a
typical passenger vehicle tire size.

(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire or
compact spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi
(420 kPa). For more information on tire pressure
and inflation see Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 5-69.
(F) Tire Size : A combination of letters and
numbers define a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio,
construction type, and service description. The
letter T as the first character in the tire size means
the tire is for temporary use only.

(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P
as the first character in the tire size means a
passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards set
by the U.S. Tire and Rim Association.

5-65

(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates
the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall
to sidewall.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that
indicates the tire height-to-width measurements.
For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 60, as
shown in item C of the illustration, it would mean
that the tire’s sidewall is 60 percent as high as
it is wide.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire.
The letter R means radial ply construction;
the letter D means diagonal or bias ply
construction; and the letter B means belted-bias
ply construction.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in
inches.
(F) Service Description: These characters
represent the load range and speed rating of the
tire. The load index represents the load carry
capacity a tire is certified to carry. The load index
can range from 1 to 279. The speed rating is the
maximum speed a tire is certified to carry a load.
Speed ratings range from A to Z.

5-66

Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the
tire pressing outward on each square inch of the
tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds per
square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
Accessory Weight: This means the combined
weight of optional accessories. Some examples of
optional accessories are, automatic transmission,
power steering, power brakes, power windows,
power seats, and air conditioning.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height
to its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is
located between the plies and the tread. Cords
may be made from steel or other reinforcing
materials.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies
are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees
to the centerline of the tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure
in a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi)
or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat
from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 5-69.
Curb Weight: The weight of a motor vehicle with
standard and optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, but
without passengers and cargo.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall
of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance
with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)
motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN), an
alphanumeric designator which can also identify the
tire manufacturer, production plant, brand, and date
of production.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. See
Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-22.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
front axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on
page 4-22.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear
axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-22.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of
an asymmetrical tire, that must always face
outward when mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger
vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from
1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying
capacity of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air
pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated.
The maximum air pressure is molded onto the
sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire
at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for
that tire.

5-67

Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of
curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity
weight, and production options weight.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of
occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied
by 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-22.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating
positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that
faces outward when mounted on a vehicle.
The side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bears
white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,
and/or model name molding that is higher or
deeper than the same moldings on the other
sidewall of the tire.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
passenger cars and some light duty trucks and
multipurpose vehicles.

5-68

Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation
pressure as shown on the tire placard. See
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-69 and Loading
Your Vehicle on page 4-22.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the
ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at
90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which
the tire beads are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread
and the bead.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to
a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a
tire can operate.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the
road surface. The amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into
contact with the road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called wear bars, that show across the tread of
a tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread
remains. See When It Is Time for New Tires on
page 5-77.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards): A tire information system that
provides consumers with ratings for a tire’s
traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings are
determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings are
molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
Tire Quality Grading on page 5-80.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of
designated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs
(68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See Loading
Your Vehicle on page 4-22.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an
individual tire due to curb weight, accessory
weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to
a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weight
and the original equipment tire size and
recommended inflation pressure. See “Tire and
Loading Information Label” under Loading
Your Vehicle on page 4-22.

Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to
operate effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It is
not. If your tires do not have enough air
(under-inflation), you can get the following:
• Too much flexing
• Too much heat
• Tire overloading
• Premature or irregular wear
• Poor handling
• Reduced fuel economy
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),
you can get the following:
• Unusual wear
• Poor handling
• Rough ride
• Needless damage from road hazards

5-69

A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to your vehicle. This label shows
your vehicle’s original equipment tires and the
correct inflation pressures for your tires when they
are cold. The recommended cold tire inflation
pressure, shown on the label, is the minimum
amount of air pressure needed to support your
vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.
For additional information regarding how much
weight your vehicle can carry, and an example of
the Tire and Loading Information label, see
Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-22. How you load
your vehicle affects vehicle handling and ride
comfort. Never load your vehicle with more weight
than it was designed to carry.

When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more. Do not
forget to check the compact spare tire, it should be
at 60 psi (420 kPa). For additional information
regarding the compact spare tire, see Compact
Spare Tire on page 5-109.

5-70

How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properly
inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires may
look properly inflated even when they are
under-inflated. Check the tire’s inflation pressure
when the tires are cold. Cold means your vehicle
has been sitting for at least three hours or driven no
more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.
Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a
pressure measurement. If the cold tire inflation
pressure matches the recommended pressure on
the Tire and Loading Information label, no further
adjustment is necessary. If the inflation pressure is
low, add air until you reach the recommended
amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on
the metal stem in the center of the tire valve.
Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt
and moisture.

Tire Pressure Monitor System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses radio
and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels. The
TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in your vehicle’s
tires and transmit tire pressure readings to a receiver
located in the vehicle.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure
label, you should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or
more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the
malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the
system may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for
a variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle
that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 5-72 for
additional information.

5-71

Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) and Industry and Science
Canada
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) operates on
a radio frequency and complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) operates on
a radio frequency and complies with RSS-210 of
Industry and Science Canada. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.

5-72

Tire Pressure Monitor Operation
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) is designed
to warn the driver when a low tire pressure condition
exists. TPMS sensors are mounted onto each tire and
wheel assembly, excluding the spare tire and wheel
assembly. The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in
the vehicle’s tires and transmits the tire pressure readings
to a receiver located in the vehicle.
When a low tire pressure
condition is detected, the
TPMS illuminates the low
tire pressure warning light,
located in the instrument
panel cluster.

At the same time a message to check the pressure in a
specific tire appears on the Driver Information center
(DIC) display. The low tire pressure warning light and
the DIC warning message come on at each ignition cycle
until the tires are inflated to the correct inflation pressure.
Using the DIC buttons, tire pressure readings can be
viewed by the driver. For additional information and
details about the DIC operation and displays see DIC
Operation and Displays (Uplevel DIC with Trip Computer)
on page 3-55 or DIC Operation and Displays (Base Level
DIC) on page 3-62 and DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 3-67.
The low tire pressure warning light may come on in cool
weather when the vehicle is first started, and then turn
off as you start to drive. This could be an early indicator
that the air pressure in the tire(s) are getting low and
need to be inflated to the proper pressure.

A tire and Loading Information label, attached to your
vehicle, shows the size of your vehicle’s original
equipment tires and the correct inflation pressure for your
vehicle’s tires when they are cold. See Loading Your
Vehicle on page 4-22, for an example of the Tire and
Loading Information label and its location on your vehicle.
Also see Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-69.
Your vehicle’s TPMS system can warn you about a low
tire pressure condition but it does not replace normal
tire maintenance. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-75 and Tires on page 5-62.
Your vehicle, when new, may have included a
factory-installed Tire Inflator Kit. This kit uses a GM
approved liquid tire sealant. See Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit (GXP) on page 5-86.
Notice: Using non-approved tire sealants could
damage the Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensors. TPMS sensor damage caused by using
an incorrect tire sealant is not covered by the
vehicle warranty. Always use the GM approved tire
sealant available through your dealer/retailer.

5-73

TPMS Malfunction Light and Message
The TPMS will not function properly if one or more of the
TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable. When the
system detects a malfunction, the low tire warning light
flashes for about one minute and then stays on for the
remainder of the ignition cycle. A DIC warning message
is also displayed. The low tire warning light and DIC
warning message come on at each ignition cycle until the
problem is corrected. Some of the conditions that can
cause the malfunction light and DIC message to
come on are:
• One of the road tires has been replaced with the
spare tire and wheel. The spare, if your vehicle has
one, does not have a TPMS sensor. The TPMS
malfunction light and DIC message should go off
once you re-install the road tire containing the
TPMS sensor.
• The TPMS sensor matching process was started but
not completed or not completed successfully after
rotating the vehicle’s tires. The DIC message and
TPMS malfunction light should go off once the TPMS
sensor matching process is performed successfully.
See “TPMS Sensor Matching Process” later in this
section.
• One or more TPMS sensors are missing or
damaged. The DIC message and the TPMS
malfunction light should go off when the TPMS
sensors are installed and the sensor matching
process is performed successfully. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
5-74

• Replacement tires or wheels do not match your
vehicle’s original equipment tires or wheels. Tire and
wheels other than those recommended for your
vehicle could prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. See Buying New Tires on page 5-78.
• Operating electronic devices or being near facilities
using radio wave frequencies similar to the TPMS
could cause the TPMS sensors to malfunction.
If the TPMS is not functioning it cannot detect or signal
a low tire condition. See your dealer/retailer for service if
the TPMS malfunction light and DIC message comes on
and stays on.

TPMS Sensor Matching Process
Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code.
Any time you replace one or more of the TPMS sensors
or rotate the vehicle’s tires, the identification codes need
to be matched to the new tire/wheel position. The sensors
are matched, to the tire/wheel positions, in the following
order: driver side front tire, passenger side front tire,
passenger side rear tire, and driver side rear tire using a
TPMS diagnostic tool. See your dealer for service.
The TPMS sensors may also be matched to each
tire/wheel position by increasing or decreasing the tire’s
air pressure. When increasing the tire’s pressure, do not
exceed the maximum inflation pressure indicated on the
tire’s sidewall. To decrease the tire’s air-pressure use the
pointed end of the valve cap, a pencil-style air pressure
gage, or a key.

You have two minutes to match each tire and wheel
position. If it takes longer than two minutes to match any
tire and wheel position, the matching process stops and
you need to start over.
The TPMS matching process is outlined below:
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON/RUN with the
engine off.
3. Press the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter’s
LOCK and UNLOCK buttons at the same time for
approximately five seconds. The horn sounds twice
to signal the receiver is in relearn mode.
4. Start with the driver side front tire.
5. Remove the valve cap from the tire’s valve stem.
Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing or
decreasing the tire’s air pressure for 10 seconds, or
until a horn chirp sounds. The horn chirp, which
may take up to 30 seconds to sound, confirms that
the sensor identification code has been matched to
the tire/wheel position.
6. Proceed to the passenger side front tire, and repeat
the procedure in Step 5.
7. Proceed to the passenger side rear tire, and repeat
the procedure in Step 5.

8. Proceed to the driver side rear tire, and repeat the
procedure in Step 5. The horn sounds two times to
indicate the sensor identification code has been
matched to the driver side rear tire, and the TPMS
sensor matching process is no longer active.
9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK/OFF.
10. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure
level as indicated on the tire and loading
information label.
11. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems.

Tire Inspection and Rotation
We recommend that you regularly inspect your
vehicle’s tires, including the spare tire, for signs of
wear or damage. See When It Is Time for New
Tires on page 5-77 for more information.
Tire rotation is not recommended if your vehicle is
a GXP model equipped with P255/45R18 size tires
on the front wheels and P225/50R18 size tires on
the rear wheels. Different tire sizes front to rear
should not be rotated.
Tire rotation is recommended if the original
equipment tires installed on your vehicle are of the
same size and type on all four tire/wheel positions.
Original equipment tires of the same size and type
should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km). See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4.
5-75

The purpose of a regular tire rotation is to achieve
a uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. This will
ensure that your vehicle continues to perform most
like it did when the tires were new.
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your
vehicle’s tires as soon as possible and check the
wheel alignment. Also check for damaged tires
or wheels. See When It Is Time for New Tires on
page 5-77 and Wheel Replacement on page 5-82
for more information.

After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front
and rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label, and reset the Tire
Pressure Monitor System. See Tire Pressure
Monitor System on page 5-71 for additional
information.
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly
tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under
Capacities and Specifications on page 5-128.

{CAUTION:

Rotation Pattern for Non-GXP Tires Only

The correct rotation pattern shown here is only for
non-GXP tires.
Do not include a compact spare tire, if your
vehicle has one, in the vehicle’s tire rotation.
5-76

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When
you change a wheel, remove any rust or
dirt from places where the wheel attaches
to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can
use a cloth or a paper towel to do this; but
be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later,
if needed, to get all the rust or dirt off.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-96.

When It Is Time for New Tires
Various factors, such as maintenance, temperatures,
driving speeds, vehicle loading, and road conditions
influence when you need new tires.
One way to tell when it is
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of tread
remaining.

You need new tires if any of the following statements
are true:

• You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.

• You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.

• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.

• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage that
cannot be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
The rubber in tires degrades over time, even if they are
not being used. This is also true for the spare tire, if
your vehicle has one. Multiple conditions affect how fast
this aging takes place, including temperatures, loading
conditions, and inflation pressure maintenance. With
proper care and maintenance tires will typically wear out
before they degrade due to age. If you are unsure about
the need to replace your tires as they get older, consult
the tire manufacturer for more information.

5-77

Buying New Tires
GM has developed and matched specific tires for
your vehicle. The original equipment tires installed
on your vehicle, when it was new, were designed to
meet General Motors Tire Performance Criteria
Specification (TPC Spec) system rating. If you need
replacement tires, GM strongly recommends that
you get tires with the same TPC Spec rating. This
way, your vehicle will continue to have tires that are
designed to give the same performance and vehicle
safety, during normal use, as the original tires.
GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over
a dozen critical specifications that impact the
overall performance of your vehicle, including brake
system performance, ride and handling, traction
control, and tire pressure monitoring performance.
GM’s TPC Spec number is molded onto the tire’s
sidewall near the tire size. If the tires have an
all-season tread design, the TPC Spec number will
be followed by an MS for mud and snow. See Tire
Sidewall Labeling on page 5-63 for additional
information.

5-78

GM recommends replacing tires in sets of four.
This is because uniform tread depth on all tires will
help keep your vehicle performing most like it did
when the tires were new. Replacing less than a full
set of tires can affect the braking and handling
performance of your vehicle. See Tire Inspection
and Rotation on page 5-75 for information on
proper tire rotation.

{CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose
control while driving. If you mix tires of
different sizes (other than those originally
installed on your vehicle), brands, or types
(radial and bias-belted tires), the vehicle
may not handle properly, and you could
have a crash. Using tires of different sizes
(other than those originally installed on
your vehicle) may also cause damage to
your vehicle. Be sure to use the correct
size, brand, and type tires on all wheels.
If your vehicle has a compact spare tire, it
is all right to drive your vehicle with the
compact spare temporarily. It was
developed for use on your vehicle. See
Compact Spare Tire on page 5-109.

{CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle,
the wheel rim flanges could develop
cracks after many miles of driving. A tire
and/or wheel could fail suddenly, causing a
crash. Use only radial-ply tires with the
wheels on your vehicle.
If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with those
that do not have a TPC Spec number, make sure
they are the same size, load range, speed rating,
and construction type (radial and bias-belted tires)
as your vehicle’s original tires.

Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring
system could give an inaccurate low-pressure
warning if non-TPC Spec rated tires are installed
on your vehicle. Non-TPC Spec rated tires may
give a low-pressure warning that is higher or lower
than the proper warning level you would get with
TPC Spec rated tires. See Tire Pressure Monitor
System on page 5-71.
Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed
on the Tire and Loading Information Label.
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-22, for more
information about the Tire and Loading Information
Label and its location on your vehicle.

5-79

Different Size Tires and Wheels

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than
your original equipment wheels and tires, this may affect
the way your vehicle performs, including its braking, ride
and handling characteristics, stability, and resistance to
rollover. Additionally, if your vehicle has electronic
systems such as, anti-lock brakes, traction control, and
electronic stability control, the performance of these
systems can be affected.

Quality grades can be found where applicable on
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:

{CAUTION:
If you add different sized wheels, your vehicle
may not provide an acceptable level of
performance and safety if tires not
recommended for those wheels are selected.
You may increase the chance that you will
crash and suffer serious injury. Only use GM
specific wheel and tire systems developed for
your vehicle, and have them properly installed
by a GM certified technician.
See Buying New Tires on page 5-78 and Accessories
and Modifications on page 5-3 for additional information.

5-80

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), which
grades tires by treadwear, traction, and
temperature performance. This applies only to
vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are
molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver, or temporary use spare
tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some
limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors
passenger cars and light trucks may vary with
respect to these grades, they must also conform
to federal safety requirements and additional
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)
standards.

Treadwear

Temperature – A, B, C

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and a half (1.5) times
as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road characteristics
and climate.

Traction – AA, A, B, C

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA,
A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s
ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
may have poor traction performance.

Warning: The temperature grade for this tire
is established for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.

Warning: The traction grade assigned to this
tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.

5-81

Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance

Wheel Replacement

The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned
and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the
longest tire life and best overall performance.
Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire balancing will
not be necessary on a regular basis. However, if you
notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling to one
side or the other, the alignment might need to be
checked. If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving
on a smooth road, the tires and wheels might need to be
rebalanced. See your dealer/retailer for proper diagnosis.

Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the
wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts should be replaced.
If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum
wheels, which can sometimes be repaired). See your
dealer/retailer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer/retailer will know the kind of wheel
you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset, and be mounted the
same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts,
wheel nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensors, replace them only with new GM original
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the
right wheel, wheel bolts, wheel nuts, and TPMS sensors
for your vehicle.

5-82

Used Replacement Wheels

{CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel
bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the braking and
handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose
air and make you lose control. You could have
a collision in which you or others could be
injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel
bolts, and wheel nuts for replacement.

{CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You cannot know how it has been
used or how far it has been driven. It could fail
suddenly and cause a crash. If you have to
replace a wheel, use a new GM original
equipment wheel.

Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance, and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-96 for more
information.

5-83

Tire Chains

CAUTION:

{CAUTION:
If your vehicle has P225/55R17, P255/45R18 or
P225/50R18 size tires, do not use tire chains,
there is not enough clearance.
Tire chains used on a vehicle without the
proper amount of clearance can cause damage
to the brakes, suspension or other vehicle
parts. The area damaged by the tire chains
could cause you to lose control of your vehicle
and you or others may be injured in a crash.
Use another type of traction device only if its
manufacturer recommends it for use on your
vehicle and tire size combination and road
conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s
instructions.
CAUTION:

5-84

(Continued)

(Continued)

To help avoid damage to your vehicle, drive
slowly, readjust or remove the device if it is
contacting your vehicle, and do not spin your
wheels.
If you do find traction devices that will fit,
install them on the front tires.
Notice: If your vehicle does not have P225/55R17,
P255/45R18 or P225/50R18 size tires, use tire chains
only where legal and only when you must. Use only
SAE Class S-type chains that are the proper size for
your tires. Install them on the front tires and tighten
them as tightly as possible with the ends securely
fastened. Drive slowly and follow the chain
manufacturer’s instructions. If you can hear the
chains contacting your vehicle, stop and retighten
them. If the contact continues, slow down until it
stops. Driving too fast or spinning the wheels with
chains on will damage your vehicle.

If a Tire Goes Flat
It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving,
especially if you maintain your tires properly. See Tires
on page 5-62. If air goes out of a tire, it is much more
likely to leak out slowly. But if you should ever have a
blowout, here are a few tips about what to expect and
what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you’d use in a
skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by
steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be
very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.

If a tire goes flat, and your vehicle has a spare tire, see
Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-96. This information
shows you how to use your vehicle’s tire changing
equipment and how to change a flat tire safely.

{CAUTION:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without
the appropriate safety equipment and training.
The jack provided with your vehicle is
designed only for changing a flat tire. If it is
used for anything else, you or others could be
badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off
the jack. Use the jack provided with your
vehicle only for changing a flat tire.

5-85

If a Tire Goes Flat (GXP)
GXP models have no spare tire, no tire changing
equipment, and no place for storing a spare or flat tire.
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place and stopping.
Then do this:
1. Turn on the hazard warning flashers. See Hazard
Warning Flashers on page 3-6.
2. Park your vehicle. Set the parking brake firmly and
put the shift lever in PARK (P). See Shifting Into
PARK (P) on page 2-34 for additional information.
3. Turn off the engine.
4. Inspect the flat tire.
If the tire has been separated from the wheel or has
damaged sidewalls or large tears that allow rapid air
loss, call a tire repair facility. See Roadside Assistance
Program on page 7-6.
If the flat tire is due to a slow leak caused by a nail or
other similar road hazard, the tire inflator kit may be
used to temporarily repair the damaged tire. The kit uses
a liquid tire sealant to seal small punctures in the tread
area of the tire. The flat tire is then inflated to at least
30 psi (207 kPa) and driven to evenly distribute the tire
sealant. The tire pressure is checked after driving for a
maximum of five miles (8.0 km) to see if the slow leak has
been stopped. If the tire pressure is 19 psi (131 kPa) or
more, inflate the tire up to the standard operating
5-86

pressure as shown on the tire and loading information
label. This label is attached to the vehicle’s center-pillar
below the driver’s door latch. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-69.
Notice: If the tire pressure has dropped below
19 psi (131 kPa), the vehicle should not be driven.
Damage to the tire may be severe and the sealant
will not be effective. Contact Roadside Assistance,
see Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-6.
You should have the damaged tire repaired as soon as
possible. The tire sealant is a temporary repair only.
If the tire has been filled with tire sealant, take the tire to
a GM dealer/retailer for inspection and repair. See
Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit (GXP) on page 5-86
for additional information.

Tire Sealant and Compressor
Kit (GXP)
Your vehicle may have a tire inflator kit. The kit uses a
liquid tire sealant and air at the same time to seal small
punctures in the tread area of the tire. Be sure to read
and follow all the tire inflator kit instructions.

The kit includes:

If the flat tire is due to a slow leak caused by a nail or
other similar road hazard, the tire inflator kit may
be used to temporarily repair the damaged tire.
After temporarily repairing a tire using the tire inflator kit,
it is recommended to take your vehicle to your
dealer/retailer within 100 miles (161 kilometers) of
driving to have the tire inspected and repaired. If the
sealant is not removed from the tire within a 100 miles
(161 kilometers) of driving, it is more likely that the
tire and tire pressure monitoring sensor may get
damaged and have to be replaced.

E. Air Pressure Gage
A. Air Compressor
B. Tire Sealant Canister F. Air Compressor
Inflator Hose
C. Air Compressor
G. Sealant Filling Hose
Accessory Plug
D. On/Off Switch

5-87

Accessing the Tire Inflator Kit
To access the tire inflator kit:
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 2-14 for more
information.
2. Locate the tire inflator kit by lifting up the carpet.
3. Remove the inflator kit
cover by turning the
center nut
counterclockwise.

4. Remove the inflator kit by pulling it straight out of
the foam container.

5-88

Tire Sealant

Using the Tire Inflator Kit

The kit contains a liquid sealant that when injected into
a flat tire, may temporarily repair nail holes or cuts in the
tread area of the tire. The tire sealant cannot repair tire
damage caused while driving on a flat tire or a tire that
has had a “blow out” or a tire that has punctures in the
sidewall areas. The tire sealant solution is to be used for
a single tire and can only be used once.

To use the tire inflator kit:

Check the tire sealant expiration date on the sealant
canister. The sealant may not be as effective beyond the
expiration date. If needed, see your dealer/retailer for
a replacement canister.
After temporarily repairing a tire using the tire sealant,
take your vehicle to your dealer/retailer to have the
tire inspected and repaired.

1. Place the inflator kit on the ground and unwrap the
sealant filling hose from the compressor.
2. Remove the air compressor accessory plug from
the unit. To do this, pull the top portion of the
wrapped cord out first, then the bottom, then unsnap
the plug. Do not insert the plug into an accessory
outlet yet.
3. Remove the valve stem cap from the flat tire by
turning it counterclockwise.
If an object, such as a nail, has penetrated the tire,
do not remove it.

5-89

{CAUTION:
Idling the engine in a closed-in place or with
the climate control system off can cause
deadly carbon monoxide (CO). See Engine
Exhaust on page 2-36.
6. Start the vehicle. See Starting the Engine on
page 2-25 for more information. The vehicle must be
running while using the air compressor.

{CAUTION:
4. Attach the sealant filling hose (A) onto the tire valve
stem. Turn it clockwise until it is tight.
Make sure the inflator kit on/off switch (B) is in the
O (off) position.
5. Plug the air compressor accessory plug (C) into an
accessory power outlet in the vehicle. See
Accessory Power Outlet(s) on page 3-26 for more
information.

5-90

Inflating something too much can make it
explode, and you or others could be injured.
Be sure to read the inflator instructions, and
inflate the tire to its recommended pressure.
Do not exceed 36 psi (248 kPa).
7. Move the inflator kit switch to the I (on) position.
The inflator kit will force sealant and air into the
tire. Sealant may leak from the puncture hole until
the vehicle is driven and the hole has sealed.

8. Make sure there is a proper connection between
the tire valve stem and the sealant filling hose by
looking at the air pressure gage. If there is not a
pressure reading while the compressor is running,
the connection between the inflator kit and the
tire is bad.
Check the attachment between the sealant filling
hose and the tire valve stem.
9. Inflate the tire up to the recommended inflation
pressure, found on the Tire and Loading Information
label located on the vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar)
below the vehicle’s door latch, using the air pressure
gage on the top of the unit as a guide.
The pressure gage reading is slightly high while the
compressor is on. Turn the compressor off to get
an accurate pressure reading.

10. Move the inflator kit switch to the O (off) position
once the correct tire pressure is obtained.
11. Turn off the engine.
12. Unplug the air compressor accessory plug from the
accessory power outlet in the vehicle.
13. Disconnect the sealant filling hose from the tire
valve stem, by turning it counterclockwise, and
replace the tire valve stem cap.
Be careful when handling the tire inflator
components as they may be hot after usage.
14. Wrap the sealant filling hose around the air
compressor channel to stow it in its original location.

Notice: If the recommended pressure cannot be
reached after 15 minutes, the vehicle should not be
driven. The tire is too severely damaged and
cannot be inflated or sealed with the tire sealant
and compressor kit. Remove the air compressor
accessory plug from the accessory power outlet and
unscrew the sealant/air hose from the tire valve or
tire pressure monitoring sensor valve. See Roadside
Assistance Program on page 7-6.

5-91

15. Stow the air compressor accessory plug back in the
air compressor. To do this, wrap the air compressor
accessory plug, snap in the plug, and then push in
the bottom and then the top of the wrapped air
compressor accessory plug.
16. If the flat tire was able
to inflate to the
recommended inflation
pressure, remove the
maximum speed label
from the sealant
canister.

{CAUTION:
Storing the tire sealant and compressor kit or
other equipment in the passenger
compartment of the vehicle could cause injury.
In a sudden stop or collision, loose equipment
could strike someone. Store the tire sealant
and compressor kit in the proper place.

17. Return the equipment to the proper storage location
in the trunk of your vehicle.

Place it in a highly visible location such as the
inside of the upper left corner of the windshield or
to the face of the radio/clock.
The maximum speed label reminds you to drive
cautiously and not to exceed 55 mph (90 km/h) until
you have the damaged tire inspected and repaired.

5-92

18. Immediately drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) to
distribute the sealant evenly in the tire. Stop at a
safe location and check the tire pressure. Refer to
Steps 1 through 8 under “Using the Air Compressor
without Sealant” next in this section. If the tire
pressure has fallen more than 10 psi (68 kPa) below
the recommended inflation pressure, stop driving
the vehicle. The tire is too damaged for the sealant to
work. See Roadside Assistance Program on
page 7-6.
If the tire pressure has not dropped more than
10 psi (68 kPa) from the recommended inflation
pressure, you can inflate the tire back up to the
recommended inflation pressure.

19. Dispose of the sealant canister at your
dealer/retailer or in accordance with your local state
codes and practices.
After using the sealant canister, replace it with a
new canister from your dealer/retailer.
20. After temporarily repairing a tire with the emergency
flat tire repair kit, take your vehicle to your
dealer/retailer to have the tire inspected and
repaired.

Using the Air Compressor without
Sealant
To use the air compressor by itself to inflate a tire:
1. Remove the air compressor accessory plug from
the air compressor.

2. Unlock the air compressor hose from the sealant
canister by pulling up on the lever.
3. Pull the air compressor inflator hose from the
sealant canister.
4. Push the air compressor inflator hose onto the tire
valve stem and push the lever down to secure
in place.

5-93

5. Plug the air compressor accessory plug into an
accessory power outlet in the vehicle. See
Accessory Power Outlet(s) on page 3-26 for more
information.

{CAUTION:
Idling the engine in a closed-in place or with
the climate control system off can cause
deadly carbon monoxide (CO). See Engine
Exhaust on page 2-36.
6. Start the vehicle. See Starting the Engine on
page 2-25 for more information. The vehicle must be
running while using the air compressor.

5-94

{CAUTION:
Inflating something too much can make it
explode, and you or others could be injured.
Be sure to read the inflator instructions, and
inflate the tire to its recommended pressure.
Do not exceed 36 psi (248 kPa).
7. Move the inflator kit switch to the I (on) position.
8. Make sure there is a proper connection between the
tire valve stem and the air compressor hose by
looking at the air pressure gage. If there is not a
pressure reading while the compressor is running,
the connection between the inflator kit and the
tire is bad.
Check the attachment between the air compressor
hose and the tire valve stem.

9. Inflate the tire up to the recommended inflation
pressure using the air pressure gage on the top
of the unit as a guide.
10. Turn off the air compressor by moving the switch to
the O (off) position.

Removal and Installation of the Sealant
Canister
To remove the sealant canister:

{CAUTION:
Storing the tire sealant and compressor kit or
other equipment in the passenger
compartment of the vehicle could cause injury.
In a sudden stop or collision, loose equipment
could strike someone. Store the tire sealant
and compressor kit in the proper place.
11. Disconnect the compressor inflator hose and wrap
the hose in the bottom of the inflator kit.
12. Place the equipment in the original location in the
trunk of your vehicle.

1. Unlock the air compressor inflator hose from the
sealant canister by pulling the lever up.
2. Disconnect the air compressor inflator hose from
the sealant canister.
3. Unwrap the sealant filling hose from the
compressor.

5-95

To install a new sealant canister:
1. Align the sealant filling hose with the slot in the air
compressor.
2. Push the sealant canister down and turn it
clockwise.
3. Wrap the sealant filling hose around the air
compressor channel to stow it in its original location.
4. Push the air compressor inflator hose onto the
sealant canister inlet and push the lever down.

Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your vehicle’s
hazard warning flashers. See Hazard Warning Flashers
on page 3-6 for more information.
4. Turn the sealant canister so the inflator filling hose
is aligned with the slot in the compressor.
5. Lift the sealant canister from the air compressor
and replace with a new sealant canister. See
your dealer/retailer for more information.

5-96

{CAUTION:

When your vehicle has a flat tire, use the following
example as a guide to assist you in the placement of
wheel blocks.

Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you
or other people. You and they could be badly
injured or even killed. Find a level place to
change your tire. To help prevent the vehicle
from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).
3. Turn off the engine and do not restart
while the vehicle is raised.
4. Do not allow passengers to remain in the
vehicle.
To be even more certain the vehicle will not
move, you should put blocks at the front and
rear of the tire farthest away from the one
being changed. That would be the tire, on the
other side, at the opposite end of the vehicle.

The following information tells you how to use the jack
and change a tire.

5-97

Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
4. Turn the center nut on
the compact spare tire
cover counterclockwise
to remove it.

The equipment needed to change a tire is located in
the trunk.
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 2-14 for more
information.
2. Remove the convenience net, if equipped, by
removing the net hook attachments.
3. Lift up the carpet.

5. Remove the cover.
6. Remove the compact spare tire. See Compact
Spare Tire on page 5-109 for more information.

5-98

7. Turn the nut holding the jack counterclockwise and
remove it. Then remove the jack and wrench.

8. The tools you will be using include the jack (A),
extension and protector/guide (B) and the wheel
wrench (C).

5-99

Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
Your vehicle may have aluminum wheels. If so, you will
see exposed stainless steel wheel nuts. Use the wheel
wrench to loosen all the wheel nuts. Do not remove
them yet.
Or, your vehicle may have steel wheel covers.

5-100

To remove the steel wheel covers and wheel nut caps,
loosen the plastic nut caps with the wheel wrench in a
counterclockwise direction. If needed, you can finish
loosening them with your fingers. The plastic nut caps will
not come off.
Use the flat end of the wheel wrench and pry along the
edge of the cover until it comes off. The edge of the
wheel cover could be sharp, so do not try to remove it
with your bare hands. Do not drop the cover or lay it
face down, as it could become scratched or damaged.
Store the wheel cover in the trunk until the flat tire is
repaired or replaced.

Once you have removed the wheel cover, use the
following procedure to remove the flat tire and install the
spare tire.
1. It is recommended that you do a safety check
before preceding. See Changing a Flat Tire on
page 5-96 for more information.
2. Set the park brake
firmly.
3. Turn the wheel wrench
once on each wheel
nut to loosen them. Do
not remove them yet.

4. Find the jacking location located on the underside
of the rocker trim using the diagram. For jacking at
the vehicle’s front location, put the jack lift head (C)
about 6 inches (15 cm) from the rear edge of the
front wheel opening (B). Line up the jack with the
arrow (A) as shown.

5-101

{CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get
under a vehicle when it is supported only
by a jack.

{CAUTION:

For jacking at the vehicle’s rear location, put the
jack lift head (B) about 9 inches (23 cm) from the
front edge of the rear wheel opening (C). Line up the
jack with the arrow (A) as shown.
5. Put the compact spare tire near you.

5-102

Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the
jack lift head into the proper location before
raising the vehicle.

{CAUTION:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without
the appropriate safety equipment and training.
The jack provided with your vehicle is
designed only for changing a flat tire. If it is
used for anything else, you or others could be
badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off the
jack. Use the jack provided with your vehicle
only for changing a flat tire.
6. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle
clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the
ground for the compact spare tire to attach to the
vehicle.
7. Remove all wheel nuts and take off the flat tire.

5-103

{CAUTION:

8. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces
and spare wheel.

Rust or dirt on a wheel or other parts to which
it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts
become loose and eventually the wheel could
come off and cause a crash. Always remove all
rust and dirt from wheels and other parts.

9. Install the compact spare tire.

5-104

{CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts.
Because the nuts might come loose. The
vehicle’s wheel could fall off, causing a crash.

10. Reinstall the wheel
nuts with the rounded
end of the nuts toward
the wheel. Tighten each
nut by hand until the
wheel is held against
the hub.

11. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.

5-105

{CAUTION:
Incorrect or improperly tightened wheel nuts
can cause the wheel to come loose and even
come off. This could lead to a crash. If you
have to replace them, be sure to get new
original equipment wheel nuts. Stop
somewhere as soon as you can and have the
nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the
proper torque specification. See Capacities and
Specifications on page 5-128 for wheel nut
torque specification.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification. See Capacities and
Specifications on page 5-128 for the wheel nut
torque specification.

5-106

12. Tighten the wheel nuts
firmly in a crisscross
sequence as shown.

Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on your vehicle’s
compact spare. If you try to put a wheel cover
on the compact spare, the cover or the spare could
be damaged.

Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and
Tools

{CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,
loose equipment could strike someone.
Store all these in the proper place.
After the compact spare tire is put on the vehicle, store
the flat tire in the trunk. Use the following procedure
to secure it in the trunk. When storing a full-size tire, use
the extension and protector/guide, located in the foam
holder, to help avoid wheel surface damage.

To store a full-size tire:
1. Install the tools in their original location in the trunk
area and secure.
2. Place the tire in the trunk with the valve stem facing
down, and the protector/guide placed through a
wheel bolt hole.
3. Remove the protector and attach the retainer
securely.
4. Place the protector/guide back in the foam holder
when putting the compact spare back in the trunk.
Store the cover as far forward as possible.
The compact spare tire is for temporary use only.
Replace the compact spare tire with a full-size tire as
soon as possible. See Compact Spare Tire on
page 5-109 for more information. Use the following as a
guide for storing the compact spare tire and tools.

5-107

A. Retainer
B. Spare Tire
C. Protector
D. Bolt Extension
E. Nut
F. Jack
G. Wheel Wrench
H. Foam Holder
I. Bolt Screw

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.

Retainer
Cover
Compact Spare Tire
Nut
Jack
Wheel Wrench
Extension and
Protective Guide
H. Foam Holder
I. Bolt Screw

Compact Spare Tire

5-108

Full-Sized Spare Tire

Compact Spare Tire
Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated when
the vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time.
Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should be
60 psi (420 kPa).
After installing the compact spare on the vehicle, you
should stop as soon as possible and make sure the
spare tire is correctly inflated. The compact spare is
made to perform well at speeds up to 65 mph (105 km/h)
for distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you can
finish your trip and have the full-size tire repaired or
replaced where you want. You must calibrate the tire
inflation monitor system, if your vehicle has this feature,
after installing or removing the compact spare. See Tire
Pressure Monitor System on page 5-71. The system may
not work correctly when the compact spare is installed on
the vehicle. Of course, it’s best to replace the spare with a
full-size tire as soon as you can. The spare will last longer
and be in good shape in case you need it again.
Notice: When the compact spare is installed, do
not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
with guide rails. The compact spare can get
caught on the rails. That can damage the tire and
wheel, and maybe other parts of your vehicle.

Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles.
And do not mix the compact spare tire or wheel with
other wheels or tires. They will not fit. Keep the
spare tire and its wheel together.
Notice: Tire chains will not fit your compact spare.
Using them can damage your vehicle and can
damage the chains too. Do not use tire chains on
your compact spare.

Appearance Care
Interior Cleaning
Your vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best if it is
cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust and dirt
can accumulate on your upholstery. Dirt can damage
carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces. Regular
vacuuming is recommended to remove particles from
your upholstery. It is important to keep your upholstery
from becoming and remaining heavily soiled. Soils should
be removed as quickly as possible. Your vehicle’s interior
may experience extremes of heat that could cause stains
to set rapidly.
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments
that transfer color to your home furnishings may also
transfer color to your vehicle’s interior.
5-109

When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only use cleaners
specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned.
Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on
surfaces for which they were not intended. Use glass
cleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental over-spray
from other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,
apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.
Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on your vehicle, you could scratch
the glass and/or cause damage to the rear window
defogger. When cleaning the glass on your vehicle,
use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner.
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
concentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space. Before
using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety
instructions on the label. While cleaning your vehicle’s
interior, maintain adequate ventilation by opening your
vehicle’s doors and windows.
Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs
using a small brush with soft bristles.

Your dealer/retailer has a product for cleaning your
vehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, you can
also obtain a product from your dealer/retailer to remove
odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.
Do not clean your vehicle using:

• A knife or any other sharp object to remove a soil
from any interior surface.

• A stiff brush. It can cause damage to your vehicle’s
interior surfaces.

• Heavy pressure or aggressive rubbing with a
cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure can damage
your interior and does not improve the effectiveness
of soil removal.

• Laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with
degreasers can leave residue that streaks and
attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops per
gallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide. Use only
mild, neutral-pH soaps.

• Too much cleaner that saturates the upholstery.
• Organic solvents such as naptha, alcohol, etc. that
can damage your vehicle’s interior.

5-110

Fabric/Carpet

Most stains can be removed with club soda water.
To clean, use the following instructions:

Cleaning Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and loose
dirt. Wipe vinyl, leather, plastic, and painted surfaces
with a clean, damp cloth.
Your dealer/retailer has cleaners for the cleaning of
fabric and carpet. They will clean normal spots and
stains very well.
®

If the vehicle has the Ultra Lux suede fabric, follow the
listed procedures except do not use any solvents or dry
cleaning products.
Here are some cleaning tips:

• Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.
• Clean up stains as soon as you can, before
they set.

1. For liquids: blot with a clean, soft white cloth.
For solids: remove as much as possible and
then vacuum or brush.
2. Apply club soda water to a clean, soft white cloth.
Do not over-saturate; the cloth should not
drip water.
3. Clean the entire area. Avoid getting the fabric
too wet.
4. Start cleaning from the seams into the stain to
avoid a ring effect.
5. Continue cleaning, using a clean area of the cloth
each time it becomes soiled.
6. When the stain is removed, blot the cleaned area
with another dry clean, soft white cloth.

• Carefully scrape off any excess stain.
• Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a clean
area often. A soft brush may be used if stains are
stubborn.

• To avoid forming a ring on fabric after spot cleaning,
clean the entire area immediately or it will set.

5-111

Using Cleaner on Fabric
1. First, try the cleaner in an inconspicuous area to
make sure the cleaner does not affect the color of
the fabric.
2. For liquids: blot the stain with a clean, soft
white cloth.
For solids: remove as much as possible and then
vacuum or brush.
3. Spray a small amount of the cleaner onto a clean,
soft white cloth. Do not apply spray directly to
the fabric.
4. Start cleaning from the seams into the stain to
avoid a ring effect.
5. Continue cleaning, using a clean area of the cloth
each time it becomes soiled.
6. When the stain is removed, blot the cleaned area
with another dry clean, soft white cloth.
7. If the cleaner leaves a ring effect, follow up with the
club soda water instructions given earlier in this
section.

Special Fabric Cleaning Problems
Stains caused by such things as catsup, coffee, tea,
milk, fruit, fruit juice, jelly, cheese, chocolate, vomit,
urine, and blood can be removed using the club soda
water instructions given earlier in this section.
5-112

If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine, treat the
area with a water and baking soda solution: 1 teaspoon
(5 ml) of baking soda to 1 cup (250 ml) of lukewarm
water. Let dry.
Stains caused by oil and grease can be cleaned with an
approved GM cleaner and a clean, white cloth.
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain.
2. Clean with cool water and allow to dry completely.
3. If a stain remains, follow the cleaner instructions
described earlier.

Leather
A soft cloth dampened with water can be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary, a
soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be
used. Allow the leather to dry naturally. Do not use heat
to dry. Never use steam to clean leather. Never use spot
lifters or spot removers on leather. Many commercial
leather cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve
and protect leather may permanently change the
appearance and feel of your leather and are not
recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based
products, or those containing organic solvents to clean
your vehicle’s interior because they can alter the
appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform
manner. Never use shoe polish on leather.

Ultra Lux Suede
Cleaning Ultra Lux Suede
Use a mild solution of lukewarm water and a neutral
dish soap on a soft cloth or sponge. For the following
stains, follow these instructions:
Coffee, Tea, and Milk: Blot with a clean, soft, white
cloth. Then clean with mild soapy water and a clean
white cloth.
Cosmetics: Clean with mild soapy water and a clean
white cloth.
Jelly, Syrup, and Fruit: Remove most of the solids,
then clean with warm tap water and a clean white cloth.
Oil and Grease: Sprinkle baking soda on the spot,
brush, then wipe with a clean white cloth.

Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary, a
clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can
be used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never use spot
lifters or removers on plastic surfaces. Many commercial
cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve and
protect soft plastic surfaces may permanently change the
appearance and feel of your interior and are not
recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based
products, or those containing organic solvents to clean
your vehicle’s interior because they can alter the
appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform
manner.
Some commercial products may increase gloss on your
instrument panel. The increase in gloss may cause
annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it
difficult to see through the windshield under certain
conditions.

5-113

Care of Safety Belts

Washing Your Vehicle

Keep belts clean and dry.

The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to keep
it clean by washing it often.

{CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, it
may severely weaken them. In a crash, they
might not be able to provide adequate
protection. Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.

Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather frequent application may be required. See
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.

5-114

Notice: Certain cleaners contain chemicals that can
damage the emblems or nameplates on your
vehicle. Check the cleaning product label. If it states
that it should not be used on plastic parts, do not use
it on your vehicle or damage may occur and it would
not be covered by the warranty.
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Use a car
washing soap. Do not use cleaning agents that are
petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives, as
they can damage the paint, metal or plastic on your
vehicle. Approved cleaning products can be obtained
from your dealer/retailer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance
Materials on page 5-118. Follow all manufacturers’
directions regarding correct product usage, necessary
safety precautions and appropriate disposal of any
vehicle care product.
Rinse the vehicle well, before washing and after to
remove all cleaning agents completely. If they are
allowed to dry on the surface, they could stain.

Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton
towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter the
vehicle. Avoid using high pressure washes closer than
12 inches (30 cm) to the surface of the vehicle. Use of
power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa) can
result in damage or removal of paint and decals.

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car
washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle on
page 5-114.

Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the
paint finish. You can get approved cleaning products
from your dealer/retailer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance
Materials on page 5-118.
If your vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish, the
clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish.

Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may
damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on your vehicle.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,
can damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain on
painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible.
If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period
of years. You can help to keep the paint finish looking
new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.

Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually
needed. However, you may use chrome polish on
chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid damaging
protective trim, never use auto or chrome polish, steam
or caustic soap to clean aluminum. A coating of wax,
rubbed to high polish, is recommended for all bright
metal parts.
5-115

Windshield and Wiper Blades
Clean the outside of the windshield with glass cleaner.
Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or
paper towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or a
mild detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughly when
cleaning the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and a buildup
of vehicle wash/wax treatments may cause wiper
streaking. Replace the wiper blades if they are worn or
damaged.
Wipers can be damaged by:

•
•
•
•

Extreme dusty conditions
Sand and salt
Heat and sun
Snow and ice, without proper removal

Aluminum Wheels
Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,
abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners
that contain acid on aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels, you could damage the surface of the
wheel(s). The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Use only approved cleaners on aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels.

5-116

Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then
be applied.
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Use chrome polish on
chrome wheels only.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of the vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on
them because the surface could be damaged. Do not
use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an
automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire
cleaning brushes, you could damage the aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Never drive a vehicle
equipped with aluminum or chrome-plated wheels
through an automatic car wash that uses silicone
carbide tire cleaning brushes.

Tires

Finish Damage

To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.

Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the
finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal will
corrode quickly and may develop into major repair
expense.

Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on your vehicle may damage the paint
finish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing,
always wipe off any overspray from all painted
surfaces on your vehicle.

Sheet Metal Damage
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the
corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.

Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials available from your dealer/retailer. Larger
areas of finish damage can be corrected in your
dealer’s/retailer’s body and paint shop.

Underbody Maintenance
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of the
frame should be loosened before being flushed. Your
dealer/retailer or an underbody car washing system can
do this for you.

5-117

Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage can
take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations, and
small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, we will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.

Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Description
Polishing Cloth
Tar and Road Oil
Remover
Chrome Cleaner and
Polish
White Sidewall Tire
Cleaner
Vinyl Cleaner
Glass Cleaner
Chrome Wheel Cleaner
Finish Enhancer

5-118

Usage
Interior and exterior
polishing cloth.
Removes tar, road oil,
and asphalt.
Use on chrome or
stainless steel.
Removes soil and black
marks from whitewalls
and raised white lettering.
Cleans vinyl.
Removes dirt, grime,
smoke and fingerprints.
Removes dirt and grime
from chrome wheels.
Removes dust,
fingerprints, and surface
contaminants. Spray on
and wipe off.

Description
Swirl Remover Polish
Cleaner Wax
Foaming Tire Shine Low
Gloss

Wash Wax Concentrate

Spot Lifter

Odor Eliminator

Usage
Removes swirl marks, fine
scratches, and other light
surface contamination.
Removes light scratches
and protects finish.
Cleans, shines, and
protects tires. No wiping
necessary.
Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans and
lightly waxes.
Biodegradable and
phosphate free.
Quickly removes spots
and stains from carpets,
vinyl, and cloth
upholstery.
Odorless spray odor
eliminator used on fabrics,
vinyl, leather and carpet.

Vehicle Identification
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on
the driver side. You can see it if you look through the
windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.

Engine Identification
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code. This
code helps you identify your vehicle’s engine,
specifications, and replacement parts. See Capacities
and Specifications on page 5-128 for your vehicle’s
engine code.

5-119

Service Parts Identification Label

Electrical System

This label is in the trunk. It is very helpful if you ever
need to order parts. The label has the following
information:

Add-On Electrical Equipment

•
•
•
•

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Model designation
Paint information
Production options and special equipment

Do not remove this label from the vehicle.

Notice: Do not add anything electrical to your
vehicle unless you check with your dealer/retailer
first. Some electrical equipment can damage your
vehicle and the damage would not be covered by
your warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment can
keep other components from working as they should.
Add-on equipment can drain your vehicle’s battery, even
if your vehicle is not operating.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to your vehicle, see Servicing
Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-64.

Headlamp Wiring
The headlamp wiring is protected by fuses in the fuse
block. An electrical overload will cause the lamps to turn
off. If this happens, have your headlamp wiring checked
right away.

5-120

Windshield Wiper Fuses

Fuses and Circuit Breakers

The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit
breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy
snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor cools. If
the overload is caused by some electrical problem, have
it fixed.

The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers
and fusible thermal links. This greatly reduces the
chance of fires caused by electrical problems.

Power Windows and Other Power
Options
Circuit breakers in the fuse block protect the power
windows and other power accessories. When the current
load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens and closes,
protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed or
goes away.

Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size
and rating.
If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t have
a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the same
amperage. Just pick some feature of your vehicle that
you can get along without – like the radio or cigarette
lighter – and use its fuse, if it is the correct amperage.
Replace it as soon as you can.

5-121

Instrument Panel Fuse Block
Some fuses are in a fuse
block located on the end
of the instrument panel on
the passenger side.

To get to the fuse block lift up on the side panel. A fuse
usage chart is on the inside of this panel.

5-122

Fuse
RAP
SUN ROOF
CRUISE SW
PK LP
RR DEFOG
DR LK/TRUNK
ONSTAR/ALDL
CANISTER
PK LAMPS
RADIO/AMP
RFA/MOD
DISPLAYS

Usage
Retained Accessory Power
Sunroof
Cruise Switch
Parking Lamps
Rear Window Defogger
Door Lock/Trunk
Onstar®/Diagnostic Link
Fuel Tank Solenoid Canister
Parking Lamps
Radio Amplifier
Remote Function Activator (Remote
Keyless Entry)
Instrument Panel Displays/Head-Up
Display (HUD), Driver Information
Center (DIC)

Fuse
INT LIGHT
HVAC

Usage
Interior Lamps
Climate Controls
High Mounted Stop
CHMSL/BKUP Center
Lamp/Back-Up Lamps
PWR WDO
Power Windows
SPRING
Steering Wheel Control Switches
COIL 2
PWR SEAT Power Seat
Turn Signals/Hazard Warning
TURN/HAZ
Lamps
PWR MIRS
Power Mirrors
HTD SEAT
Heated Seat
To reinstall the end panel, position the lower section
with the edge of the instrument panel, and press the
sides of the panel until it snaps into place.

5-123

Underhood Fuse Block
The underhood fuse block
is located on the
passenger’s side of the
vehicle in the engine
compartment.

To remove the fuse block cover, press in on the tab at
the bottom of the cover and pull up.

3.8L V6 Engine
Fuses
1
2
3
4
5

5-124

Usage
Driver Side High-Beam Headlamp
Passenger Side High-Beam
Headlamp
Driver Side Low-Beam Headlamp
Passenger Side Low-Beam
Headlamp
Windshield Wipers/Washer

Fuses
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19

Usage
Washer/Regulated Voltage Control
Fog Lamps (Option)
Airbag
Accessory Power
Horn
Emission
Air Conditioning Clutch
Oxygen Sensor
Powertrain Control Module
Powertrain Control
Module/Electronic Throttle Control
Electronic Throttle Control
Display
Antilock Brake Solenoid

Fuses
20
21
22
23
24
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
56

Usage
Fuel Injection
Transmission Solenoid
Fuel Pump
Antilock Brakes
Electronic Ignition
Battery Main 1
Battery Main 2
Battery Main 3
Fan 1
Battery Main 4
Antilock Brake Motor
Fan 2
Starter
Air Pump

5-125

Relays
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
48
52
53
54
55

§

Usage
High-Beam Headlamps
Low-Beam Headlamps, Headlamp
Driver Module
Fog Lamps (Option)
Ignition 1
Air Conditioner Compressor
Horn
Powertrain
Fuel Pump
Fan 1
Fan 3
Windshield Wiper/High
Windshield Wiper
Fan 2
Crank
Blank
Blank
Blank
Fuse Puller
Air Conditioning Clutch

5.3L V8 Engine
Fuses
HVAC
FUEL/PUMP
AIRBAG/
DISPLAY
COMPASS
ABS
ETC/ECM
A/C CMPRSR

5-126

Usage
Climate Control System
Fuel Pump
Airbag, Display
Compass
Antilock Brake System
Electronic Throttle Control, Engine
Control Module
Air Conditioning Compressor

Fuses
INJ 1
ECM/TCM
TRANS
EMISSIONS1
ABS SOL
ECM IGN
INJ 2
EMISSIONS2
WPR
AUX PWR
WSW/RVC
LT LO BEAM
RT LO BEAM
FOG LAMPS
LT HI BEAM
HORN
RT HI BEAM

Usage
Injectors 1
Engine Control Module,
Transmission Control Module
Transmission
Emissions 1
Antilock Brake Solenoid
Engine Control Module, Ignition
Injectors 2
Emissions 2
Windshield Wipers
Auxiliary Power
Windshield Washer, Regulated
Voltage Control
Driver Side Low-Beam Headlamp
Passenger Side Low-Beam
Headlamp
Fog Lamps
Driver Side High-Beam Headlamp
Horn
Passenger Side High-Beam
Headlamp

Fuses
BATT 4
BATT 1
STRTR
ABS MTR
BATT 3
BATT 2
FAN 2
FAN 1

Usage
Battery 4
Battery 1
Starter
Antilock Brake System Motor
Battery 3
Battery 2
Cooling Fan 2
Cooling Fan 1

Relays
FUEL/PUMP
A/C CMPRSR
STRTR
PWR/TRN
FAN 3
FAN 2
FAN 1
HDM

Usage
Fuel Pump
Air Conditioning Compressor
Starter
Powertrain
Cooling Fan 3
Cooling Fan 2
Cooling Fan 1
Headlamp Driver Module

5-127

Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 6-12 for more information.
Application

Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
Automatic Transmission (Drain and Refill)

Capacities
English

Metric

For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
amount, see the refrigerant caution label located
under the hood. See your dealer/retailer for more
information.
7.4 qt

7.0 L

3.8LV6 Engine

11.2 qt

10.6 L

5.3L V8 Engine

13.3 qt

12.6 L

3.8L V6 Engine

4.5 qt

4.3 L

5.3L V8 Engine

6 qt

5.7 L

Cooling System Including Reservoir

Engine Oil with Filter

5-128

Capacities

Application

English

Metric

3.8L Engine (with NU6 emissions) sold new in CA, ME,
VT, NY, MA (see your dealer/retailer for bordering states)

17.0 gal

64.4 L

3.8L Engine (without NU6 emissions) sold new in all other
states (see your dealer/retailer for more information)

17.5 gal

66.2 L

5.3L V8 Engine sold new in all states

17.5 gal

66.2 L

Wheel Nut Torque

100 ft lb

140 Y

Fuel Tank

All capacities are approximate. When adding fluid, be sure to fill to the appropriate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.

Engine Specifications
Engine

VIN Code

Transmission

Spark Plug Gap

3.8 V6 Engine

2

Automatic

.060 inches (1.52 mm)

5.3 V8 Engine with Active Fuel
Management™

C

Automatic

.040 inches (1.01 mm)

5-129

✍ NOTES

5-130

Section 6

Maintenance Schedule

Maintenance Schedule ......................................6-2
Introduction ...................................................6-2
Maintenance Requirements ..............................6-2
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................6-2
Using the Maintenance Schedule ......................6-3
Scheduled Maintenance ...................................6-4
Additional Required Services ............................6-6
Maintenance Footnotes ...................................6-7

Owner Checks and Services ............................6-8
At Each Fuel Fill ............................................6-8
At Least Once a Month ...................................6-9
At Least Once a Year .....................................6-9
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ...............6-12
Maintenance Replacement Parts .....................6-13
Engine Drive Belt Routing ..............................6-14
Maintenance Record .....................................6-15

6-1

Maintenance Schedule
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level
and change as recommended.

Maintenance Requirements
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,
replacement parts, and recommended fluids and
lubricants as prescribed in this manual are
necessary to keep your vehicle in good working
condition. Any damage caused by failure to follow
scheduled maintenance might not be covered
by warranty.

Your Vehicle and the Environment

Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan?
The Plan supplements your new vehicle warranties.
See your Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet
or your dealer/retailer for details.

6-2

Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep
your vehicle in good working condition, but also helps
the environment. All recommended maintenance is
important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even
affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid
levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level
of emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our
environment, and to keep your vehicle in good condition,
be sure to maintain your vehicle properly.

Using the Maintenance Schedule
We want to help you keep your vehicle in good working
condition. But we do not know exactly how you will
drive it. You might drive very short distances only a
few times a week. Or you might drive long distances
all the time in very hot, dusty weather. You might
use your vehicle in making deliveries. Or you might
drive it to work, to do errands, or in many other ways.
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You might need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read
the following and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,
see your dealer/retailer.
This schedule is for vehicles that:

• carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these limits on the Tire and
Loading Information label. See Loading Your
Vehicle on page 4-22.

• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within
legal driving limits.

• use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octane
on page 5-5.

The services in Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4
should be performed when indicated. See Additional
Required Services on page 6-6 and Maintenance
Footnotes on page 6-7 for further information.

{CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle
can be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs,
you can be seriously injured. Do your own
maintenance work only if you have the
required know-how and the proper tools and
equipment for the job. If you have any doubt,
see your dealer/retailer to have a qualified
technician do the work. See Doing Your Own
Service Work on page 5-4.
Some maintenance services can be complex. So, unless
you are technically qualified and have the necessary
equipment, you should have your dealer/retailer do
these jobs.
When you go to your dealer/retailer for your service
needs, you will know that trained and supported service
technicians will perform the work using genuine parts.
If you want to purchase service information, see Service
Publications Ordering Information on page 7-15.
6-3

Owner Checks and Services on page 6-8 tells you what
should be checked, when to check it, and what you
can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good
condition.
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants to
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-12 and Maintenance Replacement Parts
on page 6-13. When your vehicle is serviced, make sure
these are used. All parts should be replaced and all
necessary repairs done before you or anyone else
drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of genuine
parts from your dealer/retailer.

Scheduled Maintenance
When the CHANGE OIL SOON message comes on,
it means that service is required for your vehicle.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-67.
Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within
the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that,
if you are driving under the best conditions, the engine
oil life system may not indicate that vehicle service
is necessary for over a year. However, your engine
oil and filter must be changed at least once a year
and at this time the system must be reset. Your
dealer/retailer has trained service technicians who
will perform this work using genuine parts and reset
the system.

6-4

If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally,
you must service your vehicle within 3,000 miles
(5 000 km) since your last service. Remember to reset
the oil life system whenever the oil is changed. See
Engine Oil Life System on page 5-18 for information on
the Engine Oil Life System and resetting the system.
When the CHANGE OIL SOON message appears,
certain services, checks, and inspections are required.
Required services are described in the following
for “Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.” Generally, it is
recommended that your first service be Maintenance I,
your second service be Maintenance II, and that
you alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance II
thereafter. However, in some cases, Maintenance II
may be required more often.
Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the CHANGE
OIL SOON message comes on within 10 months
since the vehicle was purchased or Maintenance II
was performed.
Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previous
service performed was Maintenance I. Always use
Maintenance II whenever the message comes on
10 months or more since the last service or if the
message has not come on at all for one year.

Scheduled Maintenance
Service

Maintenance I Maintenance II

Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 5-15. Reset oil life system.
See Engine Oil Life System on page 5-18. An Emission Control Service.

•

•

Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (k).

•

•

Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-20. See footnote (m).

•

Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection
and Rotation on page 5-75 and “Tire Wear Inspection” in At Least Once
a Month on page 6-9.

•

•

Inspect brake system. See footnote (a).

•

•

Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid as needed.

•

•

Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services”
in this section.

•

•

Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b).

•

Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).

•

Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).

•

Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e).

•

Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).

•

Check transmission fluid level and add fluid as needed.

•

Replace passenger compartment air filter. See footnote (g).

•

V6 Only: Inspect throttle system. See footnote (j).

•

6-5

Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles (kilometers)
shown for each item.

Additional Required Services
25,000
(40 000)

50,000
(80 000)

75,000
(120 000)

100,000
(160 000)

125,000
(200 000)

150,000
(240 000)

Inspect fuel system for damage
or leaks.

•

•

•

•

•

•

Inspect exhaust system for loose
or damaged components.

•

•

•

•

•

•

Service and Miles (Kilometers)

Replace engine air cleaner filter. See
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-20.

•

•

•

Change automatic transmission fluid and
filter (severe service). See footnote (h).

•

•

•

Change automatic transmission fluid
and filter (normal service).

•

Replace spark plugs and inspect spark
plug wires. An Emission Control Service.

•

Engine cooling system service
(or every five years, whichever occurs
first). An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (i).

•

Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (n).

•

6-6

Maintenance Footnotes
† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to
the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the
maintenance be recorded.
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect
disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface
condition. Inspect other brake parts, including calipers,
parking brake, etc.
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and
steering system for damaged, loose, or missing parts or
signs of wear. Inspect power steering lines and hoses
for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if they
are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,
fittings, and clamps; replace with genuine parts as
needed. To help ensure proper operation, a pressure
test of the cooling system and pressure cap and cleaning
the outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser
is recommended at least once a year.

(d) Inspect wiper blades for wear, cracking, or
contamination. Clean the windshield and wiper blades,
if contaminated. Replace wiper blades that are worn or
damaged. See Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
on page 5-61 and Windshield and Wiper Blades on
page 5-116 for more information.
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and safety
belt assemblies are working properly. Look for any
other loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you
see anything that might keep a safety belt system
from doing its job, have it repaired. Have any torn or
frayed safety belts replaced. Also see Checking
the Restraint Systems on page 1-66.
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders. Lubricate all hinges
and latches, including those for the body doors,
hood, secondary latch, pivots, spring anchor, release
pawl, rear compartment, glove box door, console
door, and any folding seat hardware. More frequent
lubrication may be required when exposed to a corrosive
environment. Applying silicone grease on weatherstrips
with a clean cloth will make them last longer, seal
better, and not stick or squeak.
(g) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions,
the filter may require replacement more often.

6-7

(h) Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police,
or delivery service.
(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This service can
be complex; you should have your dealer/retailer perform
this service. See Engine Coolant on page 5-24 for what to
use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure
cap, and filler neck. Pressure test the cooling system
and pressure cap.
(j) Check throttle system for interference or binding
and for damaged or missing parts. Replace parts
as needed. Replace any components that have high
effort or excessive wear. Do not lubricate accelerator
or cruise control cables.
(k) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a
problem. Have the system inspected and repaired and
the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.
(m) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions,
inspect the filter at each engine oil change.
(n) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive cracks,
or obvious damage. Replace belt if necessary.

6-8

Owner Checks and Services
These owner checks and services should be performed
at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety,
dependability, and emission control performance of your
vehicle. Your dealer/retailer can assist you with these
checks and services.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.

At Each Fuel Fill
It is important to perform these underhood checks at
each fuel fill.

Engine Oil Level Check
Notice: It is important to check the engine oil
regularly and keep it at the proper level. Failure to
keep the engine oil at the proper level can cause
damage to the engine not covered by your warranty.
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
necessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-15.

Engine Coolant Level Check

At Least Once a Year

Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant
on page 5-24.

Starter Switch Check

Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
washer fluid reservoir and add the proper fluid if
necessary.

At Least Once a Month

{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.

Tire Inflation Check

1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.

Inspect your vehicle’s tires and make sure they are
inflated to the correct pressures. Do not forget to
check the spare tire. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 5-69. Check to make sure the spare tire is stored
securely. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-96.

2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-33.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.

Tire Wear Inspection
Tire rotation may be required for high mileage highway
drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life System service
notification. Check the tires for wear and, if necessary,
rotate the tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-75.

3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The vehicle
should start only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
If the vehicle starts in any other position, contact
your dealer/retailer for service.

6-9

Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System Check

{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.

3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON/RUN,
but do not start the engine. Without applying the
regular brake, try to move the shift lever out
of PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of PARK (P), contact your dealer/retailer
for service.

Ignition Transmission Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition to LOCK/OFF in each shift lever position.

• The ignition should turn to LOCK/OFF only
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle. It should be parked on a
level surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake
on page 2-33.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately
if the vehicle begins to move.

6-10

when the shift lever is in PARK (P).

• The ignition key should come out only in
LOCK/OFF.
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.

Parking Brake and Automatic
Transmission Park (P) Mechanism Check

Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake,
set the parking brake.

• To check the parking brake’s holding ability:

{CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could
be injured and property could be damaged.
Make sure there is room in front of your
vehicle in case it begins to roll. Be ready to
apply the regular brake at once should the
vehicle begin to move.

With the engine running and the transmission
in NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure
from the regular brake pedal. Do this until the
vehicle is held by the parking brake only.

• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to PARK (P). Then
release the parking brake followed by the regular
brake.
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.

Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care
to clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other
debris can collect.

6-11

Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name,
part number, or specification can be obtained from
your dealer/retailer.
Usage

Engine Oil

Fluid/Lubricant
Engine oil which meets GM
Standard GM6094M and displays
the American Petroleum Institute
Certified for Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. To determine
the proper viscosity for your
vehicle’s engine, see Engine Oil
on page 5-15.

50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and use only DEX-COOL®
Engine Coolant Coolant.
See Engine Coolant
on page 5-24.
Hydraulic Brake Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid
or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
System
Windshield
Washer

6-12

®

Optikleen Washer Solvent.

Usage

Fluid/Lubricant

Power Steering Fluid
Power Steering GM
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184,
System
in Canada 89021186).
Automatic
Transmission

DEXRON®-VI Automatic
Transmission Fluid.

Key Lock
Cylinders

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).

Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary
Latch,
Pivots, Spring
Anchor, and
Release Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,
in Canada 992723) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.

Lubricant, Superlube
Hood and Door Multi-Purpose
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
Hinges
in Canada 10953474).

Weatherstrip
Conditioning

Weatherstrip Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,
in Canada 10953518) or
Dielectric Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,
in Canada 992887).

Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer/retailer.
Part

GM Part Number

ACDelco Part Number

3800 V6 Engine

15221217

A1614C

5.3L V8 Engine

10350737

A2962C

3800 V6 Engine

25010792

PF47

5.3L V8 Engine

89017524

PF48

15284938

CF132

3800 V6 Engine

12568387

41-101

5.3L V8 Engine

12571164

41-985

Driver Side

15941733

—

Passenger Side

15941734

—

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

Engine Oil Filter

Passenger Compartment Air Filter
Spark Plugs

Windshield Wiper Blade Assembly
22.0 in (55.0 cm)

6-13

Engine Drive Belt Routing

5.3L V8 Engine
3.8L V6 Engine

6-14

Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service,
and the type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2.
Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-8 can be added on the following
record pages. You should retain all maintenance receipts.

Maintenance Record
Date

Odometer
Reading

Serviced By

Maintenance I or
Maintenance II

Services Performed

6-15

Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date

6-16

Odometer
Reading

Serviced By

Maintenance I or
Maintenance II

Services Performed

Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date

Odometer
Reading

Serviced By

Maintenance I or
Maintenance II

Services Performed

6-17

Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date

6-18

Odometer
Reading

Serviced By

Maintenance I or
Maintenance II

Services Performed

Section 7

Customer Assistance Information

Customer Assistance and Information ...............7-2
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ......................7-2
Online Owner Center ......................................7-4
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone
(TTY) Users ...............................................7-5
Customer Assistance Offices ............................7-5
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ................7-6
Roadside Assistance Program ..........................7-6
Scheduling Service Appointments .....................7-9
Courtesy Transportation ...................................7-9
Collision Damage Repair ................................7-11
Reporting Safety Defects ................................7-14

Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government ..........................7-14
Reporting Safety Defects to
the Canadian Government ..........................7-14
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors .........................................7-14
Service Publications Ordering Information .........7-15
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy ................7-16
Event Data Recorders ...................................7-16
OnStar® ......................................................7-17
Navigation System ........................................7-17
Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) ..............7-17

7-1

Customer Assistance and
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to
your dealer and to Pontiac. Normally, any concerns with
the sales transaction or the operation of your vehicle
will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service, or parts
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or the
general manager.
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help,
in the U.S., contact the Pontiac Customer Assistance
Center by calling 1-800-762-2737. In Canada, contact
General Motors of Canada Customer Communication
Centre in Oshawa by calling 1-800-263-3777 (English)
or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
7-2

We encourage you to call the toll-free number in
order to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please
have the following information available to give
the Customer Assistance Representative:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is
available from the vehicle registration or title,
or the plate at the top left of the instrument
panel and visible through the windshield.
• Dealership name and location.
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.
When contacting Pontiac, please remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility.
That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if
you have a concern.
STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: Both General Motors
and your dealer are committed to making sure you
are completely satisfied with your new vehicle.
However, if you continue to remain unsatisfied after
following the procedure outlined in Steps One and
Two, you should file with the BBB Auto Line Program
to enforce your rights.
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus
to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or
the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Although you may be required to resort to this informal
dispute resolution program prior to filing a court action,
use of the program is free of charge and your case will
generally be heard within 40 days. If you do not agree
with the decision given in your case, you may reject it and
proceed with any other venue for relief available to you.
You can contact the BBB Auto Line Program using
the toll-free telephone number or write them at the
following address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
This program is available in all 50 states and the
District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage and other factors. General Motors reserves
the right to change eligibility limitations and/or
discontinue its participation in this program.
STEP THREE — Canadian Owners: In the event that
you do not feel your concerns have been addressed
after following the procedure outlined in Steps One
and Two, General Motors of Canada Limited wants
you to be aware of its participation in a no-charge
Mediation/Arbitration Program. General Motors of

Canada Limited has committed to binding arbitration
of owner disputes involving factory-related vehicle
service claims. The program provides for the review
of the facts involved by an impartial third party arbiter,
and may include an informal hearing before the
arbiter. The program is designed so that the entire
dispute settlement process, from the time you file
your complaint to the final decision, should be
completed in approximately 70 days. We believe our
impartial program offers advantages over courts in
most jurisdictions because it is informal, quick, and
free of charge.
For further information concerning eligibility in the
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),
call toll-free 1-800-207-0685. Alternatively, you can call
the General Motors Customer Communication Centre,
1-800-263-3777 (English), 1-800-263-7854 (French),
or write to:
Mediation/Arbitration Program
c/o Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Your inquiry should be accompanied by your
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).

7-3

Online Owner Center

My GM Canada (Canada only)

(United States only)

My GM Canada is a password-protected section of
gmcanada.com where you can save information on
GM vehicles, get personalized offers, and use handy
tools and forms with greater ease.

The Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownership
needs. Specific vehicle information can be found in
one place.
The Online Owner Center allows you to:

• Get e-mail service reminders.
• Access information about your specific vehicle,
including tips and videos and an electronic
version of this owner manual.

• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history and
maintenance schedule.

• Find GM dealers/retailers for service nationwide.
• Receive special promotions and privileges only
available to members.
Refer to www.MyGMLink.com on the web for updated
information and to register your vehicle.

7-4

Here are a few of the valuable tools and services you
will have access to:
− My Showroom: Find and save information on
vehicles and current offers in your area.
− My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such as
address and phone number for each of your
preferred GM Dealers or Retailers.
− My Driveway: Receive service reminders and
helpful advice on owning and maintaining
your vehicle.
− My Preferences: Manage your profile, subscribe to
E-News and use tools and forms with greater ease.
To sign up to My GM Canada, visit the My GM Canada
section within www.gmcanada.com.

Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users

From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Fax Number: 313-381-0022

To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Pontiac has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user in the U.S. can
communicate with Pontiac by dialing: 1-800-833-PONT
(7668). (TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)

Canada — Customer Assistance

Customer Assistance Offices
Pontiac encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. However, if a customer wishes to
write or e-mail Pontiac, the letter should be addressed to:

General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
www.gmcanada.com
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800

Overseas — Customer Assistance

United States — Customer Assistance

Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.

Pontiac Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33172
Detroit, MI 48232-5172
www.Pontiac.com
1-800-762-2737 or
1-800-833-7668 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-ROADSIDE (762-3743)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022

Mexico, Central America and
Caribbean Islands/Countries
(Except Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin
Islands) — Customer Assistance
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma #2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
7-5

GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program

Roadside Assistance Program
For vehicles purchased in the U.S.,
call 1-800-ROADSIDE (762-3743);
(Text telephone (TTY): 1-888-889-2438).
For vehicles purchased in Canada, call 1-800-268-6800.
Service is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
As the owner of a new Pontiac vehicle, you are
automatically enrolled in the Pontiac Roadside
Assistance program.

This program, available to qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of eligible
aftermarket adaptive equipment required for your vehicle,
such as hand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift.
The offer is available for a very limited period of time
from the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more
details, or to determine your vehicle’s eligibility, visit
gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY)
users, call 1-800-833-9935.
General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility Program.
Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details.
TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.

7-6

Who is Covered?
Roadside Assistance coverage is for the vehicle
operator, regardless of ownership. In Canada,
a person driving this vehicle without the consent
of the owner is not eligible for coverage.

Services Provided
The following services are provided in the U.S. and
Canada up to 5 years/100,000 miles (160 000 km),
whichever occurs first, and, in Canada only, up to a
maximum coverage of $100.

• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for the
vehicle to get to the nearest service station
(approximately $5 in Canada). In Canada, service
to provide diesel may be restricted. For safety
reasons, propane and other alternative fuels will
not be provided through this service.

• Lock-out Service: Lock-out service is covered at
no charge if you are unable to gain entry into your
vehicle. A remote unlock may be available if you
have an active OnStar® subscription. To ensure
security, the driver must present personal
identification before lock-out service is provided.
In Canada, the vehicle registration is also required.

• Emergency Tow From a Public Roadway or
Highway: Tow to the nearest dealership for warranty
service or in the event of a vehicle-disabling crash.
Winch-out assistance is provided when the vehicle
is mired in sand, mud, or snow.

• Flat Tire Change: Installation of a spare tire in good
condition, when equipped and properly inflated, is
covered at no charge. The customer is responsible
for the repair or replacement of the tire if not covered
by a warrantable failure.

• Jump Start: A battery jump start is covered at no
charge if the vehicle does not start.

• Trip Routing Service (Canada only): Upon
request, Roadside Assistance will send you detailed,
computer personalized maps, highlighting your
choice of either the most direct route or the most
scenic route to your destination, anywhere in
North America, along with helpful travel information
pertaining to your trip.
Please allow three weeks before your planned
departure date. Trip routing requests will be limited
to six per calendar year.

7-7

• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance
(Canada only): In the event of a warranty related
vehicle disablement, while en route and over
250 kilometres from the original point of departure,
you may qualify for trip interruption expense
assistance. This assistance covers reasonable
reimbursement of up to a maximum of $500
(Canadian) for (A) meals (maximum of $50/day),
(B) lodging (maximum of $100/night) and
(C) alternate ground transportation (maximum of
$40/day). This benefit is to assist you with some
of the unplanned expense you may incur while
waiting for your vehicle to be repaired.
Pre-authorization, original detailed receipts and a
copy of the repair order are required.
Once authorization has been given, your advisor will
help you make any necessary arrangements and
explain how to claim for trip interruption expense
assistance.

• Alternative Service (Canada only): There may be
times, when Roadside Assistance cannot provide
timely assistance. Your advisor may authorize you
to secure local emergency road service, and you will
be reimbursed up to $100 upon submission of the
original receipt to Roadside Assistance.

7-8

In many instances, mechanical failures may be covered.
However, any cost for parts and labor for non-warranty
repairs are the responsibility of the driver.
Pontiac and General Motors of Canada Limited reserve
the right to limit services or reimbursement to an
owner or driver when, in their sole discretion, the claims
become excessive in frequency or type of occurrence.

Calling For Assistance
For prompt and efficient assistance when calling,
please provide the following to the Roadside Assistance
Representative:

• Your name, home address, and home
telephone number

• Telephone number of your location
• Location of the vehicle
• Model, year, color, and license plate number
of the vehicle

• Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle

• Description of the problem

Towing and Road Service Exclusions
Specifically excluded from Roadside Assistance
coverage are towing or services for vehicles operated
on a non-public roadway or highway, fines, impound
towing caused by a violation of local, Municipal, State,
Provincial, or Federal law, and mounting, dismounting or
changing of snow tires, chains, or other traction devices.
Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in the
coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Pontiac and General Motors of Canada Limited
reserve the right to make any changes or discontinue
the Roadside Assistance program at any time without
notification.

If the dealer/retailer requests that you simply drop the
vehicle off for service, you are urged to do so as early
in the work day as possible to allow for the same
day repair.

Courtesy Transportation
To enhance your ownership experience, we and our
participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
Transportation, a customer support program for vehicles
with the Bumper to Bumper (Base Warranty Coverage
period in Canada) and extended powertrain warranty
in both the U.S. and Canada.

Scheduling Service Appointments

Several courtesy transportation options are available to
assist in reducing your inconvenience when warranty
repairs are required.

When your vehicle requires warranty service, contact
your dealer/retailer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and advising your
service consultant of your transportation needs, your
dealer/retailer can help minimize your inconvenience.

Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. A separate booklet entitled “Warranty
and Owner Assistance Information” furnished with
each new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage
information.

If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership/retailer,
let them know this, and ask for instructions.

7-9

Transportation Options

Courtesy Rental Vehicle

Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait, GM helps
to minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:

Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle
that you obtain if your vehicle is kept for an overnight
warranty repair. Rental reimbursement will be limited
and must be supported by original receipts.
This requires that you sign and complete a rental
agreement and meet state/provincial, local, and rental
vehicle provider requirements. Requirements vary
and may include minimum age requirements, insurance
coverage, credit card, etc. You are responsible for
fuel usage charges and may also be responsible for
taxes, levies, usage fees, excessive mileage, or rental
usage beyond the completion of the repair.

Shuttle Service
Shuttle service is the preferred means of offering
Courtesy Transportation. Dealers may provide you
with shuttle service to get you to your destination with
minimal interruption of your daily schedule. This includes
one-way or round trip shuttle service within reasonable
time and distance parameters of the dealer’s area.

Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs, and
public transportation is used instead of the dealer’s
shuttle service, the expense must be supported by
original receipts and can only be up to the maximum
amount allowed by GM for shuttle service. In addition,
for U.S. customers, should you arrange transportation
through a friend or relative, limited reimbursement
for reasonable fuel expenses may be available.
Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be
supported by original receipts. See your dealer for
information regarding the allowance amounts for
reimbursement of fuel or other transportation costs.
7-10

It may not be possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.

Additional Program Information
All program options, such as shuttle service, may not
be available at every dealer. Please contact your dealer
for specific information about availability. All Courtesy
Transportation arrangements will be administered
by appropriate dealer personnel.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at
any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described
herein at its sole discretion.

Collision Damage Repair
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is
damaged, have the damage repaired by a qualified
technician using the proper equipment and quality
replacement parts. Poorly performed collision repairs
diminish your vehicle’s resale value, and safety
performance can be compromised in subsequent
collisions.

Collision Parts
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with
the same materials and construction methods as
the parts with which your vehicle was originally built.
Genuine GM Collision parts are your best choice
to ensure that your vehicle’s designed appearance,
durability, and safety are preserved. The use of
Genuine GM parts can help maintain your GM New
Vehicle Warranty.
Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for
repair. These parts are typically removed from vehicles
that were total losses in prior crashes. In most cases,
the parts being recycled are from undamaged sections
of the vehicle. A recycled original equipment GM part,
may be an acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle’s
originally designed appearance and safety performance,
however, the history of these parts is not known.

Such parts are not covered by your GM New Vehicle
Limited Warranty, and any related failures are not
covered by that warranty.
Aftermarket collision parts are also available.
These are made by companies other than GM and
may not have been tested for your vehicle. As a
result, these parts may fit poorly, exhibit premature
durability/corrosion problems, and may not perform
properly in subsequent collisions. Aftermarket parts
are not covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited
Warranty, and any vehicle failure related to such
parts are not covered by that warranty.

Repair Facility
We recommend that you choose a collision repair
facility that meets your needs before you ever need
collision repairs. Your dealer/retailer may have a
collision repair center with GM-trained technicians and
state of the art equipment, or be able to recommend
a collision repair center that has GM-trained technicians
and comparable equipment.

7-11

Insuring Your Vehicle

If a Crash Occurs

Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage.
There are significant differences in the quality of
coverage afforded by various insurance policy terms.
Many insurance policies provide reduced protection
to your GM vehicle by limiting compensation for
damage repairs by using aftermarket collision parts.
Some insurance companies will not specify
aftermarket collision parts. When purchasing insurance,
we recommend that you assure your vehicle will be
repaired with GM original equipment collision parts.
If such insurance coverage is not available from
your current insurance carrier, consider switching to
another insurance carrier.

Here is what to do if you are involved in a crash.
• Check to make sure that you are all right. If you
are uninjured, make sure that no one else in
your vehicle, or the other vehicle, is injured.
• If there has been an injury, call emergency services
for help. Do not leave the scene of a crash until
all matters have been taken care of. Move
your vehicle only if its position puts you in danger
or you are instructed to move it by a police officer.
• Give only the necessary and requested information
to police and other parties involved in the crash.
Do not discuss your personal condition, mental
frame of mind, or anything unrelated to the crash.
This will help guard against post-crash legal action.
• If you need roadside assistance, call GM Roadside
Assistance. See Roadside Assistance Program on
page 7-6 for more information.
• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where the
towing service will be taking it. Get a card from
the tow truck operator or write down the driver’s
name, the service’s name, and the phone number.
• Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it is
towed away. Make sure this includes your insurance
information and registration if you keep these items
in your vehicle.

If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may
require you to have insurance that assures repairs with
Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)
parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts.
Read your lease carefully, as you may be charged at
the end of your lease for poor quality repairs.

7-12

• Gather the important information you will need from

•

•

•

the other driver. Things like name, address, phone
number, driver’s license number, vehicle license
plate, vehicle make, model and model year, Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN), insurance company
and policy number, and a general description of
the damage to the other vehicle.
If possible, call your insurance company from the
scene of the crash. They will walk you through the
information they will need. If they ask for a police
report, phone or go to the police department
headquarters the next day and you can get a copy of
the report for a nominal fee. In some states/provinces
with “no fault” insurance laws, a report may not be
necessary. This is especially true if there are no
injuries and both vehicles are driveable.
Choose a reputable collision repair facility for your
vehicle. Whether you select a dealer/retailer or a
private collision repair facility to fix the damage,
make sure you are comfortable with them.
Remember, you will have to feel comfortable with
their work for a long time.
Once you have an estimate, read it carefully and
make sure you understand what work will be
performed on your vehicle. If you have a question,
ask for an explanation. Reputable shops welcome
this opportunity.

Managing the Vehicle Damage
Repair Process
In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs,
GM recommends that you take an active role in its
repair. If you have a pre-determined repair facility of
choice, take your vehicle there, or have it towed there.
Specify to the facility that any required replacement
collision parts be original equipment parts, either
new Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts.
Remember, recycled parts will not be covered by
your GM vehicle warranty.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must
live with the repair. Depending on your policy limits,
your insurance company may initially value the
repair using aftermarket parts. Discuss this with
your repair professional, and insist on Genuine GM
parts. Remember if your vehicle is leased you may be
obligated to have the vehicle repaired with Genuine
GM parts, even if your insurance coverage does not
pay the full cost.
If another party’s insurance company is paying for
the repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair
valuation based on that insurance company’s collision
policy repair limits, as you have no contractual limits
with that company. In such cases, you can have control
of the repair and parts choices as long as cost stays
within reasonable limits.
7-13

Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
could cause a crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)
in addition to notifying General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open
an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual problems between
you, your dealer/retailer, or General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA
400 Seventh Street, SW.
Washington D.C., 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

7-14

Reporting Safety Defects to
the Canadian Government
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your
vehicle has a safety defect, notify Transport Canada
immediately, in addition to notifying General Motors of
Canada Limited. Call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:
Transport Canada
Road Safety Branch
2780 Sheffield Road
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9

Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada)
in a situation like this, please notify General Motors.
Call 1-800-762-2737, or write:
Pontiac Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33172
Detroit, MI 48232-5172
In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777 (English) or
1-800-263-7854 (French), or write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Service Publications Ordering
Information
Service Manuals
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.

Service Bulletins
Service Bulletins’ give additional technical service
information needed to knowledgeably service
General Motors cars and trucks. Each bulletin
contains instructions to assist in the diagnosis and
service of your vehicle.

Owner Information
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner manual includes the
Maintenance Schedule for all models.
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual,
and Warranty Booklet.

Current and Past Model Order Forms
Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are available
for current and past model GM vehicles. To request
an order form, specify year and model name of
the vehicle.

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc.
on the World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
Without Portfolio: Owner Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee

7-15

Vehicle Data Recording
and Privacy
Your GM vehicle has a number of sophisticated
computers that record information about the vehicle’s
performance and how it is driven. For example,
your vehicle uses computer modules to monitor
and control engine and transmission performance,
to monitor the conditions for airbag deployment
and deploy airbags in a crash and, if so equipped,
to provide antilock braking to help the driver control
the vehicle. These modules may store data to help
your dealer/retailer technician service your vehicle.
Some modules may also store data about how
you operate the vehicle, such as rate of fuel
consumption or average speed. These modules
may also retain the owner’s personal preferences,
such as radio pre-sets, seat positions, and
temperature settings.

7-16

Event Data Recorders
This vehicle has an Event Data Recorder (EDR).
The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an airbag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed. The EDR is designed to record data related
to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR
in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety
belts were buckled/fastened
• How far, if at all, the driver was pressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal
• How fast the vehicle was traveling
This data can help provide a better understanding of
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.

Important: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle
only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is
recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions
and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age,
and crash location) is recorded. However, other parties,
such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data
with the type of personally identifying data routinely
acquired during a crash investigation.

OnStar®

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment
is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR
is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer,
other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the
special equipment, can read the information if they
have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

Navigation System

GM will not access this data or share it with others
except: with the consent of the vehicle owner or,
if the vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee;
in response to an official request of police or similar
government office; as part of GM’s defense of litigation
through the discovery process; or, as required by
law. Data that GM collects or receives may also be
used for GM research needs or may be made available
to others for research purposes, where a need is
shown and the data is not tied to a specific vehicle
or vehicle owner.

If your vehicle has OnStar and you subscribe to the
OnStar services, please refer to the OnStar Terms
and Conditions for information on data collection and
use. See also OnStar® System on page 2-40 in
this manual for more information.

If your vehicle has a navigation system, use of the
system may result in the storage of destinations,
addresses, telephone numbers, and other trip
information. Refer to the navigation system operating
manual for information on stored data and for
deletion instructions.

Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID)
RFID technology is used in some vehicles for functions
such as tire pressure monitoring and ignition system
security, as well as in connection with conveniences
such as key fobs for remote door locking/unlocking and
starting, and in-vehicle transmitters for garage door
openers. RFID technology in GM vehicles does not
use or record personal information or link with any other
GM system containing personal information.

7-17

✍ NOTES

7-18

A
Accessories and Modifications ............................ 5-3
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle ....................................................... 1-65
Additives, Fuel ................................................. 5-6
Add-On Electrical Equipment ........................... 5-120
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ................................. 5-20
Air Conditioning ...................................... 3-28, 3-32
Airbag
Passenger Status Indicator ........................... 3-43
Readiness Light .......................................... 3-42
Airbag System ................................................ 1-52
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? .... 1-58
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................... 1-57
Where Are the Airbags? ............................... 1-55
Airbag Systems
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle ................................................... 1-65
How Does an Airbag Restrain? ...................... 1-58
Passenger Sensing System ........................... 1-60
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......... 1-64
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ...................... 1-58
Antenna, Backglass ....................................... 3-117
Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System ..................................................... 3-118
Antilock Brake System (ABS) ............................. 4-4
Anti-lock Brake, System Warning Light ............... 3-47

Appearance Care
Aluminum Wheels ...................................... 5-116
Care of Safety Belts ................................... 5-114
Chemical Paint Spotting .............................. 5-118
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .................. 5-115
Fabric/Carpet ............................................ 5-111
Finish Care ............................................... 5-115
Finish Damage .......................................... 5-117
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces ..................................... 5-113
Interior Cleaning ........................................ 5-109
Leather .................................................... 5-112
Sheet Metal Damage .................................. 5-117
Tires ........................................................ 5-117
Ultra Lux Suede ........................................ 5-113
Underbody Maintenance ............................. 5-117
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ............... 5-118
Washing Your Vehicle ................................. 5-114
Weatherstrips ............................................ 5-114
Windshield and Wiper Blades ...................... 5-116
Appointments, Scheduling Service ....................... 7-9
Ashtray ......................................................... 3-27
Audio System ................................................. 3-94
Audio Steering Wheel Controls .................... 3-115
Backglass Antenna ..................................... 3-117
Chime Level Adjustment ............................. 3-118
Radio Reception ........................................ 3-116
Setting the Clock ......................................... 3-95

1

Audio System (cont.)
Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................... 3-115
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ........... 3-118
Audio System(s) ............................................. 3-95
Automatic Transmission
Fluid .......................................................... 5-22
Operation ................................................... 2-28

B
Backglass Antenna ........................................ 3-117
Battery .......................................................... 5-45
Electric Power Management .......................... 3-22
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver ...................... 3-19
Run-Down Protection ................................... 3-22
Brake
Emergencies ................................................ 4-5
Brakes .......................................................... 5-41
System Warning Light .................................. 3-45
Braking ........................................................... 4-3
Braking in Emergencies ..................................... 4-5
Break-In, New Vehicle ..................................... 2-23
Bulb Replacement ........................................... 5-54
Back-Up Lamps ........................................... 5-59
Front Turn Signal, Parking and Fog Lamps ..... 5-57
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-54
Headlamp Aiming ........................................ 5-51

2

Bulb Replacement (cont.)
License Plate Lamps ....................................
Replacement Bulbs ......................................
Taillamps, Turn Signal, and Stoplamps ............
Buying New Tires ...........................................

5-60
5-60
5-58
5-78

C
Calibration ..................................................... 3-65
California Fuel .................................................. 5-6
California Perchlorate Materials Requirements ....... 5-4
California Proposition 65 Warning ....................... 5-3
Canadian Owners ................................................ ii
Capacities and Specifications .......................... 5-128
Carbon Monoxide ................... 2-14, 2-36, 4-17, 4-29
Care of
Safety Belts .............................................. 5-114
CD, MP3 ..................................................... 3-109
Center Console Storage Area ........................... 2-44
Chains, Tire ................................................... 5-84
Check
Engine Light ............................................... 3-50
Checking Things Under the Hood ...................... 5-10
Chemical Paint Spotting ................................. 5-118
Child Restraints
Child Restraint Systems ............................... 1-35
Infants and Young Children ........................... 1-32

Child Restraints (cont.)
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children .......... 1-39
Older Children ............................................. 1-29
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Seat Position ........................................... 1-46
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position ................................... 1-49
Where to Put the Restraint ........................... 1-38
Chime Level Adjustment ................................. 3-118
Cigarette Lighter ............................................. 3-27
Cleaning
Aluminum Wheels ...................................... 5-116
Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................................ 5-115
Fabric/Carpet ............................................ 5-111
Finish Care ............................................... 5-115
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces ..................................... 5-113
Interior ..................................................... 5-109
Leather .................................................... 5-112
Tires ........................................................ 5-117
Ultra Lux Suede ........................................ 5-113
Underbody Maintenance ............................. 5-117
Washing Your Vehicle ................................. 5-114
Weatherstrips ............................................ 5-114
Windshield and Wiper Blades ...................... 5-116

Climate Control System ................................... 3-28
Air Filter, Passenger Compartment ................. 3-36
Dual Automatic ............................................ 3-32
Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 3-36
Clock, Setting ................................................. 3-95
Collision Damage Repair .................................. 7-11
Compact Spare Tire ...................................... 5-109
Compass ....................................................... 3-65
Compressor Kit, Tire Sealant ............................ 5-86
Content Theft-Deterrent .................................... 2-18
Control of a Vehicle .......................................... 4-3
Convenience Net ............................................ 2-44
Coolant
Engine Temperature Gage ............................ 3-49
Engine Temperature Warning Light ................. 3-48
Heater, Engine ............................................ 2-26
Cooling System .............................................. 5-30
Courtesy Lamps ............................................. 3-19
Cruise Control ................................................ 3-12
Cruise Control Light ........................................ 3-53
Cupholder(s) .................................................. 2-43
Customer Assistance Information
Courtesy Transportation .................................. 7-9
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone (TTY)
Users ....................................................... 7-5

3

Customer Assistance Information (cont.)
Customer Assistance Offices ........................... 7-5
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ..................... 7-2
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ............... 7-6
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors .... 7-14
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government .............................. 7-14
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government ......................... 7-14
Roadside Assistance Program ......................... 7-6
Service Publications Ordering Information ........ 7-15

D
Daytime Running Lamps .................................. 3-17
Defensive Driving ............................................. 4-2
Delayed Entry Lighting ..................................... 3-20
Delayed Exit Lighting ....................................... 3-21
Delayed Locking ............................................. 2-11
DIC Compass ................................................. 3-65
Diesel
Running Out of Fuel .................................... 2-37
Disc, MP3 .................................................... 3-109

4

Doing Your Own Service Work ........................... 5-4
Dome Lamp ................................................... 3-20
Door
Delayed Locking .......................................... 2-11
Locks ........................................................ 2-10
Power Door Locks ....................................... 2-11
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............. 2-12
Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 2-12
Driver Information Center (DIC) ......................... 3-55
DIC Operation and Displays .................. 3-55, 3-62
DIC Vehicle Customization ............................ 3-89
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-67
Driving
At Night ..................................................... 4-14
Before a Long Trip ...................................... 4-15
Defensive ..................................................... 4-2
Drunken ....................................................... 4-2
Highway Hypnosis ....................................... 4-16
Hill and Mountain Roads .............................. 4-16
In Rain and on Wet Roads ........................... 4-14
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out ................. 4-22
Winter ........................................................ 4-17
Dual Automatic Climate Control System ............. 3-32

E
EDR ............................................................. 7-16
Electrical System
Add-On Equipment ..................................... 5-120
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ......................... 5-121
Headlamp Wiring ....................................... 5-120
Instrument Panel Fuse Block ....................... 5-122
Power Windows and Other Power Options .... 5-121
Underhood Fuse Block ............................... 5-124
Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................. 5-121
Electronic Immobilizer
PASS-Key® III ............................................. 2-20
Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter ......................................... 5-20
Check and Service Engine Soon Light ............ 3-50
Coolant ...................................................... 5-24
Coolant Heater ............................................ 2-26
Coolant Temperature Gage ........................... 3-49
Coolant Temperature Warning Light ................ 3-48
Drive Belt Routing ....................................... 6-14
Engine Compartment Overview ...................... 5-12
Exhaust ..................................................... 2-36
Oil ............................................................. 5-15

Engine (cont.)
Oil Life System ........................................... 5-18
Overheated Protection Operating Mode ........... 5-29
Overheating ................................................ 5-27
Starting ...................................................... 2-25
Enhanced Traction System (ETS) ........................ 4-7
Warning Light ............................................. 3-48
Entry Lighting ................................................. 3-20
Event Data Recorders ..................................... 7-16
Extender, Safety Belt ....................................... 1-28
Exterior Lamps ............................................... 3-16
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver .......................... 3-19

F
Filter
Engine Air Cleaner ...................................... 5-20
Finish Damage ............................................. 5-117
Flashers, Hazard Warning .................................. 3-6
Flash-to-Pass ................................................... 3-9
Flat Tire ........................................................ 5-85
Flat Tire, Changing ......................................... 5-96
Flat Tire, Storing ........................................... 5-107

5

Fluid
Automatic Transmission ................................ 5-22
Power Steering ........................................... 5-39
Windshield Washer ...................................... 5-40
Fog Lamp
Fog ........................................................... 3-18
Fog Lamp Light .............................................. 3-53
Folding Rear Seat ............................................ 1-9
Folding Seatback, Passenger ............................. 1-8
Front Reading Lamps ...................................... 3-21
Fuel ............................................................... 5-5
Additives ...................................................... 5-6
California Fuel .............................................. 5-6
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .................... 5-10
Filling the Tank ............................................. 5-8
Fuels in Foreign Countries .............................. 5-7
Gage ......................................................... 3-54
Gasoline Octane ........................................... 5-5
Gasoline Specifications .................................. 5-6
Running Out of ........................................... 2-37
Fuses
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ......................... 5-121
Instrument Panel Fuse Block ....................... 5-122
Underhood Fuse Block ............................... 5-124
Windshield Wiper ....................................... 5-121

6

G
Gage
Engine Coolant Temperature ......................... 3-49
Fuel .......................................................... 3-54
Speedometer .............................................. 3-40
Tachometer ................................................. 3-40
Gasoline
Octane ........................................................ 5-5
Specifications ............................................... 5-6
Glove Box ..................................................... 2-43
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .................. 7-6

H
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................... 3-6
Head Restraints ............................................... 1-7
Headlamp
Aiming ....................................................... 5-51
Headlamp Wiring ........................................... 5-120
Headlamps
Bulb Replacement ....................................... 5-54
Daytime Running Lamps ............................... 3-17
Exterior Lamps ............................................ 3-16
Flash-to-Pass ............................................... 3-9
Front Turn Signal, Parking and Fog Lamps ..... 5-57
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-54
Headlamps and Sidemarker Lamps ................ 5-54

Headlamps (cont.)
High/Low Beam Changer ................................ 3-9
On Reminder .............................................. 3-17
Headlamps and Sidemarker Lamps ................... 5-54
Head-Up Display (HUD) ................................... 3-23
Heated Seats ................................................... 1-4
Heater ........................................................... 3-28
Heater ........................................................... 3-32
Highbeam On Light ......................................... 3-54
Highway Hypnosis ........................................... 4-16
Hill and Mountain Roads .................................. 4-16
Hood
Checking Things Under ................................ 5-10
Release ..................................................... 5-11
Horn ............................................................... 3-6
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................... 1-15

I
Ignition Positions ............................................. 2-23
Infants and Young Children, Restraints ............... 1-32
Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................... 5-69
Inflator Kit, Tire ............................................... 5-86
Instrument Panel
Overview ..................................................... 3-4
Instrument Panel (I/P)
Brightness .................................................. 3-19
Cluster ....................................................... 3-39
Interior Lamps ................................................ 3-19

J
Jump Starting ................................................. 5-46

K
Keyless Entry System ....................................... 2-3
Keys ............................................................... 2-2

L
Labeling, Tire Sidewall .....................................
Lamps
Courtesy ....................................................
Dome ........................................................
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver ......................
Front Reading .............................................
Overhead Console Reading ..........................
Rear Assist Handle Reading ..........................
Lap-Shoulder Belt ...........................................
LATCH System
Child Restraints ...........................................
License Plate Lamps .......................................
Light
Airbag Readiness ........................................
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) Warning ...........
Brake System Warning .................................
Cruise Control .............................................

5-63
3-19
3-20
3-19
3-21
3-21
3-21
1-22
1-39
5-60
3-42
3-47
3-45
3-53

7

Light (cont.)
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning ............. 3-48
Enhanced Traction System (ETS)
Warning Light .......................................... 3-48
Fog Lamp .................................................. 3-53
Highbeam On ............................................. 3-54
Malfunction Indicator .................................... 3-50
Oil Pressure ............................................... 3-52
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator .................. 3-43
Safety Belt Reminders .................................. 3-41
TCS Warning Light ...................................... 3-47
Tire Pressure .............................................. 3-49
Traction Control System (TCS) Warning .......... 3-47
Up-Shift ..................................................... 3-45
Lighting
Delayed Entry ............................................. 3-20
Delayed Exit ............................................... 3-21
Entry ......................................................... 3-20
Lights
Exterior Lamps ............................................ 3-16
Flash-to-Pass ............................................... 3-9
High/Low Beam Changer ................................ 3-9
Interior Lamps ............................................. 3-19
On Reminder .............................................. 3-17
Loading Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-22
Lockout Protection .......................................... 2-13

8

Locks
Delayed Locking .......................................... 2-11
Door .......................................................... 2-10
Lockout Protection ....................................... 2-13
Power Door ................................................ 2-11
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............. 2-12
Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 2-12
Loss of Control ............................................... 4-12
Lumbar
Power Controls ............................................. 1-4

M
Maintenance Schedule
Additional Required Services ........................... 6-6
At Each Fuel Fill ........................................... 6-8
At Least Once a Month .................................. 6-9
At Least Once a Year .................................... 6-9
Introduction .................................................. 6-2
Maintenance Footnotes .................................. 6-7
Maintenance Record .................................... 6-15
Maintenance Replacement Parts .................... 6-13
Maintenance Requirements ............................. 6-2
Owner Checks and Services ........................... 6-8
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ............. 6-12

Maintenance Schedule (cont.)
Scheduled Maintenance ................................. 6-4
Using .......................................................... 6-3
Your Vehicle and the Environment ................... 6-2
Malfunction Indicator Light ................................ 3-50
Manual Seats ................................................... 1-2
Manual, Using .................................................... iii
Message
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-67
Mirrors
Manual Rearview Mirror ................................ 2-38
Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ............. 2-38
Outside Convex Mirror ................................. 2-39
Outside Power Mirrors .................................. 2-39
MP3 ............................................................ 3-109
MyGMLink.com ................................................ 7-4

N
Navigation System, Privacy .............................. 7-17
New Vehicle Break-In ...................................... 2-23

O
Odometer ...................................................... 3-40
Off-Road Recovery .......................................... 4-12
Oil
Engine ....................................................... 5-15
Pressure Light ............................................. 3-52
Oil, Engine Oil Life System .............................. 5-18
Older Children, Restraints ................................ 1-29
Online Owner Center ........................................ 7-4
OnStar, Privacy .............................................. 7-17
OnStar® System, see OnStar® Manual ............... 2-40
Other Warning Devices ...................................... 3-6
Outlet Adjustment ............................................ 3-36
Outlets
Accessory Power ......................................... 3-26
Outside
Convex Mirror ............................................. 2-39
Power Mirrors ............................................. 2-39
Overhead Console Reading Lamps .................... 3-21
Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode ..... 5-29
Owner Checks and Services .............................. 6-8
Owners, Canadian ............................................... ii

9

P
Paint, Damage .............................................. 5-117
Park Brake .................................................... 2-33
Park (P)
Shifting Into ................................................ 2-34
Shifting Out of ............................................ 2-35
Parking
Over Things That Burn ................................. 2-36
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ..................... 3-43
Passenger Compartment Air Filter ..................... 3-36
Passenger Sensing System .............................. 1-60
Passing ......................................................... 4-12
PASS-KEY® III Electronic Immobilizer ................ 2-20
PASS-KEY® III Operation ................................. 2-21
Perchlorate Materials Requirements, California ...... 5-4
Power
Door Locks ................................................. 2-11
Electrical System ....................................... 5-121
Lumbar Controls ........................................... 1-4
Retained Accessory (RAP) ............................ 2-24
Seat ............................................................ 1-3
Steering Fluid ............................................. 5-39
Windows .................................................... 2-17
Pressure Cap ................................................. 5-27
Privacy .......................................................... 7-16
Event Data Recorders .................................. 7-16
Navigation System ....................................... 7-17

10

Privacy (cont.)
OnStar ....................................................... 7-17
Radio Frequency Identification ....................... 7-17
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ................. 2-12

R
Radio Frequency Identification (RFID),
Privacy ...................................................... 7-17
Radio(s) ........................................................ 3-95
Radios
Reception ................................................. 3-116
Setting the Clock ......................................... 3-95
Theft-Deterrent .......................................... 3-115
Rear Assist Handle Reading Lamps ................... 3-21
Rear Door Security Locks ................................ 2-12
Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ........................... 2-38
Rearview Mirrors ............................................. 2-38
Reclining Seatbacks .......................................... 1-5
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ................. 6-12
Recreational Vehicle Towing ............................. 4-27
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System .................. 2-3
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System,
Operation ..................................................... 2-4
Remote Vehicle Start ........................................ 2-7
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing
the Spare Tire ........................................... 5-100

Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................... 5-98
Replacement Bulbs ......................................... 5-60
Replacement Parts, Maintenance ...................... 6-13
Replacement, Windshield ................................. 5-61
Reporting Safety Defects
Canadian Government .................................. 7-14
General Motors ........................................... 7-14
United States Government ............................ 7-14
Restraint System Check
Checking the Restraint Systems .................... 1-66
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash .......................................... 1-67
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................... 2-24
Roadside
Assistance Program ....................................... 7-6
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .................... 4-22
Routing, Engine Drive Belt ............................... 6-14
Running Out of Fuel ........................................ 2-37

S
Safety Belt
Reminder Light ............................................ 3-41
Safety Belts
Care of .................................................... 5-114
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................ 1-15
Lap-Shoulder Belt ........................................ 1-22

Safety Belts (cont.)
Safety Belt Extender .................................... 1-28
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ................. 1-28
Safety Belts Are for Everyone ....................... 1-10
Safety Warnings and Symbols .............................. iii
Scheduled Maintenance ..................................... 6-4
Seatback, Folding Passenger ............................. 1-8
Seats
Head Restraints ............................................ 1-7
Heated Seats ............................................... 1-4
Passenger Folding Seatback ........................... 1-8
Power Lumbar .............................................. 1-4
Power Seat .................................................. 1-3
Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 1-5
Split Folding Rear Seat .................................. 1-9
Securing a Child Restraint
Rear Seat Position ...................................... 1-46
Right Front Seat Position .............................. 1-49
Service ........................................................... 5-3
Accessories and Modifications ......................... 5-3
Adding Equipment to the Outside
of Your Vehicle .......................................... 5-5
California Perchlorate Materials Requirements ..... 5-4
California Proposition 65 Warning .................... 5-3
Doing Your Own Work ................................... 5-4
Engine Soon Light ....................................... 3-50
Publications Ordering Information ................... 7-15

11

Service, Scheduling Appointments ....................... 7-9
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .............. 1-64
Setting the Clock ............................................ 3-95
Sheet Metal Damage ..................................... 5-117
Shifting Into Park (P) ....................................... 2-34
Shifting Out of Park (P) ................................... 2-35
Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .......................... 3-8
Spare Tire
Compact ................................................... 5-109
Installing ................................................... 5-100
Removing ................................................... 5-98
Storing ..................................................... 5-107
Specifications, Capacities ............................... 5-128
Speedometer .................................................. 3-40
Split Folding Rear Seat ..................................... 1-9
Stabilitrak® Plus System .................................... 4-8
Start Vehicle, Remote ....................................... 2-7
Starting the Engine ......................................... 2-25
Steering ........................................................ 4-10
Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ....................... 3-115
Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel ................................. 3-7
Storage Areas
Center Console Storage Area ........................ 2-44
Convenience Net ......................................... 2-44
Cupholder(s) ............................................... 2-43
Glove Box .................................................. 2-43
Sunglasses Storage Compartment .................. 2-44

12

Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow ..................... 4-21
Sun Visors ..................................................... 2-18
Sunroof ......................................................... 2-44

T
Tachometer .................................................... 3-40
Taillamps
Turn Signal, and Stoplamps .......................... 5-58
TCS Warning Light .......................................... 3-47
Theft-Deterrent, Radio .................................... 3-115
Theft-Deterrent Systems ................................... 2-18
Content Theft-Deterrent ................................ 2-18
PASS-Key® III Electronic Immobilizer .............. 2-20
PASS-Key® III Operation .............................. 2-21
Tilt Wheel ........................................................ 3-7
Time, Setting .................................................. 3-95
Tire
Pressure Light ............................................. 3-49
Tires ............................................................. 5-62
Aluminum Wheels, Cleaning ........................ 5-116
Buying New Tires ........................................ 5-78
Chains ....................................................... 5-84
Changing a Flat Tire .................................... 5-96
Cleaning ................................................... 5-117
Compact Spare Tire ................................... 5-109

Tires (cont.)
Different Size .............................................. 5-80
If a Tire Goes Flat ....................................... 5-85
Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................ 5-69
Inspection and Rotation ................................ 5-75
Installing the Spare Tire .............................. 5-100
Pressure Monitor Operation ........................... 5-72
Pressure Monitor System .............................. 5-71
Removing the Flat Tire ............................... 5-100
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............... 5-98
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools .......... 5-107
Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit ................... 5-86
Tire Sidewall Labeling .................................. 5-63
Tire Terminology and Definitions .................... 5-66
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ......................... 5-80
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ................. 5-82
Wheel Replacement ..................................... 5-82
When It Is Time for New Tires ...................... 5-77
Towing
Recreational Vehicle ..................................... 4-27
Towing a Trailer .......................................... 4-29
Your Vehicle ............................................... 4-27

Traction
Control System (TCS) .................................... 4-6
Control System Warning Light ....................... 3-47
Enhanced Traction System (ETS) .................... 4-7
Enhanced Traction System (ETS)
Warning Light .......................................... 3-48
Stabilitrak® Plus System ................................. 4-8
Transmission
Fluid, Automatic ........................................... 5-22
Up-Shift Light .............................................. 3-45
Transmission Operation, Automatic .................... 2-28
Trunk ............................................................ 2-14
Turn and Lane-Change Signals .......................... 3-8
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ........................... 3-7

U
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ............................ 5-80
Up-Shift Light ................................................. 3-45
Using this Manual ............................................... iii

13

V
Vehicle
Control ........................................................ 4-3
Damage Warnings ........................................... iv
Loading ...................................................... 4-22
Symbols ......................................................... iv
Vehicle Customization, DIC .............................. 3-89
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy .................. 7-16
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) ............................................ 5-119
Service Parts Identification Label .................. 5-120
Vehicle, Remote Start ....................................... 2-7
Ventilation Adjustment ...................................... 3-36
Visors ........................................................... 2-18

W
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators ................ 3-38
Warnings
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-67
Hazard Warning Flashers ............................... 3-6
Other Warning Devices .................................. 3-6
Safety and Symbols ......................................... iii
Vehicle Damage .............................................. iv

14

Wheels
Alignment and Tire Balance .......................... 5-82
Different Size .............................................. 5-80
Replacement ............................................... 5-82
Where to Put the Restraint ............................... 1-38
Windows ....................................................... 2-16
Power ........................................................ 2-17
Windshield
Replacement ............................................... 5-61
Washer Fluid .............................................. 5-40
Wiper Blade Replacement ............................. 5-61
Wiper Blades, Cleaning .............................. 5-116
Wiper Fuses ............................................. 5-121
Wiper Lever ................................................ 3-10
Winter Driving ................................................ 4-17

X
XM Radio Messages ..................................... 3-114
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System .............. 3-118

Y
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................... 6-2



---

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.4
Linearized                      : No
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 5.5-c012 1.149602, 2012/10/10-18:10:24
Format                          : application/pdf
Modified                        : 2014:11:03 10:09:48.666-05:00
Creator                         : EDS
Title                           : Owner's Manual
Size                            : 2769009
Author                          : EDS
Extracted                       : 2014:11:02 18:23:41.641-06:00
Sha 1                           : 4cebf3fb9726caa50221d3099206672d1bb961a3
Modify Date                     : 2007:09:27 15:39:05-05:00
Metadata Date                   : 2007:09:27 15:39:05-05:00
Create Date                     : 2007:09:27 08:47:18-05:00
Creator Tool                    : XPP
Producer                        : 
Keywords                        : 
Tags                            : OwnerCenter:GMNA/asset_type/owner_manual, OwnerCenter:GMNA/2008/pontiac/grand_prix
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Count                      : 450

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools